[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025185663A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus

Info

Publication number
WO2025185663A1
WO2025185663A1 PCT/CN2025/080812 CN2025080812W WO2025185663A1 WO 2025185663 A1 WO2025185663 A1 WO 2025185663A1 CN 2025080812 W CN2025080812 W CN 2025080812W WO 2025185663 A1 WO2025185663 A1 WO 2025185663A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
sub
area
identifier
region
type
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2025/080812
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
WO2025185663A8 (en
Inventor
汪宇
罗禾佳
王俊
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025185663A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025185663A1/en
Publication of WO2025185663A8 publication Critical patent/WO2025185663A8/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04BTRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/14Relay systems
    • H04B7/15Active relay systems
    • H04B7/185Space-based or airborne stations; Stations for satellite systems
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W4/00Services specially adapted for wireless communication networks; Facilities therefor
    • H04W4/02Services making use of location information
    • H04W4/021Services related to particular areas, e.g. point of interest [POI] services, venue services or geofences
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular to communication methods and devices.
  • Non-terrestrial networks offer significant advantages, including global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, easy deployment, and geographic independence. They have been widely used in a variety of fields, including maritime communications, positioning and navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting, and Earth observation. NTNs can be integrated with terrestrial networks, leveraging their strengths and complementing their weaknesses to form a seamless, integrated global communications network spanning land, sea, air, space, and space, meeting the diverse needs of users everywhere.
  • next-generation satellite network is generally showing an ultra-dense and heterogeneous trend.
  • the scale of satellites has grown from 66 in the Iridium constellation to 720 in the OneWeb constellation, and ultimately to the Starlink ultra-dense low-Earth orbit (LEO) satellite constellation of over 12,000.
  • LEO Starlink ultra-dense low-Earth orbit
  • satellite networks are heterogeneous, evolving from traditional single-layer communications networks to multi-layer ones.
  • the functionality of communication satellite networks is also becoming increasingly complex and diverse, gradually becoming compatible with and supporting functions such as navigation augmentation, Earth observation, and multi-dimensional on-orbit information processing.
  • the satellite coverage area may change over time, resulting in large signaling overhead for processes such as mobility management and beam management in the NTN.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus that can reduce the signaling overhead of an NTN network or a converged network of NTN and TN.
  • a communication method is provided.
  • the method can be performed by a terminal device, or by a component of the terminal device, such as a processor, chip, or chip system of the terminal device, or by a logic module or software that implements all or part of the terminal device's functions.
  • the method includes receiving sub-area configuration information and communicating based on the area configuration information.
  • the sub-area configuration information indicates an initial area and a subdivision level.
  • the initial area, subdivision level, and sub-area determination criteria are used to determine a sub-area, and the sub-area is included in the initial area.
  • the ground can be discretized into some initial areas first, and then the sub-areas included in the initial area can be determined based on the initial area, subdivision level and sub-area determination criteria, so that the network side and the terminal device can communicate based on the sub-area identifier.
  • the network side can indicate its coverage area or service area to the terminal device through the sub-area identifier, or configure a reference sub-area through the sub-area identifier.
  • the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced.
  • the solution of the present application can further subdivide the initial area based on the subdivision level, so that the network side can flexibly determine the subdivision level based on actual application, thereby flexibly determining the number and size of sub-areas, thereby improving the flexibility of communication.
  • the initial area is divided by subdivision level, and the initial area is usually fixed, it can be considered that the present application provides a unified sub-area division method (i.e., dividing the fixed initial area), so that network nodes can identify sub-areas at various subdivision levels and obtain the adjacency relationship between different sub-areas, reducing the complexity of network location management, realizing area-based service characteristic aggregation analysis, and thus improving communication performance.
  • the sub-region determination criterion includes: a projection of a reference position of the sub-region on a unit square is determined according to a subdivision level; and a reference position of the sub-region is determined according to a projection of the reference position of the sub-region on a unit square.
  • the reference position of the sub-region is determined according to the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on a unit square and the total number of initial regions.
  • the number and size of different sub-areas can be flexibly determined according to different subdivision levels on the basis of the initial area, thereby improving communication flexibility.
  • the projection RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square satisfies the following relationship:
  • i represents the identifier of the sub-region
  • L represents the subdivision level
  • N spot represents the total number of initial regions.
  • the subdivision level includes subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices. Based on this possible design, different network devices can correspond to different subdivision levels, thereby improving the flexibility of sub-area division.
  • the sub-area includes at least one of a first-class sub-area, a second-class sub-area, or a third-class sub-area, the first-class sub-area corresponds to the broadcast beam, the second-class sub-area corresponds to the service beam, and the third-class sub-area corresponds to the tracking area.
  • multiple sub-areas can be divided according to actual conditions. For example, in broadcast scenarios, a first sub-area corresponding to the broadcast beam can be divided; in service transmission scenarios, a second sub-area corresponding to the service beam can be divided; in tracking area-related scenarios, a third sub-area corresponding to the tracking area can be divided. Because sub-areas can be divided according to actual conditions, the number and size of each sub-area can be matched to the current situation. For example, the size of the first sub-area can be relatively large, and the size of the second sub-area can be relatively small. This improves the flexibility of sub-area division and the adaptability of sub-area division to the current situation, so that the sub-area division can improve communication performance.
  • the subdivision level includes at least one of a subdivision level corresponding to the first type of sub-region, a subdivision level corresponding to the second type of sub-region, or a subdivision level corresponding to the third type of sub-region.
  • different types of sub-regions can correspond to different subdivision levels. That is, different types of sub-regions can be divided based on the initial region, and different subdivision levels can correspond to different sub-region sizes, thereby increasing the flexibility of sub-region division.
  • communicating based on sub-area configuration information includes: determining a sub-area identifier based on the location information of the terminal device and the sub-area configuration information, and communicating based on the sub-area identifier.
  • the sub-area identifier includes at least one of an identifier of a first sub-area, an identifier of a second sub-area, or an identifier of a third sub-area; the first sub-area is a first-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, the second sub-area is a second-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, and the third sub-area is a third-category sub-area where the terminal device is located.
  • the identifier of the sub-area where the terminal device is located can be determined based on the location information of the terminal device, so that the terminal device and the RAN node can obtain relevant information of the sub-area based on the identifier of the sub-area, and thus communicate based on the relevant information of the sub-area to ensure communication performance.
  • the method when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the method further includes: receiving first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, where the first access information is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access a first network device.
  • the first access information includes at least one of the following: a random access timing RO, a random access preamble code, a timing advance TA, or a first time period, where the first time period is a time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the first type of area.
  • the sub-area identifier when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: determining first access information corresponding to the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; and accessing the first network device based on the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the network side can indicate the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area
  • terminal devices in the first type of sub-area can access the first network device based on the first access information.
  • the network can indicate different random access resources for different first type sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different first type sub-areas to access the first network device using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions during random access by terminal devices and improving access success rates.
  • the method when the sub-area includes a second-type sub-area, the method further includes: receiving communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second-type sub-area.
  • the communication resources include at least one of the following: frequency domain resources, polarization mode, or a second time period, where the second time period is a time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the second type of sub-area.
  • the sub-area identifier when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the second sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: determining the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area based on the identifier of the second sub-area; and sending first information on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area, where the first information indicates the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the network can indicate the identifier of the second-type sub-area and its corresponding communication resource, the terminal device in the second-type sub-area can use the communication resource to communicate with the first network device. Therefore, the network can indicate different communication resources for different second-type sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different second-type sub-areas to communicate with the network device using different resources, reducing resource collisions and thereby improving communication performance.
  • the method further includes: receiving first information and/or second information.
  • the first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, the first sub-area set including first-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set including second-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device.
  • the second information indicates first-type sub-areas in the first sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device, and/or indicates second-type sub-areas in the second sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the method further includes: receiving information indicating N third time periods and N first sub-region subsets, and/or indicating M fourth time periods and M second sub-region subsets.
  • the sub-area identifier when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area, communication is performed according to the sub-area identifier, including: communicating according to the identifier of the first sub-area during the time period when the first sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device; or communicating according to the identifier of the second sub-area during the time period when the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the network can indicate to the terminal device the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area of the beam service of the first network device, allowing the terminal device to communicate within the beam service time, thereby improving communication performance.
  • the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area of the beam service of the first network device can be indicated by a sub-area identifier or bitmap.
  • the method when the sub-area includes a first-category sub-area, the method further includes: receiving information indicating at least one of the following: an identifier of a reference sub-area, a first elevation angle, and ephemeris information of a first network device or ephemeris information of a second network device.
  • the reference sub-area is a first-category sub-area in a first cell, where the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device; and the first elevation angle is a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the sub-area identifier when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: determining the reference position of the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; determining the remaining service time of the first sub-area based on the reference position of the first sub-area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, and the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area; and starting neighboring cell measurement before the end of the remaining service time.
  • this design can be applicable to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
  • the terminal device performs neighboring cell measurements within the first time window, and the starting time of the first time window is related to the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device. Due to the movement of the network device, the network device may be located in different positions at different times, so that the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device varies with time. Therefore, this design can be applicable to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
  • the sub-area identifier when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: initiating neighboring cell measurement when at least one of the following is met: the distance between the reference position of the first sub-area and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a third threshold; or, the difference between the identifier of the first sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold.
  • the conditions for triggering neighbor cell measurements are related to the location of the terminal device.
  • the above conditions may be satisfied differently. Therefore, this solution can be applied to scenarios where the mobility of the terminal device triggers cell reselection.
  • the method when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the method further includes: receiving third information, the third information indicating the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area, the fourth sub-area being a first type of sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.
  • the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of the target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble code; the target beam is the beam of the second network device.
  • the network can indicate the identifier of the fourth sub-area and its corresponding access information to the terminal device, allowing the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access other network devices based on the access information.
  • the network can indicate different random access resources for different fourth sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different fourth sub-areas to access other network devices using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions when the terminal device performs random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
  • the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area are located in the sub-header of the media access control MAC protocol data unit PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area are located in the MAC control element CE of the MAC PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth sub-area is located in the sub-header of the MAC PDU, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.
  • the sub-area identifier when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: determining whether the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area; if the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, accessing the second network device according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the terminal device accesses the second network device when the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area
  • the identifier of the fourth sub-area indicated by the network to the terminal device can be understood as a switching command, which is used to instruct the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access other network devices, thereby realizing the switching of the terminal device.
  • the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area
  • the first type of sub-area is a sub-area in which the second network device is effective
  • communication is performed according to the sub-area identifier, including: receiving third access information corresponding to the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area, the third access information is used for the terminal device in the first sub-area to access the second network device; and accessing the second network device according to the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the network can indicate access information corresponding to each first-class sub-area, so that terminal devices in the first-class sub-area can access the second network device based on the access information.
  • the network can indicate different random access resources for different first-class sub-areas, so that terminal devices in different first-class sub-areas can access the second network device using different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
  • the method when the sub-area includes a third-category sub-area, the method further includes: receiving fourth information, the fourth information including an identifier of the reference sub-area and a value K, or the fourth information including an identifier of the reference sub-area and an updated distance threshold, and the reference sub-area is a third-category sub-area; communicating according to the configuration information of the sub-area, including: updating the tracking area according to the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area.
  • the tracking area update is performed according to the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area, including: determining N spot_ta third-category sub-areas according to the configuration information of the sub-area, where N spot_ta is the total number of third-category sub-areas; determining the identifier of the reference sub-area and the identifiers of the K third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area among the N spot_ta third-category sub-areas as a first tracking area code list; and initiating a tracking area update when there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list.
  • the tracking area update is performed based on the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area, including: determining the reference position of the reference sub-area based on the configuration information of the sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area; and initiating the tracking area update when the distance between the terminal device and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to the update distance threshold.
  • the tracking area of the terminal device can be updated in time based on the divided third-category sub-area, avoiding the paging failure of the terminal device due to the failure to update the tracking area, and improving the paging success rate of the terminal device, thereby ensuring service transmission and improving user experience.
  • a communication method which can be executed by a first network device, or by a component of the first network device, such as a processor, chip, or chip system of the first network device, or by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first network device.
  • the method includes: obtaining configuration information of the sub-area and sending the configuration information.
  • the configuration information indicates the initial area and the subdivision level, and the initial area, the subdivision level, and the sub-area determination criteria are used to determine the sub-area, and the sub-area is included in the initial area.
  • the sub-region determination criterion includes: a projection of a reference position of the sub-region on a unit square is determined according to a subdivision level; and a reference position of the sub-region is determined according to a projection of the reference position of the sub-region on a unit square.
  • the reference position of the sub-region is determined according to the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on a unit square and the total number of initial regions.
  • the projection RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square satisfies the following relationship:
  • i represents the identifier of the sub-region
  • L represents the subdivision level
  • N spot represents the total number of initial regions.
  • the subdivision level includes subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices respectively.
  • the sub-area includes at least one of a first-class sub-area, a second-class sub-area, or a third-class sub-area, the first-class sub-area corresponds to the broadcast beam, the second-class sub-area corresponds to the service beam, and the third-class sub-area corresponds to the tracking area.
  • the subdivision level includes at least one of a subdivision level corresponding to the first type of sub-region, a subdivision level corresponding to the second type of sub-region, or a subdivision level corresponding to the third type of sub-region.
  • the method when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the method further includes: sending first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, where the first access information is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access a first network device.
  • the method when the sub-area includes a second-type sub-area, the method further includes: sending communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second-type sub-area.
  • the method further includes: sending first information and/or second information.
  • the first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, the first sub-area set including first-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set including second-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device.
  • the second information indicates first-type sub-areas in the first sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device, and/or indicates second-type sub-areas in the second sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the method when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the method further includes: sending third information, the third information indicating the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area, the fourth sub-area being a first type of sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.
  • the method further includes: sending fourth information, the fourth information including an identifier of the reference sub-area and a value K, or the fourth information including an identifier of the reference sub-area and an updated distance threshold, and the reference sub-area is a third-category sub-area.
  • a communication device for implementing various methods.
  • the communication device includes modules, units, or means corresponding to the methods, wherein the modules, units, or means can be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software implementations.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the processing module may be configured to implement the processing functionality of any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.
  • the transceiver module may include a receiving module and a transmitting module, respectively configured to implement the receiving functionality and the transmitting functionality of any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.
  • the transceiver module may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.
  • a communication device comprising: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device executes the method described in any one of the aspects.
  • a communication device comprising: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device; the processor is used to execute a computer program or instruction so that the communication device executes the method described in any aspect.
  • a communication device comprising: at least one processor; the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instruction stored in a memory, so that the communication device performs the method described in any one of the aspects.
  • the memory may be coupled to the processor, or may be independent of the processor.
  • a communication device for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system), which includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in either the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • the communication device includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.
  • the device when it is a chip system, it can be composed of a chip or include a chip and other discrete devices.
  • the communication device described in aspects 3 to 7 may be the terminal device in aspect 1, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or, the communication device may be the first network device in aspect 2, or a device included in the first network device, such as a chip or a chip system.
  • a communication device which may be a terminal device, or a module or unit (for example, a chip, or a chip system, or a circuit) in the terminal device that corresponds one-to-one to the method/operation/step/action described in the first aspect, or a module or unit that can be used in combination with the terminal device; or, the communication device may be a first network device, or a module or unit (for example, a chip, or a chip system, or a circuit) in the first network device that corresponds one-to-one to the method/operation/step/action described in the second aspect, or a module or unit that can be used in combination with the first network device.
  • the communication device provided in any one of the third to eighth aspects is a chip
  • the sending action/function of the communication device can be understood as output information
  • the receiving action/function of the communication device can be understood as input information
  • a computer-readable storage medium which stores a computer program or instruction.
  • the communication device can execute the method described in any one of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a computer program product comprising instructions, which, when executed on a communication device, enables the communication device to execute the method described in any one of the first aspect or the second aspect.
  • a communication system which may include a terminal device and a first network device.
  • the terminal device is configured to implement the method described in the first aspect and any one of its designs
  • the first network device is configured to implement the method described in the second aspect and any one of its designs.
  • the technical effects brought about by any design method in the third aspect to the eleventh aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by different design methods in the first aspect or the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of beam coverage in a non-staring mode and a staring mode in an NTN provided by the present application;
  • FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a projection of a beam on the ground provided by the present application.
  • FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a regional description method based on an H3 geographic grid provided by the present application.
  • FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a group handover scenario provided by the present application.
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a cell switching process provided by the present application.
  • FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a beam management process provided by the present application.
  • FIGS 7 to 11 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the communication system provided by this application.
  • FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a mapping relationship between beams and areas of a network device provided by the present application.
  • FIG13 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application.
  • FIGS 14 and 15 are schematic diagrams of the distribution of an initial area provided by this application.
  • FIG16 is a schematic diagram of the distribution of sub-areas provided in this application.
  • FIG17 is a schematic diagram of a reference position provided by the present application.
  • FIGS 18-20 are flowcharts of the communication method provided by this application.
  • FIG21 is a schematic diagram of a sub-region set provided by the present application.
  • FIG22 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by this application.
  • FIG23 is a schematic diagram of an elevation angle provided by the present application.
  • FIG24 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by this application.
  • FIG25 is a schematic diagram of a time delay provided by the present application.
  • FIG26 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by this application.
  • FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a MAC PDU provided by this application.
  • FIGS 28 and 29 are flowcharts of the communication method provided by this application.
  • FIG30 is a schematic diagram of a sub-area corresponding to a sub-area identifier included in a tracking area code list provided by the present application;
  • FIG31 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by the present application.
  • Figures 32-34 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the communication device provided in this application.
  • plural means two or more than two.
  • At least one of the following or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c can be single or plural.
  • the words “first” and “second” are used to distinguish between identical or similar items with substantially the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art will understand that the words “first” and “second” do not limit the quantity or execution order, and the words “first” and “second” do not necessarily mean different.
  • the size of the serial number of each process does not mean the order of execution.
  • the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.
  • NTN Non-terrestrial networks
  • NTN Compared to terrestrial communications, NTN communications offer significant advantages, including global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, easy deployment, and freedom from geographical restrictions. Consequently, they have been widely adopted in various fields.
  • NTN can include a low-altitude platform (LAP) subnetwork, a high-altitude platform (HAP) subnetwork, and a satellite communications (SATCOM) subnetwork.
  • LAP low-altitude platform
  • HAP high-altitude platform
  • SATCOM satellite communications
  • the satellite communication system can be divided into geostationary earth orbit (GEO) satellite communication system, medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite communication system and low-earth orbit (LEO) satellite communication system.
  • GEO geostationary earth orbit
  • MEO medium earth orbit
  • LEO low-earth orbit
  • Non-gazing mode (earth-moving) and gazing (earth-fixed or quasi-earth fixed) mode:
  • beam operating modes can generally be divided into non-staring mode and staring mode.
  • the coverage area of the satellite beam moves with the satellite over a period of time (e.g., between time t0 and time t2).
  • the satellite dynamically adjusts the beam pointing over a period of time (e.g., between time t0 and time t2) so that the beam covers approximately the same area on the ground.
  • the coverage area of the beam in staring mode still experiences a certain degree of jitter over time.
  • the embodiment of a beam in the protocol can be a spatial domain filter, or a spatial filter, or a spatial domain parameter, a spatial parameter, a spatial domain setting, a spatial setting, or quasi-colocation (QCL) information, a QCL assumption, a QCL indication, etc.
  • the beam can be indicated by a transmission configuration indication (TCI) state (TCI-state) parameter or a spatial relation parameter. Therefore, in this application, beam can be replaced by spatial filter, spatial filter, spatial parameter, spatial parameter, spatial setting, spatial setting, QCL information, QCL assumption, QCL indication, TCI-state, spatial relation, etc.
  • TCI transmission configuration indication
  • beam can be replaced by spatial filter, spatial filter, spatial parameter, spatial parameter, spatial setting, spatial setting, QCL information, QCL assumption, QCL indication, TCI-state, spatial relation, etc.
  • the above terms are also equivalent to each other.
  • the beam in this application can also be replaced by other terms representing beams, and this application does not limit them.
  • the antenna pattern such as a given antenna model, can be used to calculate the corresponding contours of antenna gain or received power in different areas of the ground (which can be understood as the projection of the beam on the ground) to characterize the service area of the satellite/cell.
  • This contour can also be understood as the beam position.
  • Figure 2(a) shows the antenna gain pattern for a single GEO satellite 72-beam reference system.
  • the ellipse represents the projection of the beam on the ground, or the beam position.
  • Figure 2(b) shows the profile of the LEO satellite's beam in the latitude and longitude plane in non-staring mode.
  • the beam position can be considered statically bound to the beam. Therefore, this solution is commonly used in GEO satellite networks or satellite networks operating in non-staring mode. However, in staring mode, the inclination angle between the satellite and a certain area on the ground changes dynamically, and the beam projection also changes accordingly. This static binding of the beam position to the beam may no longer be applicable. Furthermore, since the projection of the beam on the ground is used as the beam position, parameters such as the beam reference point, the beam coverage area outline, and the satellite motion vector are usually required to determine the specific location of the beam position, resulting in significant signaling overhead.
  • the Earth's surface can be divided into regular pentagonal or hexagonal grids based on the H3 geographic grid.
  • This grid can be used to represent the service area of a satellite/cell.
  • the service area of a satellite/cell can include one or more grids.
  • Each grid can be understood as a wave position.
  • the Earth when dividing based on the H3 geographic grid, the Earth is regarded as an icosahedron, each face of which is a spherical triangle with 12 vertices, called a spherical icosahedron. Each face of the spherical icosahedron has hexagons arranged in the same manner.
  • This second possible implementation supports hierarchical addressing of wave positions.
  • the regular hexagon with the smallest area represents the wave position, and the regular hexagons with the remaining two areas can be used for hierarchical addressing of wave positions.
  • the following embodiments refer to the regular hexagons with the largest and second largest areas as the first and second regular hexagons, respectively.
  • the index of the first regular hexagon when performing hierarchical addressing of wave positions, can be understood as the first-level index of the wave position, the index of the second regular hexagon can be understood as the second-level index of the wave position, and the index of the regular hexagon with the smallest area can be understood as the third-level index of the wave position.
  • the first regular hexagon to which the wave position belongs can be first determined based on the first-level index
  • the second regular hexagon to which the wave position in the first regular hexagon belongs can be determined based on the second-level index
  • the wave position in the second regular hexagon can be determined based on the third-level index.
  • the precision of the beam radius is an integer and the beam radius is not an integer, it may not be possible to accurately use the beam to represent the service area of the satellite/cell.
  • the index value of the beam is usually indicated by 64 bits, and the signaling overhead is also large.
  • the movement of the satellite may cause group handover of connected terminal devices in a certain area, or group reselection of idle terminal devices in the area.
  • UE-G1 which includes multiple user equipment (UE)
  • UE-G2 which includes multiple user equipment (UE)
  • region 2 is served by one or more beams from satellite 2.
  • the movement of satellite 2 causes it to no longer serve region 2. Instead, one or more beams from satellite 1 take over.
  • the satellite covering region 2 changes, multiple UEs in UE-G1 undergo group handover, switching from satellite 2 to satellite 1.
  • the frequency of group switching is relatively high, about once every few seconds to tens of seconds.
  • Mobility management mainly includes cell handover, cell reselection, registration update, and tracking area update.
  • cell handover process in the terrestrial network mainly includes the following steps:
  • the source base station e.g., next-generation node B (gNodeB or gNB)
  • gNodeB next-generation node B
  • the terminal device measures the cell signal quality based on the measurement configurations.
  • the cell signal quality can be represented by reference signal received power (RSRP) and/or reference signal received quality (RSRQ).
  • RSRP reference signal received power
  • RSSQ reference signal received quality
  • the terminal device reports the measurement results to the source base station.
  • the terminal device can report periodically or based on event triggering.
  • the reporting triggering event can be the signal quality of the serving cell being less than threshold 1 and/or the signal quality of the neighboring cell being greater than threshold 2.
  • the source base station selects a suitable neighboring cell as the target cell based on the measurement results and sends a handover request to the target base station, which carries context information related to the user handover.
  • the target base station After receiving the handover request, the target base station performs admission control. If the terminal device is allowed to access, it sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station, which contains relevant information for the terminal device to access the target cell. After receiving the handover request confirmation message, the source base station sends a radio resource control (RRC) reconfiguration message to the terminal device, which contains relevant information for accessing the target cell.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • Handover execution After receiving the handover-related information, the terminal device completes the access process in the target cell.
  • the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the target cell to initiate random access in the target cell.
  • the period of the random access channel (RACH) configured by the network during cell handover can be 10/20/40/80/160 milliseconds (ms).
  • the base station broadcasts parameters such as the measurement configuration related to the neighboring cell.
  • the terminal device compares the signal quality measurement value with the parameters sent by the network (such as the reselection threshold, etc.) and autonomously reselects to the target neighboring cell if the reselection conditions are met.
  • NTN proposes to implement mobility management in NTN networks based on information such as time and location (such as the distance between the terminal device and the reference location (Reference Location) of the source cell and the reference location of the target cell).
  • time and location such as the distance between the terminal device and the reference location (Reference Location) of the source cell and the reference location of the target cell.
  • Reference Location here can also be referred to as a reference point, reference location point, location reference point, or reference point location.
  • the mobility management solution based on location information and other information is applied to the group switching/group reselection scenario triggered by satellite mobility, it will lead to frequent configuration information updates.
  • the network needs to frequently update the reference point location information of the cell, resulting in a large signaling overhead for mobility-related configuration on the network side.
  • Figure 6 illustrates an exemplary beam management process in a terrestrial new radio (NR) system.
  • a base station e.g., a gNB
  • SSB time-share synchronization signal block
  • a terminal device uses beam scanning to receive SSBs and measure the signal quality of each SSB beam.
  • the terminal device performs random access (RA) and sends message 1 (Msg1) to the base station, which carries a random access preamble.
  • the random access preamble carries the SSB index corresponding to the SSB beam with the best signal quality.
  • the base station After the base station receives the random access preamble using beam scanning, it can determine the SSB beam with the best signal quality as the downlink transmit beam. The base station can reuse this downlink transmit beam when receiving uplink signals.
  • the beam used by the terminal device to receive downlink signals is the SSB beam with the best signal quality, and the downlink receive beam can be reused when sending uplink signals.
  • the terminal device sends the SSB measurement result to the base station via a measurement report.
  • the base station determines the downlink transmit beam based on the SSB measurement result and reuses the downlink beam when receiving uplink signals.
  • the base station can indicate the downlink transmit beam it has determined to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can determine the downlink receive beam that matches the downlink transmit beam based on the beam pairing result.
  • the base station can use a narrower channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) beam for beam management (BM) (CSI-RS for BM) for beam scanning near the downlink transmit beam (i.e., the optimal SSB beam).
  • CSI-RS channel state information-reference signal
  • BM beam management
  • CSI-RS for BM beam scanning near the downlink transmit beam
  • the terminal device feeds back the CSI-RS for MB beam measurement results to the base station via a measurement report. Based on the measurement results, the base station determines a downlink transmit beam (e.g., the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam) and reuses this downlink transmit beam when receiving uplink signals.
  • the terminal device can receive the CSI-RS for BM beam using beam scanning to determine a downlink receive beam (e.g., the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam) and reuse this downlink receive beam when sending uplink signals.
  • the movement of the satellite causes the receiving beam on the terminal side to change frequently, which requires the network side to frequently configure the receiving waveform and transceiver time and frequency resources to the terminal, resulting in large signaling overhead.
  • the present application provides a communication method, which can first discretize the ground into some initial areas, and then determine the sub-areas included in the initial area based on the initial area, subdivision level and sub-area determination criteria, so that the network side and the terminal device can communicate based on the sub-area identifier.
  • the network side can indicate its coverage area or service area to the terminal device through the sub-area identifier, or configure a reference sub-area through the sub-area identifier.
  • the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced.
  • the solution of the present application can further subdivide the initial area based on the subdivision level, so that the network side can flexibly determine the subdivision level based on actual application, thereby flexibly determining the number and size of sub-areas, thereby improving communication flexibility.
  • the initial area is divided by subdivision levels, and the initial area is usually fixed, it can be considered that the present application provides a unified sub-area division method (i.e., dividing the fixed initial area), so that network nodes can identify sub-areas at various subdivision levels, thereby improving communication performance.
  • NTN systems may include, but are not limited to, satellite communication systems, high altitude platform station (HAPS) communications, drone communications, integrated communication and navigation (IcaN) systems, and global navigation satellite systems (GNSS).
  • HAPS high altitude platform station
  • IcaN integrated communication and navigation
  • GNSS global navigation satellite systems
  • NTN systems can be integrated with traditional mobile communication systems.
  • the mobile communication systems may include fourth-generation (4G) communication systems (e.g., long-term evolution (LTE) systems), world-wide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication systems, fifth-generation (5G) communication systems (e.g., NR systems), device-to-device (D2D) communication systems, machine-to-machine (M2M) communication systems, Internet of Things (IoT) communication systems, Internet of Vehicles (IoV) communication systems, and future mobile communication systems.
  • 4G fourth-generation
  • LTE long-term evolution
  • WiMAX world-wide interoperability for microwave access
  • 5G fifth-generation
  • D2D device-to-device
  • M2M machine-to-machine
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • IoV Internet of Vehicles
  • the above-mentioned communication system applicable to this application is only an example, and the communication system and communication scenarios applicable to this application are not limited to this.
  • the communication system and communication scenarios provided in this application do not impose any limitations on the solution of this application. They are uniformly explained here and will not be repeated below.
  • a communication system applicable to the solution of the present application may include at least one terminal device and at least one network device.
  • the network device may include an access network device and/or a core network device.
  • terminal devices may communicate with each other, with network devices, and with each other via wired or wireless means.
  • the terminal device may be a user-side device with wireless transceiver functions, or may be a chip or chip system provided in the device.
  • the terminal device may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), terminal, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station (MS), remote station, remote terminal, mobile terminal (MT), user terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc.
  • the terminal device may be, for example, a terminal device in IoT, V2X, D2D, M2M, 5G network, or a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN).
  • the terminal device may be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it may also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it may also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons and satellites, etc.).
  • the terminal device can be a drone, an IoT device (e.g., a sensor, an electricity meter, a water meter, etc.), a V2X device, a station (ST) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA) device, a handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device (also called a wearable smart device), a tablet computer or a computer with wireless transceiver capabilities, a virtual reality (VR) device, or a similar device.
  • IoT device e.g., a sensor, an electricity meter, a water meter, etc.
  • V2X device e.g., a V2X device
  • ST wireless local area network
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • SIP session
  • the present invention relates to wireless terminals for use in various fields, including virtual reality (VR) terminals, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical care, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, in-vehicle terminals, vehicles with vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication capabilities, intelligent connected vehicles, and drones with unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) to unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) communication capabilities.
  • the terminal device may be mobile or fixed, and this application does not impose specific limitations on this.
  • Core network equipment is deployed in the core network (CN) of the mobile communications architecture.
  • the core network provides an interface to the data network, offering communication connectivity, authentication, management, policy control, and data service bearer services for terminal devices.
  • exemplary core network equipment includes, but is not limited to, access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements, session management function (SMF) network elements, authentication server function (AUSF) network elements, policy control function (PCF) network elements, and user plane function (UPF) network elements.
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • SMF session management function
  • AUSF authentication server function
  • PCF policy control function
  • UPF user plane function
  • Access network equipment can be a network-side device with wireless transceiver capabilities, or it can be a chip, chip system, or module installed in the device. Access network equipment is located in the radio access network (RAN) of a mobile communication system and is used to provide access services to terminal devices. Access network equipment may include, but is not limited to, access network equipment deployed (or carried) on satellites, access network equipment deployed on aerial nodes, or access network equipment deployed on the ground.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the access network device deployed on a satellite or an aerial node can be a wireless relay node or a wireless backhaul node.
  • the access network device can serve as a layer 1 relay device to regenerate the physical layer signal (i.e., wireless frequency filtering, frequency conversion, and amplification processing) without having other higher protocol layers.
  • the access network device deployed on a satellite or an aerial node can implement some or all of the functions of a base station.
  • the access network device can also be called a satellite base station or an aerial base station, etc.
  • the satellite can be a LEO satellite, a MEO satellite, a GEO satellite, etc.
  • the aerial node can be an unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV), an aircraft, a high altitude platform (HAP), etc.
  • UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
  • HAP high altitude platform
  • Access network equipment deployed on the ground is called a terrestrial base station.
  • It can be an evolutionary Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in LTE or evolved LTE systems (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A), such as a traditional macro eNB or a micro eNB in heterogeneous network scenarios; or a next-generation Node B (gNodeB or gNB) in a 5G system; or a transmission reception point (TRP); or one or a group of antenna panels in a gNB; or a base station in a future evolved PLMN; or a device that implements base station functions in IoT, V2X, D2D, or M2M.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • CU and DU a CU-control plane
  • CP CU-user plane
  • RU radio unit
  • the CU and DU can be separate or included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU).
  • BBU baseband unit
  • the RU can be included in a radio frequency device or radio unit, such as a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH).
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • AAU active antenna unit
  • RRH remote radio head
  • the network device may be a network device or a module of a network device in an open radio access network (open RAN, ORAN) system.
  • ORAN open radio access network
  • CU may also be referred to as open (open, O)-CU
  • DU may also be referred to as O-DU
  • CU-CP may also be referred to as O-CU-CP
  • CU-UP may also be referred to as O-CU-UP
  • RU may also be referred to as O-RU.
  • Any of the CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.
  • the communication system may further include an NTN gateway (or gateway station).
  • the NTN gateway is deployed on the ground.
  • the NTN gateway can communicate with the satellite, and the link between the satellite and the NTN gateway is called a feeder link.
  • the NTN gateway has base station functions or partial base station functions.
  • the NTN gateway can function as a base station.
  • the NTN gateway can be deployed separately from the base station.
  • the communication system also includes ground base stations.
  • Figure 7 illustrates the example of separate deployment of the NTN gateway and base station.
  • a satellite when a satellite can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, it has data processing capabilities and can be used as a base station.
  • the NTN gateway and the satellite can transmit user-plane data from the terminal device via the satellite radio interface (SRI).
  • SRI satellite radio interface
  • satellites can perform some or all of the functions of a base station.
  • inter-satellite links ISLs
  • a satellite can have the DU processing capabilities of a base station, or in other words, the satellite can act as a DU.
  • the CU processing capabilities of the base station can be deployed on the ground, and the CU and DU communicate using the F1 interface through the NTN gateway.
  • NG refers to the interface between the base station and the core network.
  • Uu refers to the interface between the base station and the terminal device.
  • Xn refers to the interface between base stations. It is understood that as communication systems evolve, the names of the interfaces between the base station and the core network, between the base station and the terminal device, and between base stations may also change, and this application does not specifically limit this.
  • a satellite when a satellite acts as a wireless relay node and has relay forwarding capabilities, the satellite can be considered to be operating in transparent mode.
  • Transparent transmission can also be called bent-pipe forwarding transmission, where the signal only undergoes frequency conversion, signal amplification, and other processes on the satellite, and the satellite is transparent to the signal.
  • a satellite When a satellite has data processing capabilities and can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, it can be considered to be operating in regenerative mode.
  • a satellite may support only transparent mode, only regenerative mode, or both, and be able to switch between transparent mode and regenerative mode.
  • the NTN and terrestrial networks can be integrated.
  • Figure 11 illustrates a converged network architecture for the NTN and terrestrial networks, as provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • satellites 101 and 102 operate in regenerative mode, while satellite 103 operates in transparent mode.
  • the architecture may include ground base stations 104 and 105, aerial base stations 106 and 107, and core network equipment.
  • Satellites, aerial base stations, and ground base stations can communicate directly or indirectly via wireless links, optical links, or other means.
  • Satellites can provide communication, navigation, or positioning services to terminal devices using multiple beams. Satellites use multiple beams to cover their service area, and different beams can communicate using one or more of time division, frequency division, and space division. Satellites communicate wirelessly with terminal devices by broadcasting communication signals or navigation signals, and can also communicate wirelessly with ground-based devices.
  • the communication system described in the embodiment of the present application is intended to more clearly illustrate the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Ordinary technicians in this field can know that with the evolution of network architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is also applicable to similar technical problems.
  • region in the following embodiments of this application refers to a geographical region.
  • a region may have at least one of the following attributes: shape, outline, size, radius, area, geographical location, etc.
  • a region can be understood as a geographical area of a given altitude or altitude range.
  • a region can refer to a geographical area with an altitude of 0 kilometers (km) above sea level or an altitude of about 0 km (such as in the range of [-2, 2] km), or a geographical area with an average altitude.
  • it can also refer to geographical areas of other specific altitudes or specific altitude ranges, such as a geographical area with an altitude of 10 km above sea level, or a geographical area with an altitude of about 10 km (such as in the range of [7, 13] km).
  • the region may also be referred to as a "wavelength,” a "geographical region,” etc.
  • the region may also be referred to as a "wavelength,” a "geographical region,” etc.
  • the shapes, outlines, sizes, radii, and areas of different regions may or may not be the same. Different regions may have different geographical locations. Different regions may or may not overlap.
  • the region is fixed relative to the earth, or it can be understood that the region refers to a geographical area that is fixed relative to the earth.
  • the region is fixed relative to the earth, which can be understood as: the outline, size or geographical location of the region does not change, for example, the outline, size or geographical location of the region does not change with time.
  • the region is fixed relative to the earth, which can be understood as: the outline of the region and the points in the region can be described by a three-dimensional coordinate system such as earth-centered earth-fixed (ECEF) coordinates, a geodetic coordinate system, or an earth-centered inertial (ECI) coordinate system, or the coordinates of each point on the outline of the region in a three-dimensional coordinate system such as ECEF, geodetic coordinate system, or ECI coordinate system are fixed and unchanged.
  • ECEF earth-centered earth-fixed
  • ECI earth-centered inertial
  • the shape of the region may be a regular hexagon, or other shapes such as a regular pentagon, a circle, an ellipse, etc.
  • the shape of the region may be an irregular shape, which is not limited.
  • the shape of a region can be defined by a protocol or by a network device.
  • the region shapes defined by different network devices can be the same or different.
  • the same network device can also define multiple region shapes.
  • the size, radius, and area of a region can be defined by a protocol or by a network device.
  • the size, radius, and area of a region defined by different network devices can be the same or different.
  • the same network device can also define multiple region sizes, multiple region radii, or multiple region areas.
  • the earth may be divided into multiple regions, and the multiple regions may be indexed (eg, numbered).
  • the geographic location of a region is determined by the region's identifier. That is, the geographic location of a region can be obtained based on the region's identifier, or in other words, there is a correlation between the region's identifier and the region's geographic location. For example, multiple regions can be discretized on the earth, each corresponding to an identifier, and the geographic location of the region can be obtained based on the region's identifier.
  • the geographical location of the area may be determined according to at least one of the following: the total number of areas N spot , the radius of the area R spot , or the radius of the earth Re .
  • the total number of regions can be understood as the total number of discrete regions on Earth.
  • the N spot regions can completely cover the Earth, e.g., any location on Earth belongs to a certain region; alternatively, the N spot regions can cover a portion of Earth's geographic locations, e.g., the N spot regions may not cover the South Pole and/or the North Pole, i.e., the South Pole and/or the North Pole may not contain such regions.
  • the radii of the N spot areas can be the same, that is, the radius of each area is R spot .
  • the radius of the area can be the radius of the circumcircle of the regular hexagon; when the area is a circle, the radius of the area can be the radius of the circle; when the area is an ellipse, the radius of the area can include a major radius or a minor radius.
  • the radius of the earth can be a constant, such as 6378 km; or, the radius of the earth can be different for different time and space positions, for example, the radius of the earth can include the equatorial radius or the polar radius.
  • the polar radius can be used; when dividing regions in non-polar regions, the equatorial radius can be used.
  • the radius of the earth may include a major axis and a minor axis, and the values of the major axis and the minor axis are different.
  • the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth can be the same for each region, that is, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth can be considered constants.
  • the variable affecting the geographical location of the region can be considered as the identifier of the region.
  • each region includes (or has) a reference location, which may be, for example, the center of the region.
  • the geographic location of a region may refer to the geographic location of the reference location in the region.
  • the geographic location of the region is determined by the region's identifier, which can be understood as follows: the reference location in the region is determined by the region's identifier.
  • the geographic location of the region may represent the outline of the region or the range of the region.
  • the geographic location of the reference location in the region may be determined based on the region's identifier, and the range or outline of the region may be determined based on the geographic location of the reference location and the radius of the region.
  • the association relationship between the reference position of the region and the identifier of the region is determined based on the Fibonacci criterion, or in other words, the association relationship between the reference position of the region and the identifier of the region satisfies the Fibonacci criterion.
  • this association relationship there are three implementations of this association relationship:
  • Method 1 The three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position of the region and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship (1):
  • i represents the identifier of the region.
  • Re represents the radius of the earth.
  • N spot represents the total number of regions.
  • RL(i) represents the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position in the region, and the three-dimensional coordinates refer to the coordinates in the three-dimensional coordinate system.
  • the three-dimensional coordinate system can be a spherical coordinate system, such as the ECEF coordinate system. Of course, it can also be other three-dimensional coordinate systems, such as the geodetic coordinate system, the earth-centered inertial (ECI) coordinate system, etc.
  • the unit square is the square in the Cartesian plane with vertices at (0,0), (1,0), (0,1), and (1,1).
  • RL( xi ) represents the projection metric of the reference position onto the unit square's x-axis
  • RL( yi ) represents the projection metric of the reference position onto the unit square's y-axis.
  • [x] represents the decimal part of x. It can also be expressed as frac(z) returns the fractional part of z.
  • RL( xi ) represents the projection metric of the region's reference position on the x-axis in a Cartesian coordinate system
  • RL( y ) represents the projection metric of the region's reference position on the y-axis in a Cartesian coordinate system.
  • the Cartesian coordinate system refers to a rectangular Cartesian coordinate system.
  • RL(i) represents the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference location
  • lon(i) represents the longitude of the reference location
  • lat(i) represents the latitude of the reference location.
  • the units of lon(i) and lat(i) are radians (rad).
  • N spot represents the total number of spots.
  • the radius of the region and the total number of regions satisfy the following relationship (4):
  • Nspot represents the total number of spots
  • Rspot represents the radius of a spot
  • the area in the embodiment of the present application may include at least one of a first type area, a second type area, or a third type area.
  • the first type area corresponds to a broadcast beam
  • the second type area corresponds to a service beam
  • the third type area corresponds to a tracking area (TA).
  • TA tracking area
  • the first type of area may be an area that can be served or covered by a broadcast beam of an access network device, or the first type of area corresponds to the service or coverage of a broadcast beam.
  • a broadcast beam may be used to send and/or receive broadcast information (such as system information).
  • the broadcast beam may be, for example, an SSB beam; the broadcast beam may be a wide beam.
  • the second type of area may be an area that can be served or covered by a service beam of an access network device, or the second type of area corresponds to the service or coverage of a service beam.
  • a service beam may be used to send and/or receive service data.
  • a service beam may include a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) beam, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) beam, a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS), etc.
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • CSI-RS channel state information-reference signal
  • a service beam may be a narrow beam.
  • the third type of area can correspond to the size information of the tracking area.
  • a third type of area can be understood as a tracking area.
  • the size of the third type of area is the size of the tracking area.
  • the first type of area may also be referred to as a "broadcast area,” “broadcast waveband,” or “broadcast geographic area”
  • the second type of area may also be referred to as a “service area,” “service waveband,” or “service geographic area”
  • the third type of area may also be referred to as a “tracking area waveband.” This application does not limit the specific names of the three types of areas.
  • the coordinates of the reference position in the area can be quickly and accurately determined according to the identification of the area, so that the outline, geographical location, etc. of the area can be quickly and accurately determined.
  • the radius of the area can be flexibly adjusted to adapt to different load capacities, such as adapting to different beam radii.
  • information exchange can be carried out between network equipment and terminal equipment based on the identification of the area.
  • signaling overhead can be significantly reduced; compared with the division method based on the H3 geographic grid, since the total number of areas is relatively small, the number of bits required to indicate the area identification is also small, which can also reduce signaling overhead.
  • the coverage area of an access network device may refer to the maximum area that the access network device can cover, or in other words, the coverage area of the access network device indicates (or reflects) the maximum coverage capability of the access network device.
  • the coverage area of the access network equipment changes with the movement of the access network equipment, that is, the coverage area of the access network equipment may be different at different times.
  • the coverage area of the access network equipment includes at least one of the above-mentioned areas (i.e., wavebands).
  • the wavelength included in the coverage area of the access network device may be different at different times.
  • the elliptical solid line can represent the coverage area of the access network device.
  • the areas represented by all regular hexagons in the elliptical solid line are the areas included in the coverage area of the access network device.
  • the service area of an access network device may refer to the maximum area that a beam of the access network device can serve (or cover), or in other words, the service area of the access network device indicates (or reflects) the maximum service capability of the access network device.
  • the service area of the access network device is smaller than or equal to the coverage area of the access network device.
  • the service area of the access network device may be the range indicated by the solid ellipse, in which case the service area of the access network device is equal to the coverage area of the first access network device; alternatively, the service area of the access network device may be smaller than the range indicated by the solid ellipse.
  • the service area of an access network device includes at least one of the aforementioned areas (i.e., wavebands).
  • the wavelengths included in the service area of the access network device may be different at different times.
  • the beam of the access network device may actually serve (or cover) part of the service area, and at different moments, the beam of the access network device may serve (or cover) different areas in the service area.
  • the beam of the access network device serves areas x1, x2, and x3 in the service area; as shown in (b) of Figure 12, at time T2, the beam of the access network device serves areas y1, y2, y3, and y4 in the service area.
  • the area currently being served (or covered) by the beam of the access network device can be called an active area or an activated area.
  • the area currently not being served (or covered) by the beam of the access network device can be called an inactive area or an inactive area.
  • the terminal device or network device may perform some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application. These steps or operations are merely examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, the various steps may be performed in a different order than those presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it is possible that not all of the operations in the embodiments of the present application need to be performed.
  • this application uses network devices and terminal devices as examples to illustrate the execution subjects of the interaction diagram, but this application does not limit the execution subjects of the interaction diagram.
  • the method executed by the network device in this application can also be executed by a module (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor) applied to the network device, and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the network device;
  • the method executed by the terminal device in this application can also be executed by a module (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor) applied to the terminal device, and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the terminal device.
  • sending information can be understood as one device sending information to another device, or it can also be understood as one logic module within a device sending information to another logic module.
  • a network device sending information can be understood as the network device sending information to another device (such as a terminal device), or it can be understood as logic module 1 (such as a processing module) in the network device sending information to logic module 2 (such as a transceiver module) in the network device.
  • receiving information can be understood as one device receiving information from another device, or it can also be understood as a logic module within a device receiving information from another logic module.
  • a terminal device receiving information can be understood as the terminal device receiving information from another device (such as a network device), or it can be understood as logic module 1 (such as a processing module) in the terminal device receiving information from logic module 2 (such as a transceiver module) in the terminal device.
  • sending information to... e.g., a terminal device
  • sending information to the terminal device can include sending information to the terminal device directly or indirectly, for example, after the sending end sends the information, it reaches the destination end through forwarding by an intermediate device.
  • Receiviving information from... e.g., a network device
  • receiving information from... e.g., a network device
  • receiving information sent by e.g., a network device
  • the related diagrams in the accompanying drawings can be understood as the source end of the information being the network device, which can include receiving information directly or indirectly from the network device.
  • the information may be processed as necessary between the source end and the destination end of the information transmission, such as format changes, encapsulation changes, etc., but the destination end can understand the valid information from the source end. Similar expressions in this application can be understood similarly and will not be repeated here.
  • the communication method may include the following steps:
  • a first network device obtains configuration information of a sub-area.
  • the configuration information indicates an initial region and a subdivision level.
  • the initial region, subdivision level, and subregion determination criteria are used to determine a subregion.
  • a subregion is included in the initial region, that is, the subregion can be smaller than or equal to the initial region.
  • the initial region meets all the characteristics of the region described above.
  • the reference position of the initial region is determined by an identifier of the initial region.
  • the reference position of the initial region is determined based on at least one of the following: the radius of the initial region, the radius of the Earth, or the total number of initial regions.
  • the total number of initial regions can be understood as the total number of initial regions discretely defined on the Earth. For details on regions, refer to the above description and are not further elaborated here.
  • Figure 14 shows the distribution of initial regions discretized using the above discretization method when the total number of initial regions is 197.
  • Figure 15 shows the distribution of initial regions discretized using the above discretization method when the total number of initial regions is 78,702.
  • the circles represent the reference positions of the initial regions, and the polygons centered at the reference positions represent the shapes of the initial regions.
  • the configuration information indicating the initial area may include: the configuration information indicating a radius R spot of the initial area and/or a total number N spot of the initial areas.
  • the identification of the initial areas can be obtained, for example, the identification of the initial areas belongs to 0, 1, ..., N spot -1 or 1, 2, ..., N spot .
  • the reference position of each initial area can be obtained, for example, the identification of the initial area and its reference position satisfy one of the above-mentioned relationships (1) to (3), so that the geographical locations of N spot initial areas can be known, that is, the distribution of the initial areas can be known.
  • the total number of initial areas can be determined based on the relationship between the radius of the initial area and the total number of initial areas, such as the above relationship (4), and then the reference position of each initial area can be determined based on the identification of the initial area, thereby determining the distribution of the initial areas.
  • the configuration information may include the total number of initial areas N spot and/or the specific value of the radius R spot of the initial area.
  • the protocol may predefine multiple total numbers of initial areas, or the first network device and the terminal device may pre-negotiate multiple total numbers of initial areas.
  • the first network device may pre-configure multiple total numbers of initial areas to the terminal device through RRC signaling.
  • the configuration information may include an initial area total number index, which corresponds to one of the multiple initial area total numbers.
  • the initial area total number index may be carried in a media access control (MAC) control element (CE) or downlink control information (DCI).
  • MAC media access control
  • CE control element
  • DCI downlink control information
  • a total number of N initial areas is defined, and the configuration information may include an index n, n ⁇ 1,2,...,N, then the total number of initial areas indicated by the configuration information is the nth total number of initial areas among the N total numbers of initial areas.
  • the subdivision level may be 0 or a positive integer.
  • a higher subdivision level means a greater number of sub-areas.
  • the total number of sub-areas may be 4 L N spot , where L represents the subdivision level and N spot represents the total number of initial areas.
  • the sub-region determination criteria include: the projection of the sub-region's reference position on a unit square is determined based on the subdivision level; and the sub-region's reference position is determined based on the projection of the sub-region's reference position on the unit square. Furthermore, the sub-region's reference position is determined based on the projection of the sub-region's reference position on the unit square and the total number of initial regions. That is, the projection of the sub-region's reference position on a unit square can be first determined based on the subdivision level, and then the sub-region's reference position is determined based on the projection of the sub-region's reference position on the unit square and the total number of initial regions.
  • the projection RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square satisfies the following relationship:
  • the network device or terminal device may first calculate the projections of the reference positions of sub-area 0 and sub-area 1 on the unit square, and then determine the projections of the reference positions of sub-areas 2 to 4 L N spot -1 on the unit square based on the recursive relationship.
  • the reference position RL(i) of the sub-region can be obtained. Since i ⁇ 0,...,4 L N spot -1 ⁇ , that is, i is related to the subdivision level, the reference position of the sub-region can also be recorded as RL(i,L).
  • the reference positions of sub-regions 0 to N spot -1 can also be determined according to the above relationship 1.
  • the size of the sub-region corresponding to the same index is different from the size of the initial region, and the sub-region corresponding to the index includes part of the area in the initial region corresponding to the index.
  • (a) is a schematic diagram of the reference position of the initial area
  • the black solid circle in (a) represents the reference position of the initial area, or the reference position of the sub-area when the subdivision level is 0,
  • the black hollow circle in (b) represents the reference position of the sub-area newly added based on (a)
  • the gray solid circle in (c) represents the reference position of the sub-area newly added based on (b).
  • the initial area may include at least one of the first, second, or third categories of areas.
  • the configuration information may indicate at least one of the following: the radius and/or total number of first category areas, the radius and/or total number of second category areas, or the radius and/or total number of third category areas.
  • the radius or total number of the three types of areas may be the same, in which case the configuration information may configure one radius or total number; or the radius or total number of the three types of areas may be different from each other, in which case the configuration information may configure the radius and/or total number for each of the three types of areas respectively; or, if the radius or total number of two types of areas among the three types of areas is the same, and the radius or total number of the other type of areas is different from it, then the configuration information may configure two sets of radius or total numbers.
  • the sub-area may include at least one of a first-category sub-area, a second-category sub-area, or a third-category sub-area.
  • the first-category sub-area corresponds to a broadcast beam and is a sub-area of the first-category area;
  • the second-category sub-area corresponds to a service beam and is a sub-area of the second-category area;
  • the third-category sub-area corresponds to a tracking area and is a sub-area of the second-category area.
  • the subdivision level indicated by the configuration information may include the subdivision level corresponding to the first type of sub-area (recorded as the first subdivision level), the subdivision level corresponding to the second type of sub-area (recorded as the second subdivision level), or the third type of subdivision level (recorded as the third subdivision level).
  • the first type of area, the first subdivision level, and the sub-area determination criteria are used to determine the first type of sub-area; the second type of area, the second subdivision level, and the sub-area determination criteria are used to determine the second type of sub-area; and the third type of area, the third subdivision level, and the sub-area determination criteria are used to determine the third type of sub-area.
  • the subdivision level indicated by the configuration information may include subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices.
  • the multiple network devices may include the first network device.
  • the multiple network devices may include different types of access network devices, such as access network devices deployed on satellites, access network devices deployed on aerial platforms, and ground base stations. Different types of access network devices may correspond to different subdivision levels.
  • the subdivision level corresponding to the access network device may be associated with location or angle information.
  • the angle information may be beam angle, elevation angle of the terminal device, antenna angle, etc.
  • the correlation between the subdivision level and the beam angle may be as shown in Table 1.
  • different subdivision levels can be used near the sub-satellite point and near the satellite edge point.
  • subdivision level Lx is used near the sub-satellite point
  • subdivision level Ly is used near the satellite edge point.
  • Using different subdivision levels at different locations can be used to dynamically adjust the distance between reference positions.
  • reference position 1 and reference positions 2-6 can be reference positions determined based on different subdivision levels.
  • different cell coverage ranges at different angles can be adapted to improve the efficiency of mobility management.
  • the configuration information may configure multiple sets of initial area information and subdivision levels. For example, the total number of initial areas, N spot_1 , and subdivision level, L1, the total number of initial areas, N spot_2 , and subdivision level, L2, and the total number of initial areas, N spot_3 , and subdivision level, L3, may be configured.
  • the first network device may also indicate to the terminal device the configuration to be ultimately used.
  • the first network device may be an access network device or a core network device. If the first network device is an access network device, the first network device may be deployed on a satellite or an aerial platform, or the first network device may be a ground base station. If the first network device is deployed on a satellite or an aerial platform, the first network device may have some or all base station functions, or the first network device may be used for transparent forwarding.
  • the first network device obtaining the sub-area configuration information may include: the first network device determining or generating the sub-area configuration information.
  • the first network device obtaining the sub-area configuration information may include: the first network device receiving the sub-area configuration information from the core network device or the ground base station.
  • S1302 The first network device sends sub-area configuration information.
  • the terminal device receives the sub-area configuration information.
  • the first network device when the first network device is an access network device, the first network device may send the configuration information via broadcast.
  • the terminal device may be any terminal device that receives the configuration information.
  • the first network device may send the configuration information to the terminal device via unicast, for example, by sending the configuration information to the terminal device via an RRC connection between the first network device and the terminal device.
  • the first network device when the first network device is a core network device, the first network device may send the sub-area configuration information to the terminal device via the access network device. For example, the first network device may send the sub-area configuration information to the access network device, and the access network device may then send the configuration information via broadcast or unicast.
  • the terminal device may determine the distribution of each sub-area based on the initial area, subdivision level, and sub-area determination criteria. For example, the terminal device may determine the reference location of each sub-area, the sub-area topology or coverage (such as the adjacency relationship between sub-areas), etc. If a third type of sub-area exists, the size of the tracking area corresponding to the third type of sub-area may also be determined.
  • the method for determining the reference position of the sub-area can refer to the relevant description in step S1301. Once the reference position of the sub-area is determined, the adjacency relationship between the sub-areas can be determined. Once the reference position and radius of the third type of sub-area are known, the size and geographic location of the third type of sub-area can be known, and the size of the third type of sub-area can be determined as the size of the tracking area.
  • the terminal device communicates according to the configuration information of the sub-area.
  • the terminal device communicates according to the configuration information of the sub-area, which can also be understood as the terminal device using the configuration information of the sub-area to assist in communication.
  • the communication may include at least one of initial access, beam management, mobility management, or tracking area update.
  • the terminal device communicating according to the sub-area configuration information may include the following steps S1303a and S1303b:
  • the terminal device determines a sub-area identifier according to the location information of the terminal device and the configuration information of the sub-area.
  • the location information of the terminal device may be GNSS location information of the terminal device.
  • the sub-area identifier is an identifier of the sub-area where the terminal device is located.
  • the terminal device can determine the identifier of each sub-area based on the configuration information of the sub-area, for example, the identifier of the sub-area belongs to 0, 1, ..., 4 L N spot -1. Based on the identifier of each sub-area, the reference position of each sub-area can be obtained, for example, the identifier of the sub-area and its reference position satisfy one of the above-mentioned relationships (1) to (3). Then, based on the location information of the terminal device, the distance between the terminal device and the reference position of each sub-area is obtained, and then the sub-area to which the reference position closest to the terminal device belongs is determined as the sub-area where the terminal device is located. In the case where the distance between the reference positions of multiple sub-areas and the terminal device is the same and closest, the terminal device can determine that the above-mentioned sub-area identifier includes the identifiers of the multiple sub-areas.
  • the sub-area identifier may include at least one of an identifier of the first sub-area, an identifier of the second sub-area, or an identifier of the third sub-area.
  • the first sub-area is the first-category sub-area where the terminal device is located
  • the second sub-area is the second-category sub-area where the terminal device is located
  • the third sub-area is the third-category sub-area where the terminal device is located.
  • the terminal device may determine the identifiers and reference locations of various sub-areas based on the configuration information, and then determine the first-category sub-area, the second-category sub-area, or the third-category sub-area where the terminal device is located based on the location information of the terminal device.
  • the sub-area identifier may include the sub-area where the terminal device is located in the multiple sub-areas corresponding to each network device.
  • the sub-area identifier includes at least one of the identifier of the fourth sub-area, the identifier of the fifth sub-area, or the identifier of the sixth sub-area.
  • the fourth sub-area is the fourth type of sub-area where the terminal device is located
  • the fifth sub-area is the fifth type of sub-area where the terminal device is located
  • the sixth sub-area is the sixth type of sub-area where the terminal device is located.
  • the fourth type of sub-area is determined based on the initial area, the subdivision level corresponding to the first network device, and the sub-area determination criteria; the fifth type of sub-area is determined based on the initial area, the subdivision level corresponding to the second network device, and the sub-area determination criteria; and the sixth type of sub-area is determined based on the initial area, the subdivision level corresponding to the third network device, and the sub-area determination criteria.
  • the first network device, the second network device, or the third network device can be of different types.
  • the three network devices may be an access network device deployed on a satellite, an access network device deployed on an aerial platform, and a ground base station.
  • the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier.
  • the communication may include one or more of initial access, beam management, and mobility management.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device is in an RRC non-connected state (such as an RRC idle state or an RRC deactivated state), the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the first sub-area; when the terminal device is in an RRC connected state, the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • an RRC non-connected state such as an RRC idle state or an RRC deactivated state
  • the terminal device communicating may include: the terminal device accessing the network device (such as initiating random access), or information and/or data transmission between the terminal device and the network device.
  • the terminal device accesses the network device; when the terminal device is in an RRC connected state, information and/or data transmission is performed between the terminal device and the network device.
  • the terminal device communicating according to the sub-area configuration information may include the following step S1303c:
  • step S1303c The terminal device updates the tracking area according to the configuration information of the sub-area.
  • the specific implementation of step S1303c will be described in detail in subsequent embodiments and will not be repeated here.
  • the ground can be discretized into some initial areas first, and then the sub-areas included in the initial area can be determined based on the initial area, the subdivision level and the sub-area determination criteria, so that the network side and the terminal device can communicate based on the sub-area identifier.
  • the network side can indicate its coverage area or service area to the terminal device through the sub-area identifier, or configure a reference sub-area through the sub-area identifier.
  • the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced.
  • the solution of the present application can further subdivide the initial area based on the subdivision level, so that the network side can flexibly determine the subdivision level based on actual application, thereby flexibly determining the number and size of sub-areas, thereby improving the flexibility of communication.
  • the initial area is divided by subdivision level, and the initial area is usually fixed, it can be considered that the present application provides a unified sub-area division method (i.e., dividing the fixed initial area), so that network nodes can identify sub-areas at various subdivision levels and obtain the adjacency relationship between different sub-areas, reducing the complexity of network location management, realizing area-based service characteristic aggregation analysis, and thus improving communication performance.
  • step S1303b can be implemented in the following eight ways:
  • Mode 1 When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG19 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:
  • the terminal device determines first access information corresponding to the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area.
  • the first network device also sends first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area.
  • the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area can be carried in the same message as the configuration information of the sub-area.
  • the first access information can be included in the configuration information of the sub-area or not; or, the first access information and the configuration information of the sub-area can be in different messages.
  • the first network device sends the first access information corresponding to each first type of sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device, or the first network device sends the first access information corresponding to each activated first type of sub-area of the first network device.
  • the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access the first network device.
  • the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area includes at least one of the following: a random access occasion (RACH occasion, RO), a random access preamble, a timing advance (TA), or a first time period.
  • the RO indicates time domain and/or frequency domain resources occupied by a random access channel (RACH).
  • the first time period is a time period during which a beam of the first network device serves the first type of sub-area, or the first time period is a time period during which access to the first network device is allowed, or the first time period is a time period during which the RO, random access preamble, and TA are valid.
  • the first access information corresponding to different first-type sub-areas in the coverage area or service area of the first network device may be the same or different; the access information corresponding to different activated first-type sub-areas of the first network device may be the same or different.
  • the terminal device can search according to the identifier of the first sub-area.
  • the first access information corresponding to the identifier of the first sub-area is the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the terminal device accesses the first network device according to the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • accessing the first network device may include: initiating random access to the first network device, or initiating random access to access the first network device.
  • the terminal device may send a random access preamble to the first network device on the RO indicated by the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area within the first time period.
  • the first network device can indicate the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, terminal devices in the first type of sub-area can access the first network device based on the first access information.
  • the first network device can indicate different random access resources for different first type sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different first type sub-areas to access the first network device using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions when terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
  • the first network device may also send access information corresponding to each network device. For example, based on the example in step S1303a above, the first network device may send at least one of the following: access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area of the first network device, access information corresponding to the fifth sub-area of the second network device, or access information corresponding to the sixth sub-area of the third network device. After the terminal device accesses the access information corresponding to each network device, it may access a network device based on the access information corresponding to that network device.
  • Mode 2 When the sub-area includes the second type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the second sub-area, as shown in FIG20 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:
  • the terminal device determines the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area according to the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the first network device also sends communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area.
  • the communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area can be carried in the same message as the sub-area configuration information, or can be carried in different messages.
  • the first network device sends the communication resource information corresponding to each second-type sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device, or the communication resource information corresponding to each activated second-type sub-area of the first network device.
  • the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information corresponding to the second type of sub-area are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second type of sub-area.
  • the communication resources corresponding to the second type of sub-area include at least one of the following: frequency domain resources, polarization mode, or second time period.
  • the second time period is the time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the second type of sub-area, or the second time period is the available time period of the frequency domain resource, or the second time period is the effective time period of the frequency domain resource.
  • the communication resource information corresponding to the second type of sub-area can also be understood as the bandwidth part (BWP) information corresponding to the second type of sub-area.
  • the frequency domain resource can be understood as the frequency of the BWP, such as the center frequency of the BWP.
  • the communication resources corresponding to different second-type sub-areas in the coverage area or service area of the first network device may be the same or different; the communication resources corresponding to different activated second-type sub-areas of the first network device may be the same or different.
  • This application does not impose any specific limitation on this.
  • the terminal device can search according to the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the communication resource corresponding to the identifier of the second sub-area is the communication resource corresponding to the second sub-area.
  • the terminal device sends information A on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area.
  • the first network device receives information A on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area.
  • Information A indicates an identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the first terminal device may send information A to the first network device on the frequency domain resources corresponding to the second sub-area within the second time period.
  • information A may include an identifier of the second sub-area.
  • information A may include a bitmap, wherein the bits in the bitmap correspond one-to-one to the identifier of the second type of sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device.
  • the terminal device may set the bit in the bitmap corresponding to the identifier of the second sub-area to a preset value (e.g., "1" or "0"). That is, the identifier corresponding to the bit in the bitmap set to the preset value is the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the first network device may perform location identification of the terminal device according to the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the terminal device has sent the location of the terminal device (referred to as location 1) to the first network device before step S130322.
  • the first network device learns the identifier of the second sub-area, it can determine the reference location of the second sub-area based on one or more of the above relationships (1) to (3), and then determine the range of the second sub-area in combination with the radius of the second sub-area. If location 1 is within the second sub-area, or the distance between location 1 and the reference location of the second sub-area is less than or equal to a preset threshold, the first network device considers location 1 to be true.
  • the first network device can determine the reference location of the second sub-area (denoted as location 2) based on the identifier of the second sub-area. Furthermore, combining the radius of the first sub-area and the total number of first sub-areas, the first sub-area in which location 2 is located is determined, and the first sub-area in which location 2 is located is determined as the first sub-area (i.e., the first sub-area) in which the terminal device is located. That is, the first network device can determine the first sub-area in which the terminal device is located based on the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the first network device may perform measurement configuration for the terminal device in the second sub-area.
  • neighboring cell set 1 may be configured for the terminal device in the second sub-area so that the terminal device in the second sub-area can measure neighboring cells in neighboring cell set 1.
  • the first network device may configure different neighboring cell sets for different second-type sub-areas, for example, configuring neighboring cell set 1 for terminal devices in second-type sub-area 1, and configuring neighboring cell set 2 for terminal devices in second-type sub-area 2.
  • the first network device may configure different neighboring cell sets for different second-type sub-areas, for example, configuring neighboring cell set 1 for terminal devices in second-type sub-area 1, and configuring neighboring cell set 2 for terminal devices in second-type sub-area 2.
  • configuring a larger neighboring cell set for all terminal devices such as configuring neighboring cell set 1 + neighboring cell set 2
  • the first network device may perform beam management according to the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the first network device can determine the first type of sub-area in which the terminal device is located based on the identifier of the second sub-area, that is, determine that the terminal device is in the first sub-area. Subsequently, the second sub-area beam and the first sub-area beam can be configured for the terminal device to satisfy the QCL relationship, allowing the terminal device to dynamically and autonomously adjust the beam based on the second sub-area beam or the first sub-area beam. Compared to traditional beam matching solutions based solely on signal quality, this can improve the speed and flexibility of beam matching.
  • the first network device can indicate the identifier of the second-type sub-area and its corresponding communication resource, terminal devices in the second-type sub-area can use this communication resource to communicate with the first network device. Consequently, the first network device can indicate different communication resources for different second-type sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different second-type sub-areas to communicate with the first network device using different resources, reducing resource collisions and thereby improving communication performance.
  • the terminal device may indicate the identifiers of the sub-areas corresponding to the respective network devices in which it is located. For example, based on the example in step 1303a, the terminal device may indicate one or more of the identifiers of the fourth sub-area, the fifth sub-area, or the sixth sub-area.
  • the above-mentioned method 1 and method 2 can be executed separately or in combination.
  • the terminal device accesses the first network device according to the identifier of the first sub-area, it can send the first information to the first network device.
  • Mode 3 When the sub-area includes the first sub-area and/or the second sub-area, and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area, the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:
  • the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the first sub-area during the time period when the first sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, and/or the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the second sub-area during the time period when the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the first network device may indicate to the terminal device the time period during which the first sub-area and/or the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, so that the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area during the time period.
  • the first network device may provide the indication in the following ways:
  • the first network device sends information B and/or information C to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives information B and/or information C from the first network device.
  • information B may also be referred to as first information
  • information C may also be referred to as second information.
  • the first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set.
  • the first sub-area set includes a first type of sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device.
  • the second sub-area set includes a second type of sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device. It is understood that the first sub-area set includes the first sub-area, and the second sub-area set includes the second sub-area.
  • information B may be implemented in the following two forms:
  • information B includes an identifier of each first-category sub-region in the first sub-region set, and/or an identifier of each second-category sub-region in the second sub-region set.
  • information B may include identifiers ⁇ 1, 2,..., 100 ⁇ and/or identifiers ⁇ 1, 2,..., 150 ⁇ .
  • information B includes an identifier of a first reference area and a first threshold value, and/or information B includes an identifier of a second reference area and/or a second threshold value.
  • a distance between a reference position of each first-category sub-region in the first sub-region set and a reference position of the first reference region is less than or equal to a first threshold value.
  • a distance between a reference position of each second-category sub-region in the second sub-region set and a reference position of the second reference region is less than or equal to a second threshold value.
  • the terminal device may determine the reference position of the first reference area based on the identifier of the first reference area (such as 50). Thereafter, the terminal device may traverse the first-category sub-area identifiers, calculate the reference position corresponding to each identifier, and determine the identifier whose distance between the corresponding reference position and the reference position of the first reference area is less than or equal to the first threshold value as the identifier of the first-category sub-area in the first sub-area set.
  • the implementation of the terminal device determining the second sub-area set is similar to the implementation of determining the first sub-area set and is not further described.
  • this first possible implementation can also be modified as follows: information B includes the identifier of the first reference area and the number N of first-category sub-areas in the first area set.
  • the first-category sub-areas in the first sub-area set include the first reference area and the N-1 first-category sub-areas closest to the first reference area.
  • the first-category sub-areas in the first sub-area set can be the first-category sub-areas within the solid ellipse.
  • the method for indicating the second sub-area set is similar and will not be repeated here.
  • a difference between the identifier of each first-category sub-region in the first sub-region set and the identifier of the first reference region is less than or equal to a first threshold value.
  • a difference between the identifier of each second-category sub-region in the second sub-region set and the identifier of the second reference region is less than or equal to a second threshold value.
  • the first threshold value in the second possible implementation is different from that in the first possible implementation.
  • the first threshold value in the first possible implementation is 200 km, while the first threshold value in the second possible implementation is 50.
  • the second threshold value in the two implementations may be different.
  • the terminal device may traverse the first-category sub-area identifiers, calculate the difference between each identifier and the identifier of the first reference area, and determine the identifier whose difference with the identifier of the first reference area is less than or equal to the first threshold as the identifier of the first-category sub-area in the first sub-area set.
  • the implementation of the terminal device determining the second sub-area set is similar to the implementation of determining the first sub-area set and is not further described.
  • the terminal device can traverse area identifiers from 0 to 4 L N spot -1.
  • the terminal device can traverse identifiers within a certain range, such as the range [aC, a+C].
  • a represents the identifier of the reference area
  • 2C can represent the maximum number of areas in the area set.
  • the information C indicates the first-type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the first sub-area set, and/or indicates the second-type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the second sub-area set.
  • the first-type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the first sub-area set are first-type sub-areas 30 to first-type sub-areas 50
  • the second-type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the second sub-area set are second-type sub-areas 25 to second-type sub-areas 35.
  • the information C may include a first bitmap and/or a second bitmap.
  • the first bitmap includes N bits, and the N bits correspond one-to-one to the N first-class sub-areas in the first sub-area set, where N is the total number of first-class sub-areas in the first sub-area set.
  • a bit in the first bitmap is set to a preset value (such as "1" or "0"), it indicates that the first-class sub-area corresponding to the bit is served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the second bitmap corresponds to the second sub-area set.
  • the implementation of the second bitmap can refer to the relevant description of the first bitmap and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device communicates based on the identifier of the first sub-area. If information C indicates that the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, the terminal device communicates based on the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the first network device can send updated information C, which indicates the sub-area most recently served by the beam of the first network device. The terminal device can determine whether to continue communicating based on the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area based on the updated information C.
  • Mode 2 The first network device sends information D to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the information D from the first network device.
  • the information D includes the identifier of the first type of sub-area served by the beam of the first network device and/or the identifier of the second type of sub-area served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the first network device may indicate an identifier of a first-type sub-area currently served by the beam of the first network device, and/or an identifier of a second-type sub-area currently served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the start time of the time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the first-type sub-area and/or the second-type sub-area may be the current time, and the end time may be the time when the next updated information C or information D is received.
  • the updated information C or information D indicates the latest identifier of the first type of sub-area and/or the identifier of the second type of sub-area served by the beam of the first network device.
  • Mode 3 The first network device sends information E to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the information E from the first network device.
  • the information E indicates N third time periods and N first sub-region subsets, and/or indicates M fourth time periods and M second sub-region subsets.
  • Mode 4 The first network device sends the entry elevation angle and the exit elevation angle to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device receives the entry elevation angle and the exit elevation angle from the first network device.
  • the entry elevation angle can be used to determine whether the beam of the first network device starts serving the first sub-area or the second sub-area, and the exit elevation angle can be used to determine whether the beam of the first network device ends serving the first sub-area or the second sub-area.
  • the terminal device may determine the first sub-area and/or the second sub-area currently served by the beam of the first network device based on the entry elevation angle and the exit elevation angle. If the first sub-area served by the beam of the first network device includes the first sub-area, the terminal device currently communicates based on the identifier of the first sub-area; if the second sub-area served by the beam of the first network device includes the second sub-area, the terminal device currently communicates based on the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the specific implementation of the terminal device communicating according to the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area can refer to the relevant descriptions in the above methods one to two, and will not be repeated here.
  • the first network device can indicate to the terminal device the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area of the beam service of the first network device, allowing the terminal device to communicate within the beam service time, thereby improving communication performance.
  • the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area of the beam service of the first network device can be indicated by a sub-area identifier or bitmap, which can reduce signaling overhead compared to explicitly describing the geographical area of the beam service of the first network device, such as through information such as latitude and longitude.
  • Mode 4 When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG22 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:
  • the terminal device determines a reference position of the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area.
  • the determination method can refer to the relevant description in the above step S1301 and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device determines the remaining service time of the first sub-area based on the reference position of the first sub-area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, and the first elevation angle.
  • the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the first sub-area is covered by the first network device.
  • the elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area can be the elevation angle at a reference position of the first sub-area.
  • the angle between the line of sight and the horizontal line in the vertical plane where the line of sight is located can be understood as the elevation angle.
  • the elevation angle at the reference position can be understood as the angle between the line between the reference position and the position of the first network device and the horizon at the reference position.
  • the position of the first network device passing above the reference position can be described by the elevation angle at the reference position.
  • the elevation angle at the reference position is 90°, indicating that the first network device is located directly above the reference position.
  • the elevation angle when the reference position is at point P is shown; as shown in (b) of Figure 23, the elevation angle when the reference position is at point Q is shown.
  • the ephemeris information of the first network device describes an expression of the position and velocity of the first network device over time.
  • the ephemeris information can also have other names, such as trajectory information, velocity trajectory information, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • w is the angular velocity of the first network device in a three-dimensional coordinate system (such as the Earth-centered inertial coordinate system ECI), and ⁇ m can be calculated based on the reference position of the first sub-area and the ephemeris information of the first network device.
  • ECI Earth-centered inertial coordinate system
  • the terminal device starts neighboring cell measurement before the remaining service time of the first sub-area ends.
  • the terminal device starts the neighboring cell measurement before time t2.
  • starting neighbor cell measurement can also be understood as performing neighbor cell measurement.
  • the neighbor cell measurement result can be used by the terminal device for cell reselection.
  • Mode 5 When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG24 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:
  • the terminal device determines a reference position of the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area.
  • the determination method can refer to the relevant description in the above step S1301 and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device performs neighboring area measurement on the second network device within the first time window.
  • the offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between the first delay and the second delay.
  • the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference location in the first sub-area and the first network device
  • the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference location in the first sub-area and the second network device.
  • the position of the first network device can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the first network device, and then the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the first network device can be determined.
  • the position of the second network device can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the second network device, and then the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the second network device can be determined.
  • the propagation delay between the reference location in the first sub-area and the first network device is equal to the distance between the reference location in the first sub-area and the first network device divided by the speed of light.
  • the propagation delay between the reference location in the first sub-area and the second network device is equal to the distance between the reference location in the first sub-area and the second network device divided by the speed of light.
  • the reference time and offset may be universal time coordinated (UTC), or the units of the reference time and offset may be a system frame number, a subframe number, a time slot number, an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol, etc.
  • the reference time may be determined by the terminal device itself or configured by the first network device, without limitation.
  • the offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time may also be referred to as a synchronization signal block (SSB) measurement timing configuration (SMTC) offset.
  • SSB synchronization signal block
  • SMTC measurement timing configuration
  • the end time of the first time window may be determined based on the SMTC period and duration configured on the network side.
  • the above-mentioned method 4 and method 5 can be combined.
  • the terminal device can perform neighboring area measurement on the second network device within the first time window before the remaining service time of the first sub-area ends.
  • the first elevation angle, the ephemeris information of the first network device, or the ephemeris information of the second network device may be indicated by the first network device to the terminal device.
  • the first network device further sends information F indicating at least one of the first elevation angle, the ephemeris information of the first network device, or the ephemeris information of the second network device.
  • the first network device may also indicate the identifier of the reference sub-area.
  • the reference area is a first-class sub-area in the first cell, or a first-class sub-area in the coverage area or service area of the first cell.
  • the reference area may be the first-class sub-area where the cell center of the first cell is located.
  • the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device.
  • the first elevation angle may be the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell. The elevation angle at the reference position of each first-class sub-area of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first elevation angle.
  • the above-mentioned step S1303a may not be executed, and in the above-mentioned step S1303b, the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the reference sub-area.
  • the implementation of the terminal device communicating according to the identifier of the reference sub-area is similar to the implementation of the terminal device communicating according to the identifier of the first sub-area.
  • the first sub-area in the above-mentioned method four or method five may be replaced with the reference sub-area for understanding, and will not be repeated here.
  • method four can be applicable to the scenario where the cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
  • the terminal device performs neighboring cell measurements within the first time window, and the starting time of the first time window is related to the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device. Due to the movement of the network device, the network device may be located at different positions at different times, so that the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device changes with time. Therefore, method five can also be applied to the scenario where the cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.
  • Mode 6 When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:
  • the neighboring cell measurement is started.
  • the reference sub-area may be configured by the first network device.
  • the third threshold and the fourth threshold may be configured by the first network device, or may be defined by a protocol, which is not specifically limited in this application.
  • Mode 7 When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG26 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:
  • the terminal device determines whether the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area.
  • the fourth sub-area is a first type of sub-area in the coverage area or service area of the first network device, or in other words, the fourth sub-area is a first type of sub-area that can be covered by the first network device or can be served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the at least one fourth sub-area refers to part or all of the coverage area or service area of the first network device.
  • the coverage area of the first network device includes first-category sub-areas 1 to 100
  • the at least one fourth sub-area may be first-category sub-areas 20 to 30, or first-category sub-areas 25 to 40, etc., without limitation.
  • step 130371 may also be understood as: the terminal device determines whether at least one fourth sub-area includes the first sub-area.
  • the first network device sends information G to the terminal device, indicating the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area.
  • the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used by the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.
  • Information G may also be referred to as third information.
  • the second access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of the target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble.
  • the target beam is the beam of the second network device.
  • the random access resource may include an RO.
  • the random access preamble may be a dedicated preamble used during cell handover.
  • the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area can be carried in a media access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU).
  • MAC media access control
  • FIG27 shows a possible MAC PDU frame structure.
  • a MAC PDU includes at least one MAC sub-PDU (MAC subPDU).
  • a MAC subPDU is divided into a MAC subPDU containing a MAC control element (CE), a MAC subPDU containing a MAC service data unit (SDU), and an optional MAC subPDU containing padding.
  • a MAC subPDU containing a MAC CE includes a subheader and a MAC CE.
  • a MAC subPDU containing a MAC PDU includes a subheader and a MAC SDU.
  • the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area may be located in a sub-header of a MAC PDU, such as a sub-header of a MAC subPDU that includes the MAC PDU.
  • the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area are located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU;
  • the identifier of the fourth sub-area is located in the sub-header of the MAC PDU, such as in the sub-header of the MAC subPDU containing the MAC PDU; the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.
  • the identifiers of different fourth sub-areas and their corresponding second access information can be located in different MAC PDUs, or they can be located in the same MAC PDU, without restriction.
  • the first network device in addition to the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area, the first network device further indicates the identifier of the terminal device or the identifier of the terminal device group. After the terminal device in the fourth sub-area receives the instruction from the first network device, if the identifier of the terminal device indicated by the first network device includes the terminal device's own identifier or the identifier of the terminal device group to which the terminal device belongs, the terminal device accesses the other network device according to the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area.
  • the first network device may indicate different second access information to different terminal devices or terminal device groups in the same fourth sub-area, such as indicating different random access resources, different target network devices, etc.
  • the identifier of the fourth sub-area, the identifier of the terminal device, or the identifier of the terminal device group indicated by the first network device to the terminal device can be understood as a switching command, used to instruct the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access other network devices.
  • the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, it means that the first network device instructs the terminal device in the first sub-area to access other network devices or perform cell switching, so that the terminal device can access the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the terminal device when the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the terminal device also needs to determine whether the identifier of the terminal device indicated by the first network device includes its own identifier, or determine whether the identifier of the terminal device group indicated by the first network device includes the identifier of the terminal device group to which it belongs. If so, access the second network device according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • accessing the second network device may include: sending a random access preamble code to the second network device using a transmitting beam corresponding to the target beam on the random access resource indicated by the second access information.
  • the first network device can indicate the identifier of the fourth sub-area and its corresponding access information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device in the fourth sub-area can access other network devices based on the access information.
  • the first network device can indicate different random access resources for different fourth sub-areas, so that terminal devices in different fourth sub-areas can access other network devices using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions when the terminal device performs random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
  • the above-mentioned initial area can be understood as the initial area in which the first network device is effective or used.
  • the first sub-area, the second sub-area, or the third sub-area is the area in which the terminal device is located within the coverage area or service area of the first network device.
  • the above-mentioned initial area can also be the initial area in which the second network device is effective or used.
  • the first sub-area, the second sub-area, or the third sub-area is the area in which the terminal device is located within the coverage area or service area of the second network device.
  • the terminal device can communicate using the following method 8.
  • Mode 8 When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG28 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:
  • the terminal device receives third access information corresponding to the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area.
  • the first sub-area is a first-type sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the second network device where the terminal device is located.
  • the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area is used for the terminal device in the first sub-area to access the second network device.
  • the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area is sent by the second network device.
  • the third access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble.
  • the target beam is the beam of the second network device.
  • the second network device may carry the second information via a PDCCH.
  • the PDCCH may be scrambled using the identifier of the first sub-region. Therefore, the terminal device receiving the third access information corresponding to the first sub-region based on the identifier of the first sub-region may include: the terminal device parsing the PDCCH based on the identifier of the first sub-region, thereby obtaining the third access information carried in the PDCCH.
  • the second network device may send access information corresponding to different sub-areas via different PDCCHs.
  • different PDCCHs may be scrambled using the identifiers of the corresponding sub-areas. For example, if PDCCH#1 carries the third access information corresponding to first-category sub-area 1, and PDCCH#2 carries the third access information corresponding to first-category sub-area 2, then PDCCH#1 is scrambled using the identifier of first-category sub-area 1, and PDCCH#2 is scrambled using the identifier of first-category sub-area 2.
  • the access information corresponding to different sub-areas may be different.
  • the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the terminal device accessing the second network device according to the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area may include: sending a random access preamble code to the second network device using the transmitting beam corresponding to the target beam on the random access resource indicated by the third access information.
  • the terminal device first accesses the first network device and maintains the RRC connection state on the first network device. Subsequently, the first network device indicates to the terminal device the initial area in which the second network device takes effect, and the terminal device determines the sub-area (i.e., the first sub-area) in which the terminal device is located in the coverage area or service area of the second network device based on its own location information. Then, based on the identifier of the first sub-area, the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area from the second network device is received, and the second network device is accessed based on the third access information. That is, it can be considered that the terminal device switches from the first network device to the second network device.
  • the sub-area i.e., the first sub-area
  • the second network device can indicate the access information corresponding to each first-class sub-area, so that terminal devices in the first-class sub-area can access the second network device based on the access information.
  • the second network device can indicate different random access resources for different first-class sub-areas, so that terminal devices in different first-class sub-areas can access the second network device using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions when terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.
  • Step S1303b is described above. Furthermore, if the sub-area includes a third-type sub-area, step S1303c may include: the terminal device performing a tracking area update based on the information H and the sub-area configuration information. For example, information G may also be referred to as fourth information. Information G may be sent by the first network device to the terminal device, i.e., the terminal device also receives information G from the first network device.
  • the information G includes an identifier of a reference sub-region and a value K.
  • the reference sub-region is a third-category sub-region, and K is a positive integer.
  • the terminal device when the information G includes the identifier of the reference sub-area and the value K, as shown in FIG29 , the terminal device performs a tracking area update according to the information G and the configuration information of the sub-area, including:
  • the terminal device determines N spot_ta third-category sub-areas according to configuration information of the sub-areas.
  • N spot_ta is the total number of the third type sub-areas.
  • the terminal device can determine the identifiers and reference positions of N spot_ta third type sub-areas according to the configuration information of the sub-areas. The determination method can refer to the above related description and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device determines a first tracking area code list.
  • the terminal device may determine the identifier of the reference sub-area and the identifiers of the K or K-1 third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area among the N spot_ta third-category sub-areas as the first tracking area code list.
  • the first tracking area code list includes K+1 identifiers; when the identifiers of the K-1 third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area are taken, the first tracking area code list includes K identifiers.
  • a third-category sub-area can be understood as a tracking area. Therefore, the identifier of the third-category sub-area can be understood as a tracking area code (TAC).
  • TAC tracking area code
  • the terminal device can determine the reference positions of N spot_ta third-category sub-areas, thereby determining the distance between the reference positions of N spot_ta third-category sub-areas and the reference position of the reference sub-area, and then determining the K third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area.
  • the third type of sub-area corresponding to the identifier in the first tracking area code list is the third type of sub-area in the coverage area or service area of the first network device.
  • the radius of the third-category area is 1000 km, or the number of third-category areas is 197, and the subdivision level is 0, the number of third-category sub-areas is also 197.
  • the distribution of the third-category sub-areas can be shown in FIG30. If the identifier of the reference sub-area included in the information G is 32, and K is 3 or 4, that is, the information G includes ⁇ 32, 3 ⁇ or ⁇ 32, 4 ⁇ , then as shown in FIG30, the first tracking area code list includes third-category sub-areas 32, 40, 45, and 53.
  • the network side can configure the second tracking area code list corresponding to the second network device through the information element ⁇ 28, 2 ⁇ or ⁇ 28, 3 ⁇ .
  • S2903 Initiate a tracking area update when there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list.
  • the tracking area code list of the terminal device is configured by the first network device.
  • the tracking area code list of the terminal device includes an identifier of at least one third-category sub-area.
  • the tracking area code list of the terminal device may indicate the paging range of the terminal device. For example, when the terminal device is in the RRC idle state, the network needs to page the terminal device within the sub-area indicated by the tracking area code list of the terminal device.
  • the identifiers of the third-category sub-areas included in the tracking area code list of the terminal device may be 25, 30, 33, 38, and 46.
  • the first network device may indicate the tracking area code list of the terminal device through the information element ⁇ 25,4 ⁇ or ⁇ 25,5 ⁇ .
  • the fact that there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list can be understood as: the first tracking area code list does not include any identifier in the tracking area code list of the terminal device, or any identifier in the tracking area code list of the terminal device does not belong to the first tracking area code list.
  • information G may include a first tracking area code list.
  • information G may include 32, 40, 45, and 53.
  • step S2902 may not be performed.
  • the terminal device Upon receiving information G, the terminal device directly executes step S2903.
  • the information G includes an identifier of a reference sub-region and an updated distance threshold.
  • the reference sub-region is a third-category sub-region.
  • the updated distance threshold may also have other names, which are not limited.
  • the terminal device when information G includes the identifier of the reference sub-area and the update distance threshold, as shown in FIG31 , the terminal device performs a tracking area update based on information G and the configuration information of the sub-area, including:
  • the terminal device determines the reference position of the reference sub-area according to the configuration information of the sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area.
  • the determination method can refer to the relevant description in the above step S1301 and will not be repeated here.
  • the size and number of tracking areas may vary at different times and/or geographic locations.
  • the third type of subarea is used as the tracking area and the subdivision level is 0, the size and number of the initial area may vary at different times and/or geographic locations.
  • a tracking area with a larger radius and a smaller total number can be configured, such as a tracking area radius of 1000 km and a total number of 197 tracking areas.
  • a tracking area with a smaller radius and a larger total number can be configured, such as a tracking area radius of 200 km and a total number of 4919 tracking areas.
  • the frequency of tracking area updates can be reduced, which is suitable for scenarios with light traffic load.
  • the scope of tracking area updates can be reduced, which is suitable for scenarios with heavy traffic load.
  • the methods and/or steps implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by components applicable to the terminal device (e.g., processor, chip, chip system, circuit, logic module, or software); the methods and/or steps implemented by the network device may also be implemented by components applicable to the network device (e.g., processor, chip, chip system, circuit, logic module, or software).
  • the chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete components.
  • the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function. It should be easily appreciated by those skilled in the art that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of the communication device according to the above method embodiment.
  • each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical functional division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • the Communication Device Figure 32 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 320.
  • the communication device 320 includes a processing module 3201 and a transceiver module 3202.
  • the communication device 320 can be used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned terminal device or network device.
  • the communication device 320 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 32 ) for storing program instructions and data.
  • the transceiver module 3202 which may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, is configured to implement a transmitting and/or receiving function.
  • the transceiver module 3202 may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver, or a communication interface.
  • the transceiver module 3202 may include a receiving module and a sending module, which are respectively used to execute the receiving and sending steps performed by the terminal device or network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and/or used to support other processes of the technology described herein; the processing module 3201 may be used to execute the processing steps (such as determination, etc.) performed by the terminal device or network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and/or used to support other processes of the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is configured to receive sub-region configuration information; the processing module 3201 is configured to communicate based on the region configuration information.
  • the sub-region configuration information indicates an initial region and a subdivision level. The initial region, subdivision level, and sub-region determination criteria are used to determine a sub-region, and the sub-region is included in the initial region.
  • the processing module 3201 is configured to determine a sub-area identifier based on the location information of the terminal device and the sub-area configuration information, and the transceiver module 3202 is configured to communicate based on the sub-area identifier.
  • the sub-area identifier includes at least one of a first sub-area identifier, a second sub-area identifier, or a third sub-area identifier; the first sub-area is a first-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, the second sub-area is a second-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, and the third sub-area is a third-category sub-area where the terminal device is located.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further used to receive first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, and the first access information is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access the first network device.
  • the processing module 3201 is used to determine the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; the transceiver module 3202 is used to access the first network device based on the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further used to receive communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for terminal devices in the second-type sub-area to transmit information.
  • the processing module 3201 is further used to determine the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area based on the identifier of the second sub-area; the transceiver module 3202 is further used to send the first information on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area, where the first information indicates the identifier of the second sub-area.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further configured to receive first information and/or second information.
  • the first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, wherein the first sub-area set includes first-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set includes second-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device.
  • the second information indicates first-type sub-areas in the first sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device, and/or indicates second-type sub-areas in the second sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further configured to receive information indicating N third time periods and N first sub-region subsets, and/or indicating M fourth time periods and M second sub-region subsets.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is used to communicate according to the identifier of the first sub-area during the time period when the first sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device; or, the transceiver module 3202 is used to communicate according to the identifier of the second sub-area during the time period when the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further configured to receive information indicating at least one of the following: an identifier of a reference sub-area, a first elevation angle, and ephemeris information of the first network device or ephemeris information of the second network device.
  • the reference sub-area is a first-category sub-area in a first cell, where the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device; and the first elevation angle is a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the processing module 3201 is used to determine the reference position of the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; the processing module 3201 is also used to determine the remaining service time of the first sub-area based on the reference position of the first sub-area, the ephemeris information of the first network device and the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area; the processing module 3201 is also used to start neighboring cell measurement before the remaining service time ends.
  • the processing module 3201 is configured to determine the reference position of the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; the processing module 3201 is further configured to perform a neighboring cell measurement on the second network device within a first time window.
  • the offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between a first delay and a second delay, where the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the first network device, and the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the second network device.
  • the processing module 3201 is used to start the neighboring cell measurement when at least one of the following is met: the distance between the reference position of the first sub-area and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a third threshold; or the difference between the identifier of the first sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is also used to receive third information, where the third information indicates the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area, respectively.
  • the fourth sub-area is a first-type sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.
  • the processing module 3201 is used to determine whether the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area; if the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is used to access the second network device according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the sub-area includes a first-type sub-area
  • the first-type sub-area is a sub-area in which the second network device is effective.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is also used to receive the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area, and the third access information is used for the terminal device in the first sub-area to access the second network device; and access the second network device based on the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further used to receive fourth information, where the fourth information includes an identifier and a value K of the reference sub-area, or the fourth information includes an identifier and an updated distance threshold of the reference sub-area, and the reference sub-area is a third-category sub-area; communicating according to the configuration information of the sub-area, including: updating the tracking area according to the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area.
  • the processing module 3201 is used to determine N spot_ta third-category sub-areas based on the configuration information of the sub-area, where N spot_ta is the total number of third-category sub-areas; the processing module 3201 is also used to determine the identifier of the reference sub-area and the identifiers of the K third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area among the N spot_ta third-category sub-areas as a first tracking area code list; the processing module 3201 is also used to initiate a tracking area update when there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list.
  • the processing module 3201 when the fourth information includes the identifier of the reference sub-area and the update distance threshold, the processing module 3201 is used to determine the reference position of the reference sub-area based on the configuration information of the sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area; the processing module 3201 is also used to initiate a tracking area update when the distance between the terminal device and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to the update distance threshold.
  • the processing module 3201 is configured to obtain sub-area configuration information, and the transceiver module 3202 is configured to send the configuration information.
  • the configuration information indicates an initial area and a subdivision level.
  • the initial area, subdivision level, and sub-area determination criteria are used to determine a sub-area, and the sub-area is included in the initial area.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further used to send first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, and the first access information is used for the terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access the first network device.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further used to send communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second-type sub-area.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further configured to send first information and/or second information.
  • the first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, wherein the first sub-area set includes first-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set includes second-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device.
  • the second information indicates first-type sub-areas in the first sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device, and/or indicates second-type sub-areas in the second sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is also used to send a third information, where the third information indicates the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area, respectively.
  • the fourth sub-area is a first-type sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.
  • the transceiver module 3202 is further used to send fourth information, where the fourth information includes an identifier and a value K of the reference sub-area, or the fourth information includes an identifier and an updated distance threshold of the reference sub-area, and the reference sub-area is a third-category sub-area.
  • the communication device 320 may be presented in the form of various functional modules divided in an integrated manner.
  • the "module” here may refer to a specific application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a circuit, a processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, an integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above functions.
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
  • the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 3202 can be implemented through the input and output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or chip system, and the function/implementation process of the processing module 3201 can be implemented through the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or chip system.
  • the communication device 320 provided in this embodiment can execute the above method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above method embodiments and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal device or network device described in the embodiments of the present application can also be implemented using the following: one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), controllers, state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or any combination of circuits that can perform the various functions described throughout this application.
  • FPGAs field programmable gate arrays
  • PLDs programmable logic devices
  • controllers state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or any combination of circuits that can perform the various functions described throughout this application.
  • the terminal device or network device described in the embodiment of the present application can be implemented by a general bus architecture.
  • Figure 33 is a structural diagram of a communication device 3300 provided in an embodiment of the present application, wherein the communication device 3300 includes a processor 3301 and a transceiver 3302.
  • the communication device 3300 can be a terminal device, or a chip or chip system therein; or, the communication device 3300 can be a network device, or a chip or chip system therein.
  • Figure 33 only shows the main components of the communication device 3300.
  • the communication device may further include a memory 3303, and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).
  • the processor 3301 is primarily used to process communication protocols and communication data, as well as control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process software program data.
  • the memory 3303 is primarily used to store software programs and data.
  • the transceiver 3302 may include a radio frequency circuit and an antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit is primarily used to convert baseband signals into radio frequency signals and process radio frequency signals.
  • the antenna is primarily used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as a touch screen, display, and keyboard, are primarily used to receive user input and output data to the user.
  • the processor 3301 , the transceiver 3302 , and the memory 3303 may be connected via a communication bus.
  • the processor 3301 can read the software program in the memory 3303, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor 3301 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then transmits the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 3301.
  • the processor 3301 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • the RF circuit and antenna may be provided independently of the processor performing baseband processing.
  • the RF circuit and antenna may be remotely arranged independent of the communication device.
  • the above-mentioned communication device 320 may take the form of the communication device 3300 shown in FIG. 33 .
  • the functions/implementation process of the processing module 3201 in FIG32 can be implemented by the processor 3301 in the communication device 3300 shown in FIG33 calling the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory 3303.
  • the functions/implementation process of the transceiver module 3202 in FIG32 can be implemented by the transceiver 3302 in the communication device 3300 shown in FIG33.
  • the terminal device or network device in this application may adopt the structure shown in Figure 34, or include the components shown in Figure 34.
  • Figure 34 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device 3400 provided in this application.
  • the communication device 3400 may be a network device or a module, chip, or system-on-chip in a network device; or the communication device 3400 may be a terminal device or a module, chip, or system-on-chip in a terminal device.
  • the communication device 3400 includes at least one processor 3401 and at least one communication interface ( FIG34 is merely an example of one communication interface 3404 and one processor 3401).
  • the communication device 3400 may further include a communication bus 3402 and a memory 3403.
  • Processor 3401 can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a network processor (NP), a digital signal processor (DSP), a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a programmable logic device (PLD), or any combination thereof.
  • processor 3401 can also be other devices with processing capabilities, such as circuits, devices, or software modules, without limitation.
  • Communication bus 3402 is used to connect the various components in communication device 3400, enabling communication between them.
  • Communication bus 3402 may be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus. This bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on.
  • PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
  • EISA Extended Industry Standard Architecture
  • FIG34 shows a single thick line, but this does not imply that there is only one bus or only one type of bus.
  • Communication interface 3404 is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks.
  • communication interface 3404 can be a module, circuit, transceiver, or any other device capable of communication.
  • communication interface 3404 can also be an input/output interface within processor 3401, used to implement signal input and output to the processor.
  • the memory 3403 may be a device with a storage function, used to store instructions and/or data, wherein the instructions may be computer programs.
  • the memory 3403 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and/or instructions, or a random access memory (RAM) or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and/or instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, etc., without limitation.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage including compressed optical disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.
  • magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices etc., without limitation.
  • the memory 3403 can exist independently of the processor 3401 or can be integrated with the processor 3401.
  • the memory 3403 can be located within the communication device 3400 or outside the communication device 3400, without limitation.
  • the processor 3401 can be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 3403 to implement the methods provided in the following embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 3401 and/or the memory 3403 may include an artificial intelligence (AI) module, which is used to implement AI-related functions.
  • AI artificial intelligence
  • the AI module can be implemented through software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the AI module may include a radio network intelligent controller (RAN intelligent controller, RIC) module.
  • RAN intelligent controller RIC
  • the AI module may be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.
  • the communication device 3400 may further include an output device 3405 and an input device 3406.
  • the output device 3405 communicates with the processor 3401 and can display information in a variety of ways.
  • the output device 3405 can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector.
  • the input device 3406 communicates with the processor 3401 and can receive user input in a variety of ways.
  • the input device 3406 can be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.
  • the communication device 320 shown in FIG. 32 may take the form of the communication device 3400 shown in FIG. 34 .
  • the functions/implementation process of the processing module 3201 in FIG32 can be implemented by the processor 3401 in the communication device 3400 shown in FIG34 calling the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory 3403.
  • the functions/implementation process of the transceiver module 3202 in FIG32 can be implemented by the communication interface 3404 in the communication device 3400 shown in FIG34.
  • the structure shown in FIG34 does not constitute a specific limitation on the network device.
  • the network device may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine or split some components, or arrange the components differently.
  • the components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing the method in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the communication device further includes a memory.
  • the memory is used to store necessary computer programs and data.
  • the computer program may include instructions, and the processor may invoke the instructions in the computer program stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute any of the above-described method embodiments.
  • the memory may not be located in the communication device.
  • the communication device also includes an interface circuit, which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, and the interface circuit is used to receive computer execution instructions (computer execution instructions are stored in a memory, may be read directly from the memory, or may pass through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.
  • an interface circuit which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, and the interface circuit is used to receive computer execution instructions (computer execution instructions are stored in a memory, may be read directly from the memory, or may pass through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface, where the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device.
  • the communication device can be a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device can be composed of chips or include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.
  • the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium having a computer program or instruction stored thereon, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.
  • the systems, devices, and methods described in this application may also be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the units is merely a logical function division.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interface, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, i.e., they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. Components shown as units may or may not be physical units. Some or all of these units may be selected to achieve the objectives of this embodiment as needed.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the above embodiments it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • a software program it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that can be integrated with one or more media.
  • the available medium may be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state drive (SSD)).
  • the computer may include the aforementioned device.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Astronomy & Astrophysics (AREA)
  • Aviation & Aerospace Engineering (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A communication method and apparatus. The method can be applied to non-terrestrial network (NTN) or NTN and TN converged network communications, and can reduce signaling overhead. The method comprises: a first network device acquires and sends configuration information of subregions; and a terminal device receives the configuration information of the subregions, and performs communication on the basis of the configuration information of the subregions. The configuration information of the subregions indicates an initial region and subdivision levels, the initial region, the subdivision levels and subregion determination criteria are used for determining the subregions, and the subregions are included in the initial region. The communication may comprise, for example, at least one of initial access, beam management, mobility management, or tracking area update.

Description

通信方法及装置Communication method and device

本申请要求于2024年03月07日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202410263802.5、申请名称为“通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to the Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on March 7, 2024, with application number 202410263802.5 and application name “Communication Method and Device,” the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference into this application.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请实施例涉及通信领域,尤其涉及通信方法及装置。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and in particular to communication methods and devices.

背景技术Background Art

非陆地网络(non-terrestrial networks,NTN)具有全球覆盖、远距离传输、组网灵活、部署方便和不受地理条件限制等显著优点,已经被广泛应用于海上通信、定位导航、抗险救灾、科学实验、视频广播和对地观测等多个领域。NTN网络可以和地面网络融合,取长补短,共同构成全球无缝覆盖的海、陆、空、天、地一体化综合通信网,满足用户无处不在的多种业务需求。Non-terrestrial networks (NTNs) offer significant advantages, including global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, easy deployment, and geographic independence. They have been widely used in a variety of fields, including maritime communications, positioning and navigation, disaster relief, scientific experiments, video broadcasting, and Earth observation. NTNs can be integrated with terrestrial networks, leveraging their strengths and complementing their weaknesses to form a seamless, integrated global communications network spanning land, sea, air, space, and space, meeting the diverse needs of users everywhere.

作为NTN的重要组成部分,下一代卫星网络总体呈现超密、异构的趋势。首先,卫星的规模从铱星星座的66颗发展到一网星座的720颗,并最终延展到12000+的星链(Starlink)超密低地球轨道(low-earth orbit,LEO)卫星星座;其次,卫星网络呈现异构特性,从传统的单层通信网络发展到多层通信网络,通信卫星网络的功能也趋向复杂化、多样化,逐渐兼容并支持导航增强、对地观测、多维信息在轨处理等功能。As a key component of the NTN, the next-generation satellite network is generally showing an ultra-dense and heterogeneous trend. First, the scale of satellites has grown from 66 in the Iridium constellation to 720 in the OneWeb constellation, and ultimately to the Starlink ultra-dense low-Earth orbit (LEO) satellite constellation of over 12,000. Second, satellite networks are heterogeneous, evolving from traditional single-layer communications networks to multi-layer ones. The functionality of communication satellite networks is also becoming increasingly complex and diverse, gradually becoming compatible with and supporting functions such as navigation augmentation, Earth observation, and multi-dimensional on-orbit information processing.

然而,卫星的覆盖区域可能随时间的变化而变化,从而导致NTN中的移动性管理、波束管理等流程存在较大的信令开销。However, the satellite coverage area may change over time, resulting in large signaling overhead for processes such as mobility management and beam management in the NTN.

发明内容Summary of the Invention

本申请实施例提供通信方法及装置,能够降低NTN网络或者NTN和TN融合网络的信令开销。The embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and apparatus that can reduce the signaling overhead of an NTN network or a converged network of NTN and TN.

第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由终端设备执行,也可以由终端设备的部件,例如终端设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:接收子区域的配置信息,并根据区域的配置信息进行通信。其中,子区域的配置信息指示初始区域和细分等级,初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定子区域,子区域包含于初始区域中。In a first aspect, a communication method is provided. The method can be performed by a terminal device, or by a component of the terminal device, such as a processor, chip, or chip system of the terminal device, or by a logic module or software that implements all or part of the terminal device's functions. The method includes receiving sub-area configuration information and communicating based on the area configuration information. The sub-area configuration information indicates an initial area and a subdivision level. The initial area, subdivision level, and sub-area determination criteria are used to determine a sub-area, and the sub-area is included in the initial area.

基于该方案,可以先将地面离散为一些初始区域,再基于初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则确定包含于初始区域中的子区域,使得网络侧和终端设备可以基于子区域标识进行通信。例如,网络侧可以通过子区域标识向终端设备指示其覆盖区域或服务区域,或者通过子区域标识配置参考子区域等。相比于网络侧通过显性方式向终端设备指示其覆盖区域(如指示经纬度、波束指向和张角等),可以显著降低信令开销。Based on this solution, the ground can be discretized into some initial areas first, and then the sub-areas included in the initial area can be determined based on the initial area, subdivision level and sub-area determination criteria, so that the network side and the terminal device can communicate based on the sub-area identifier. For example, the network side can indicate its coverage area or service area to the terminal device through the sub-area identifier, or configure a reference sub-area through the sub-area identifier. Compared with the network side indicating its coverage area to the terminal device in an explicit manner (such as indicating longitude and latitude, beam pointing and angle, etc.), the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced.

此外,本申请的方案可以基于细分等级对初始区域进行进一步细分,使得网络侧能够基于实际应用灵活确定细分等级,从而灵活确定子区域的数目以及大小,提升通信的灵活性。再者,由于采用细分等级对初始区域进行划分,而初始区域通常是固定的,因此,可以认为本申请提供了统一的子区域划分方式(即对固定的初始区域进行划分),从而使得网络节点能够识别各种细分等级下的子区域,并获取不同子区域的邻接关系,减少网络位置管理的复杂度,实现基于区域的业务特性聚合分析,进而提升通信性能。In addition, the solution of the present application can further subdivide the initial area based on the subdivision level, so that the network side can flexibly determine the subdivision level based on actual application, thereby flexibly determining the number and size of sub-areas, thereby improving the flexibility of communication. Furthermore, since the initial area is divided by subdivision level, and the initial area is usually fixed, it can be considered that the present application provides a unified sub-area division method (i.e., dividing the fixed initial area), so that network nodes can identify sub-areas at various subdivision levels and obtain the adjacency relationship between different sub-areas, reducing the complexity of network location management, realizing area-based service characteristic aggregation analysis, and thus improving communication performance.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域确定准则包括:子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影是根据细分等级确定的;子区域的参考位置是根据子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影确定的。In one possible design, the sub-region determination criterion includes: a projection of a reference position of the sub-region on a unit square is determined according to a subdivision level; and a reference position of the sub-region is determined according to a projection of the reference position of the sub-region on a unit square.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域的参考位置是根据子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影和初始区域的总数确定的。In one possible design, the reference position of the sub-region is determined according to the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on a unit square and the total number of initial regions.

基于上述两种可能的设计,可以在初始区域的基础上,根据不同的细分等级灵活确定不同的子区域的数目以及大小,提升通信的灵活性。Based on the two possible designs described above, the number and size of different sub-areas can be flexibly determined according to different subdivision levels on the basis of the initial area, thereby improving communication flexibility.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影RL(xi,yi)满足如下关系:

In one possible design, the projection RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square satisfies the following relationship:

其中,i表示子区域的标识,L表示细分等级,Nspot表示初始区域的总数。Where i represents the identifier of the sub-region, L represents the subdivision level, and N spot represents the total number of initial regions.

在一种可能的设计中,细分等级包括多个网络设备分别对应的细分等级。基于该可能的设计,不同网络设备可以对应不同的细分等级,提升子区域划分的灵活性。In one possible design, the subdivision level includes subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices. Based on this possible design, different network devices can correspond to different subdivision levels, thereby improving the flexibility of sub-area division.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域、第二类子区域或第三类子区域中的至少一项,第一类子区域与广播波束对应,第二类子区域与业务波束对应,第三类子区域与跟踪区对应。In one possible design, the sub-area includes at least one of a first-class sub-area, a second-class sub-area, or a third-class sub-area, the first-class sub-area corresponds to the broadcast beam, the second-class sub-area corresponds to the service beam, and the third-class sub-area corresponds to the tracking area.

基于该可能的设计,可以根据实际情况划分多类子区域,例如,广播场景下可以划分与广播波束对应的第一类子区域;业务传输场景下可以划分与业务波束对应的第二类子区域;跟踪区相关场景下可以划分与跟踪区对应的第三类子区域。由于可以根据实际情况划分子区域,因此各类子区域的数目、大小等可以与当前情况相匹配,例如,第一类子区域的大小可以相对较大,第二类子区域的大小可以相对较小等。从而,可以提高子区域划分的灵活性,此外,还可以提高子区域划分与当前实际情况的适配性,使得子区域的划分能够提高通信性能。Based on this possible design, multiple sub-areas can be divided according to actual conditions. For example, in broadcast scenarios, a first sub-area corresponding to the broadcast beam can be divided; in service transmission scenarios, a second sub-area corresponding to the service beam can be divided; in tracking area-related scenarios, a third sub-area corresponding to the tracking area can be divided. Because sub-areas can be divided according to actual conditions, the number and size of each sub-area can be matched to the current situation. For example, the size of the first sub-area can be relatively large, and the size of the second sub-area can be relatively small. This improves the flexibility of sub-area division and the adaptability of sub-area division to the current situation, so that the sub-area division can improve communication performance.

在一种可能的设计中,细分等级包括第一类子区域对应的细分等级、第二类子区域对应的细分等级或第三类子区域对应的细分等级中的至少一项。基于该可能的设计,不同类型的子区域可以对应不同的细分等级,即可以基于初始区域划分不同类型的子区域,并且,不同细分等级可以对应不同子区域的大小,从而可以提高子区域划分的灵活性。In one possible design, the subdivision level includes at least one of a subdivision level corresponding to the first type of sub-region, a subdivision level corresponding to the second type of sub-region, or a subdivision level corresponding to the third type of sub-region. Based on this possible design, different types of sub-regions can correspond to different subdivision levels. That is, different types of sub-regions can be divided based on the initial region, and different subdivision levels can correspond to different sub-region sizes, thereby increasing the flexibility of sub-region division.

在一种可能的设计中,根据子区域的配置信息进行通信,包括:根据终端设备的位置信息和子区域的配置信息确定子区域标识,根据子区域标识进行通信。其中,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识、第二子区域的标识或第三子区域的标识中的至少一项;第一子区域为终端设备所在的第一类子区域,第二子区域为终端设备所在的第二类子区域,第三子区域为终端设备所在的第三类子区域。In one possible design, communicating based on sub-area configuration information includes: determining a sub-area identifier based on the location information of the terminal device and the sub-area configuration information, and communicating based on the sub-area identifier. The sub-area identifier includes at least one of an identifier of a first sub-area, an identifier of a second sub-area, or an identifier of a third sub-area; the first sub-area is a first-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, the second sub-area is a second-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, and the third sub-area is a third-category sub-area where the terminal device is located.

基于该可能的设计,能够基于终端设备的位置信息确定终端设备所在的子区域的标识,使得终端设备和RAN节点能够基于该子区域的标识,获取该子区域的相关信息,从而基于该子区域的相关信息进行通信,保证通信性能。Based on this possible design, the identifier of the sub-area where the terminal device is located can be determined based on the location information of the terminal device, so that the terminal device and the RAN node can obtain relevant information of the sub-area based on the identifier of the sub-area, and thus communicate based on the relevant information of the sub-area to ensure communication performance.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:接收第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,第一接入信息用于第一类子区域中的终端设备接入第一网络设备。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the method further includes: receiving first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, where the first access information is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access a first network device.

在一种可能的设计中,第一接入信息包括以下至少一项:随机接入时机RO、随机接入前导码、定时提前TA或第一时间段,第一时间段为第一网络设备的波束服务第一类区域的时间段。In one possible design, the first access information includes at least one of the following: a random access timing RO, a random access preamble code, a timing advance TA, or a first time period, where the first time period is a time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the first type of area.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:根据第一子区域的标识,确定第一子区域对应的第一接入信息;根据第一子区域对应的第一接入信息,接入第一网络设备。In one possible design, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: determining first access information corresponding to the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; and accessing the first network device based on the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

基于上述可能的设计,由于网络侧可以指示第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,使得第一类子区域中的终端设备可以根据第一接入信息接入第一网络设备。从而,网络可以为不同的第一类子区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同第一类子区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入第一网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on the above possible design, since the network side can indicate the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, terminal devices in the first type of sub-area can access the first network device based on the first access information. Thus, the network can indicate different random access resources for different first type sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different first type sub-areas to access the first network device using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions during random access by terminal devices and improving access success rates.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第二类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:接收第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息,该通信资源信息指示的通信资源用于第二类子区域中的终端设备进行信息传输。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a second-type sub-area, the method further includes: receiving communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second-type sub-area.

在一种可能的设计中,通信资源包括以下至少一项:频域资源、极化方式或第二时间段,第二时间段为第一网络设备的波束服务第二类子区域的时间段。In one possible design, the communication resources include at least one of the following: frequency domain resources, polarization mode, or a second time period, where the second time period is a time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the second type of sub-area.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域标识包括第二子区域的标识的情况下,根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:根据第二子区域的标识,确定第二子区域对应的通信资源;在第二子区域对应的通信资源上发送第一信息,第一信息指示第二子区域的标识。In one possible design, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the second sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: determining the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area based on the identifier of the second sub-area; and sending first information on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area, where the first information indicates the identifier of the second sub-area.

基于上述可能的设计,由于第网络可以指示第二类子区域的标识及其对应的通信资源,使得第二类子区域中的终端设备可以使用该通信资源和第一网络设备通信。从而,网络可以为不同的第二类子区域指示不同的通信资源,使得不同第二类子区域中的终端设备可以在不同的资源上和网络设备通信,减少资源碰撞,从而提高通信性能。Based on the above possible design, since the network can indicate the identifier of the second-type sub-area and its corresponding communication resource, the terminal device in the second-type sub-area can use the communication resource to communicate with the first network device. Therefore, the network can indicate different communication resources for different second-type sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different second-type sub-areas to communicate with the network device using different resources, reducing resource collisions and thereby improving communication performance.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:接收第一信息和/或第二信息。其中,第一信息指示第一子区域集合和/或第二子区域集合,第一子区域集合包括第一网络设备的覆盖子区域中的第一类子区域,第二子区域集合包括第一网络设备覆盖子区域中的第二类子区域。第二信息指示第一子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,和/或,指示第二子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域。In one possible design, when the sub-areas include first-type sub-areas and/or second-type sub-areas, the method further includes: receiving first information and/or second information. The first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, the first sub-area set including first-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set including second-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device. The second information indicates first-type sub-areas in the first sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device, and/or indicates second-type sub-areas in the second sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device.

在一种可能的设计中,该方法还包括:接收信息,该信息指示N个第三时间段和N个第一子区域子集合,和/或,指示M个第四时间段和M个第二子区域子集合。其中,第n个第一子区域子集合包括第一子区域集合中,在第n个第三时间段内被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,N为正整数,n=1,2,…,N;第m个第二子区域子集合包括第二子区域集合中,在第m个第四时间段内被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域,M为正整数,m=1,2,…,M。In one possible design, the method further includes: receiving information indicating N third time periods and N first sub-region subsets, and/or indicating M fourth time periods and M second sub-region subsets. The nth first sub-region subset includes, in the first sub-region set, first-type sub-regions served by the beam of the first network device during the nth third time period, where N is a positive integer, n=1, 2, ..., N; and the mth second sub-region subset includes, in the second sub-region set, second-type sub-regions served by the beam of the first network device during the mth fourth time period, where M is a positive integer, m=1, 2, ..., M.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识和/或第二子区域的标识的情况下,根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:在第一子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段内,根据第一子区域的标识进行通信;或者,在第二子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段内,根据第二子区域的标识进行通信。In one possible design, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area, communication is performed according to the sub-area identifier, including: communicating according to the identifier of the first sub-area during the time period when the first sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device; or communicating according to the identifier of the second sub-area during the time period when the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device.

基于上述可能的设计,网络能够向终端设备指示第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域,使得终端设备能够在波束服务时间内进行通信,提高通信性能。此外,通过子区域的标识或比特位图即可指示第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域,相比于显性描述第一网络设备的波束服务的地理区域,如通过经纬度等信息描述,可以降低信令开销。Based on the above possible design, the network can indicate to the terminal device the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area of the beam service of the first network device, allowing the terminal device to communicate within the beam service time, thereby improving communication performance. In addition, the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area of the beam service of the first network device can be indicated by a sub-area identifier or bitmap. Compared to explicitly describing the geographical area of the beam service of the first network device, such as through information such as latitude and longitude, signaling overhead can be reduced.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:接收信息,该信息指示以下至少一项:参考子区域的标识、第一仰角、第一网络设备的星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息。其中,参考子区域为第一小区中的一个第一类子区域,第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区;第一仰角为第一小区对应的最小仰角,或为第一子区域对应的最小仰角。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a first-category sub-area, the method further includes: receiving information indicating at least one of the following: an identifier of a reference sub-area, a first elevation angle, and ephemeris information of a first network device or ephemeris information of a second network device. The reference sub-area is a first-category sub-area in a first cell, where the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device; and the first elevation angle is a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:根据第一子区域的标识确定第一子区域的参考位置;根据第一子区域的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及第一子区域对应的最小仰角,确定第一子区域的剩余服务时间;在剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。In one possible design, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: determining the reference position of the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; determining the remaining service time of the first sub-area based on the reference position of the first sub-area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, and the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area; and starting neighboring cell measurement before the end of the remaining service time.

基于上述可能的设计,由于终端设备在第一子区域的剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量,而第一子区域是否被覆盖由网络设备的移动决定,因此,该设计可以适用于由第一网络设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。Based on the above possible design, since the terminal device starts neighboring cell measurement before the remaining service time of the first sub-area ends, and whether the first sub-area is covered is determined by the movement of the network device, this design can be applicable to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:根据第一子区域的标识确定第一子区域的参考位置;在第一时间窗内对第二网络设备进行邻区测量。其中,第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移为第一时延和第二时延之差,第一时延为第一子区域的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延,第二时延为第一子区域的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。In one possible design, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication based on the sub-area identifier includes: determining a reference position of the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; and performing a neighbor measurement on the second network device within a first time window. The offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between a first delay and a second delay, where the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the first network device, and the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the second network device.

基于该可能的设计,终端设备在第一时间窗内进行邻区测量,且第一时间窗的起始时刻与终端设备和网络设备之间的传播时延相关,由于网络设备的移动,在不同时间网络设备可能位于不同位置,从而终端设备和网络设备之间的传播时延随时间变化,因此,该设计可以适用于由第一网络设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。Based on this possible design, the terminal device performs neighboring cell measurements within the first time window, and the starting time of the first time window is related to the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device. Due to the movement of the network device, the network device may be located in different positions at different times, so that the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device varies with time. Therefore, this design can be applicable to the scenario where cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:在以下至少一项满足的情况下,启动邻区测量:第一子区域的参考位置与参考子区域的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第三门限;或者,第一子区域的标识与参考子区域的标识之差大于或等于第四门限。In one possible design, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: initiating neighboring cell measurement when at least one of the following is met: the distance between the reference position of the first sub-area and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a third threshold; or, the difference between the identifier of the first sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold.

基于该可能的设计,触发邻区测量的条件与终端设备的位置相关,在终端设备处于不同位置时,上述条件的满足情况可能不同。因此,该方案可以适用于终端设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。Based on this possible design, the conditions for triggering neighbor cell measurements are related to the location of the terminal device. When the terminal device is in different locations, the above conditions may be satisfied differently. Therefore, this solution can be applied to scenarios where the mobility of the terminal device triggers cell reselection.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:接收第三信息,第三信息指示至少一个第四子区域的标识和至少一个第四子区域分别对应的第二接入信息,第四子区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域中的第一类子区域,第四子区域对应的第二接入信息用于第四子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the method further includes: receiving third information, the third information indicating the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area, the fourth sub-area being a first type of sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.

在一种可能的设计中,第四子区域对应的第二接入信息包括以下至少一项:第二网络设备的标识、目标波束的标识、随机接入资源或随机接入前导码;目标波束为第二网络设备的波束。In one possible design, the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of the target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble code; the target beam is the beam of the second network device.

基于该可能的设计,网络可以向终端设备指示第四子区域的标识及其对应的接入信息,使得第四子区域中的终端设备可以根据接入信息接入其他网络设备。此外,网络可以为不同的第四子区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同第四子区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入其他网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on this possible design, the network can indicate the identifier of the fourth sub-area and its corresponding access information to the terminal device, allowing the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access other network devices based on the access information. In addition, the network can indicate different random access resources for different fourth sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different fourth sub-areas to access other network devices using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions when the terminal device performs random access, thereby improving the access success rate.

在一种可能的设计中,第四子区域的标识和第四子区域对应的第二接入信息位于媒体接入控制MAC协议数据单元PDU的子头中;或者,第四子区域的标识和第四子区域对应的第二接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC控制元素CE中;或者,第四子区域的标识位于MAC PDU的子头中,第四子区域对应的第二接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC CE中。In one possible design, the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area are located in the sub-header of the media access control MAC protocol data unit PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area are located in the MAC control element CE of the MAC PDU; or, the identifier of the fourth sub-area is located in the sub-header of the MAC PDU, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:确定至少一个第四子区域的标识中是否包括第一子区域的标识;若至少一个第四子区域的标识包括第一子区域的标识,根据第一子区域对应的第二接入信息,接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed based on the sub-area identifier, including: determining whether the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area; if the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, accessing the second network device according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

基于该可能的设计,由于终端设备在至少一个第四子区域的标识包括第一子区域的标识时接入第二网络设备,因此,网络向终端设备指示的第四子区域的标识可以理解为切换命令,用于指示第四子区域中的终端设备接入其他网络设备,从而实现终端设备的切换。Based on this possible design, since the terminal device accesses the second network device when the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the identifier of the fourth sub-area indicated by the network to the terminal device can be understood as a switching command, which is used to instruct the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access other network devices, thereby realizing the switching of the terminal device.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域,第一类子区域为第二网络设备生效的子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:根据第一子区域的标识,接收第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,第三接入信息用于第一子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备;根据第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the first type of sub-area is a sub-area in which the second network device is effective, and when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, communication is performed according to the sub-area identifier, including: receiving third access information corresponding to the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area, the third access information is used for the terminal device in the first sub-area to access the second network device; and accessing the second network device according to the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

基于该可能的设计,网络可以指示各个第一类子区域对应的接入信息,使得第一类子区域中的终端设备可以根据接入信息接入第二网络设备。此外,网络可以为不同的第一类子区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同第一类子区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入第二网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on this possible design, the network can indicate access information corresponding to each first-class sub-area, so that terminal devices in the first-class sub-area can access the second network device based on the access information. In addition, the network can indicate different random access resources for different first-class sub-areas, so that terminal devices in different first-class sub-areas can access the second network device using different random access resources, reducing resource collisions when terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第三类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:接收第四信息,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和数值K,或者,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限,参考子区域为第三类子区域;根据子区域的配置信息进行通信,包括:根据第四信息和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a third-category sub-area, the method further includes: receiving fourth information, the fourth information including an identifier of the reference sub-area and a value K, or the fourth information including an identifier of the reference sub-area and an updated distance threshold, and the reference sub-area is a third-category sub-area; communicating according to the configuration information of the sub-area, including: updating the tracking area according to the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area.

在一种可能的设计中,第四信息包括第二参考子区域的标识和数值K的情况下,根据第四信息和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新,包括:根据子区域的配置信息确定Nspot_ta个第三类子区域,Nspot_ta为第三类子区域的总数;将参考子区域的标识和Nspot_ta个第三类子区域中距离参考子区域最近的K个第三类子区域的标识,确定为第一跟踪区码列表;在终端设备的跟踪区码列表和第一跟踪区码列表不存在交集的情况下,发起跟踪区更新。In one possible design, when the fourth information includes the identifier and value K of the second reference sub-area, the tracking area update is performed according to the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area, including: determining N spot_ta third-category sub-areas according to the configuration information of the sub-area, where N spot_ta is the total number of third-category sub-areas; determining the identifier of the reference sub-area and the identifiers of the K third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area among the N spot_ta third-category sub-areas as a first tracking area code list; and initiating a tracking area update when there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list.

在一种可能的设计中,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限的情况下,根据第四信息和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新,包括:根据子区域的配置信息和参考子区域的标识确定参考子区域的参考位置;终端设备与参考子区域的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于更新距离门限的情况下,发起跟踪区更新。In one possible design, when the fourth information includes the identifier of the reference sub-area and the update distance threshold, the tracking area update is performed based on the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area, including: determining the reference position of the reference sub-area based on the configuration information of the sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area; and initiating the tracking area update when the distance between the terminal device and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to the update distance threshold.

基于上述可能的设计,能够基于划分的第三类子区域及时进行终端设备的跟踪区更新,避免由于跟踪区未更新而导致对终端设备的寻呼失败,提升终端设备的寻呼成功率,从而保证业务传输,提升用户体验。Based on the above possible design, the tracking area of the terminal device can be updated in time based on the divided third-category sub-area, avoiding the paging failure of the terminal device due to the failure to update the tracking area, and improving the paging success rate of the terminal device, thereby ensuring service transmission and improving user experience.

第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由第一网络设备执行,也可以由第一网络设备的部件,例如第一网络设备的处理器、芯片、或芯片系统等执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分第一网络设备功能的逻辑模块或软件实现。该方法包括:获取子区域的配置信息,并发送该配置信息。其中,该配置信息指示初始区域和细分等级,初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定子区域,子区域包含于初始区域中。其中,第二方面所带来的技术效果可参考上述第一方面所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。In a second aspect, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a first network device, or by a component of the first network device, such as a processor, chip, or chip system of the first network device, or by a logic module or software that can implement all or part of the functions of the first network device. The method includes: obtaining configuration information of the sub-area and sending the configuration information. The configuration information indicates the initial area and the subdivision level, and the initial area, the subdivision level, and the sub-area determination criteria are used to determine the sub-area, and the sub-area is included in the initial area. The technical effects brought about by the second aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by the above-mentioned first aspect, and will not be repeated here.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域确定准则包括:子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影是根据细分等级确定的;子区域的参考位置是根据子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影确定的。In one possible design, the sub-region determination criterion includes: a projection of a reference position of the sub-region on a unit square is determined according to a subdivision level; and a reference position of the sub-region is determined according to a projection of the reference position of the sub-region on a unit square.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域的参考位置是根据子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影和初始区域的总数确定的。In one possible design, the reference position of the sub-region is determined according to the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on a unit square and the total number of initial regions.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影RL(xi,yi)满足如下关系:
In one possible design, the projection RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square satisfies the following relationship:

其中,i表示子区域的标识,L表示细分等级,Nspot表示初始区域的总数。Where i represents the identifier of the sub-region, L represents the subdivision level, and N spot represents the total number of initial regions.

在一种可能的设计中,细分等级包括多个网络设备分别对应的细分等级。In one possible design, the subdivision level includes subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices respectively.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域、第二类子区域或第三类子区域中的至少一项,第一类子区域与广播波束对应,第二类子区域与业务波束对应,第三类子区域与跟踪区对应。In one possible design, the sub-area includes at least one of a first-class sub-area, a second-class sub-area, or a third-class sub-area, the first-class sub-area corresponds to the broadcast beam, the second-class sub-area corresponds to the service beam, and the third-class sub-area corresponds to the tracking area.

在一种可能的设计中,细分等级包括第一类子区域对应的细分等级、第二类子区域对应的细分等级或第三类子区域对应的细分等级中的至少一项。In a possible design, the subdivision level includes at least one of a subdivision level corresponding to the first type of sub-region, a subdivision level corresponding to the second type of sub-region, or a subdivision level corresponding to the third type of sub-region.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:发送第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,第一接入信息用于第一类子区域中的终端设备接入第一网络设备。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the method further includes: sending first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, where the first access information is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access a first network device.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第二类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:发送第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息,通信资源信息指示的通信资源用于第二类子区域中的终端设备进行信息传输。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a second-type sub-area, the method further includes: sending communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second-type sub-area.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:发送第一信息和/或第二信息。其中,第一信息指示第一子区域集合和/或第二子区域集合,第一子区域集合包括第一网络设备的覆盖子区域中的第一类子区域,第二子区域集合包括第一网络设备覆盖子区域中的第二类子区域。第二信息指示第一子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,和/或,指示第二子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域。In one possible design, when the sub-areas include first-type sub-areas and/or second-type sub-areas, the method further includes: sending first information and/or second information. The first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, the first sub-area set including first-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set including second-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device. The second information indicates first-type sub-areas in the first sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device, and/or indicates second-type sub-areas in the second sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:发送第三信息,第三信息指示至少一个第四子区域的标识和至少一个第四子区域分别对应的第二接入信息,第四子区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域中的第一类子区域,第四子区域对应的第二接入信息用于第四子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the method further includes: sending third information, the third information indicating the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area, the fourth sub-area being a first type of sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.

在一种可能的设计中,子区域包括第三类子区域的情况下,该方法还包括:发送第四信息,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和数值K,或者,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限,参考子区域为第三类子区域。In one possible design, when the sub-area includes a third-category sub-area, the method further includes: sending fourth information, the fourth information including an identifier of the reference sub-area and a value K, or the fourth information including an identifier of the reference sub-area and an updated distance threshold, and the reference sub-area is a third-category sub-area.

第三方面,提供了一种通信装置,用于实现各种方法。所述通信装置包括实现方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),其中,该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与功能相对应的模块或单元。In a third aspect, a communication device is provided for implementing various methods. The communication device includes modules, units, or means corresponding to the methods, wherein the modules, units, or means can be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software implementations. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the functions.

在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和收发模块。该处理模块,可以用于实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的处理功能。收发模块可以包括接收模块和发送模块,分别用以实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的接收功能和发送功能。In some possible designs, the communication device may include a processing module and a transceiver module. The processing module may be configured to implement the processing functionality of any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof. The transceiver module may include a receiving module and a transmitting module, respectively configured to implement the receiving functionality and the transmitting functionality of any of the above aspects and any possible implementations thereof.

在一些可能的设计中,收发模块可以由收发电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。In some possible designs, the transceiver module may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver or a communication interface.

第四方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和存储器;该存储器用于存储计算机指令,当该处理器执行该指令时,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。In a fourth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store computer instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device executes the method described in any one of the aspects.

第五方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和通信接口;该通信接口,用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信;所述处理器用于执行计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor and a communication interface; the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device; the processor is used to execute a computer program or instruction so that the communication device executes the method described in any aspect.

第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:至少一个处理器;所述处理器用于执行存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行任一方面所述的方法。该存储器可以与处理器耦合,或者,也可以独立于该处理器。In a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, comprising: at least one processor; the processor is configured to execute a computer program or instruction stored in a memory, so that the communication device performs the method described in any one of the aspects. The memory may be coupled to the processor, or may be independent of the processor.

第七方面,提供了一种通信装置(例如,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统),该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现第一方面或第二方面中任一方面中所涉及的功能。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided (for example, the communication device may be a chip or a chip system), which includes a processor for implementing the functions involved in either the first aspect or the second aspect.

在一些可能的设计中,该通信装置包括存储器,该存储器,用于保存必要的程序指令和数据。In some possible designs, the communication device includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data.

在一些可能的设计中,该装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In some possible designs, when the device is a chip system, it can be composed of a chip or include a chip and other discrete devices.

在一种可能的设计中,第三方面至第七方面所述的通信装置可以为第一方面中的终端设备,或者终端设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置可以为第二方面中的第一网络设备,或者第一网络设备中包含的装置,比如芯片或芯片系统。In one possible design, the communication device described in aspects 3 to 7 may be the terminal device in aspect 1, or a device included in the terminal device, such as a chip or a chip system; or, the communication device may be the first network device in aspect 2, or a device included in the first network device, such as a chip or a chip system.

第八方面,提供一种通信装置,该通信装置可以是终端设备,也可以是终端设备中执行第一方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块或单元(例如,芯片,或者芯片系统,或者电路),或者是能够和终端设备匹配使用的模块或单元;或者,该通信装置可以是第一网络设备,也可以是第一网络设备中执行第二方面中所描述的方法/操作/步骤/动作所一一对应的模块或单元(例如,芯片,或者芯片系统,或者电路),或者是能够和第一网络设备匹配使用的模块或单元。In an eighth aspect, a communication device is provided, which may be a terminal device, or a module or unit (for example, a chip, or a chip system, or a circuit) in the terminal device that corresponds one-to-one to the method/operation/step/action described in the first aspect, or a module or unit that can be used in combination with the terminal device; or, the communication device may be a first network device, or a module or unit (for example, a chip, or a chip system, or a circuit) in the first network device that corresponds one-to-one to the method/operation/step/action described in the second aspect, or a module or unit that can be used in combination with the first network device.

可以理解的是,第三方面至第八方面中任一方面提供的通信装置是芯片时,通信装置的发送动作/功能可以理解为输出信息,通信装置的接收动作/功能可以理解为输入信息。It can be understood that when the communication device provided in any one of the third to eighth aspects is a chip, the sending action/function of the communication device can be understood as output information, and the receiving action/function of the communication device can be understood as input information.

第九方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得通信装置可以执行第一方面或二方面中任一方面所述的方法。In the ninth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, which stores a computer program or instruction. When the computer-readable storage medium is run on a communication device, the communication device can execute the method described in any one of the first aspect or the second aspect.

第十方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在通信装置上运行时,使得该通信装置可以执行第一方面或第二方面中任一方面所述的方法。In a tenth aspect, a computer program product comprising instructions is provided, which, when executed on a communication device, enables the communication device to execute the method described in any one of the first aspect or the second aspect.

第十一方面,提供了一种通信系统,该通信系统可以包括终端设备和第一网络设备。终端设备用于实现上述第一方面及其任一种设计方式所述的方法,第一网络设备用于实现上述第二方面及其任一种设计方式所述的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a communication system is provided, which may include a terminal device and a first network device. The terminal device is configured to implement the method described in the first aspect and any one of its designs, and the first network device is configured to implement the method described in the second aspect and any one of its designs.

其中,第三方面至第十一方面中任一种设计方式所带来的技术效果可参见第一方面或第二方面中不同设计方式所带来的技术效果,在此不再赘述。Among them, the technical effects brought about by any design method in the third aspect to the eleventh aspect can refer to the technical effects brought about by different design methods in the first aspect or the second aspect, and will not be repeated here.

附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

图1为本申请提供的一种NTN中的非凝视模式和凝视模式下的波束覆盖范围示意图;FIG1 is a schematic diagram of beam coverage in a non-staring mode and a staring mode in an NTN provided by the present application;

图2为本申请提供的一种波束在地面的投影示意图;FIG2 is a schematic diagram of a projection of a beam on the ground provided by the present application;

图3为本申请提供的一种基于H3地理网格的区域描述方式示意图;FIG3 is a schematic diagram of a regional description method based on an H3 geographic grid provided by the present application;

图4为本申请提供的一种群切换的场景示意图;FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a group handover scenario provided by the present application;

图5为本申请提供的一种小区切换的流程示意图;FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a cell switching process provided by the present application;

图6为本申请提供的一种波束管理的流程示意图;FIG6 is a schematic diagram of a beam management process provided by the present application;

图7-图11为本申请提供的通信系统的结构示意图;Figures 7 to 11 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the communication system provided by this application;

图12为本申请提供的一种网络设备的波束和区域的映射关系示意图;FIG12 is a schematic diagram of a mapping relationship between beams and areas of a network device provided by the present application;

图13为本申请提供的一种通信方法的流程示意图;FIG13 is a flow chart of a communication method provided by the present application;

图14-图15为本申请提供的一种初始区域的分布示意图;Figures 14 and 15 are schematic diagrams of the distribution of an initial area provided by this application;

图16为本申请提供的一种子区域的分布示意图;FIG16 is a schematic diagram of the distribution of sub-areas provided in this application;

图17为本申请提供的一种参考位置的示意图;FIG17 is a schematic diagram of a reference position provided by the present application;

图18-图20为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图;Figures 18-20 are flowcharts of the communication method provided by this application;

图21为本申请提供的一种子区域集合的示意图;FIG21 is a schematic diagram of a sub-region set provided by the present application;

图22为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG22 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by this application;

图23为本申请提供的一种仰角的示意图;FIG23 is a schematic diagram of an elevation angle provided by the present application;

图24为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG24 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by this application;

图25为本申请提供的一种时延的示意图;FIG25 is a schematic diagram of a time delay provided by the present application;

图26为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG26 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by this application;

图27为本申请提供的一种MAC PDU的结构示意图;Figure 27 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a MAC PDU provided by this application;

图28-图29为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图;Figures 28 and 29 are flowcharts of the communication method provided by this application;

图30为本申请提供的一种跟踪区码列表包括的子区域标识对应的子区域的示意图;FIG30 is a schematic diagram of a sub-area corresponding to a sub-area identifier included in a tracking area code list provided by the present application;

图31为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图;FIG31 is a flow chart of the communication method provided by the present application;

图32-图34为本申请提供的通信装置的结构示意图。Figures 32-34 are schematic diagrams of the structure of the communication device provided in this application.

具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION

在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。In the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" indicates that the objects associated before and after are in an "or" relationship, for example, A/B can represent A or B; "and/or" in this application is merely a description of the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that three relationships may exist, for example, A and/or B can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A and B can be singular or plural.

在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more than two. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, and c can be single or plural.

另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。In addition, to facilitate the clear description of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, the words "first" and "second" are used to distinguish between identical or similar items with substantially the same functions and effects. Those skilled in the art will understand that the words "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity or execution order, and the words "first" and "second" do not necessarily mean different.

可以理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It can be understood that in various embodiments of the present application, the size of the serial number of each process does not mean the order of execution. The execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of the embodiments of the present application.

可以理解,在本申请中,“…时”以及“若”均指在某种客观情况下会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求实现时要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。It can be understood that in this application, "when" and "if" both mean that corresponding processing will be taken under certain objective circumstances, and do not limit the time, nor do they require any judgment action when implementing, nor do they mean that there are other limitations.

可以理解,本申请实施例中的一些可选的特征,在某些场景下,可以不依赖于其他特征,比如其当前所基于的方案,而独立实施,解决相应的技术问题,达到相应的效果,也可以在某些场景下,依据需求与其他特征进行结合。相应的,本申请实施例中给出的装置也可以相应的实现这些特征或功能,在此不予赘述。It is understood that some optional features in the embodiments of the present application may, in certain scenarios, be implemented independently of other features, such as the solution on which they are currently based, to solve corresponding technical problems and achieve corresponding effects. They may also be combined with other features in certain scenarios as needed. Accordingly, the devices provided in the embodiments of the present application may also implement these features or functions accordingly, which will not be described in detail here.

本申请中,除特殊说明外,各个实施例之间相同或相似的部分可以互相参考。在本申请中各个实现方法中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实现方法之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实现方法中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。以下所述的本申请实施方式并不构成对本申请保护范围的限定。In this application, unless otherwise specified, the same or similar parts between the various embodiments can refer to each other. In the various implementation methods in this application, unless otherwise specified and there is no logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different implementation methods are consistent and can be referenced to each other. The technical features in different implementation methods can be combined to form new embodiments based on their inherent logical relationships. The following description of the implementation methods of this application does not constitute a limitation on the scope of protection of this application.

为了方便理解本申请实施例的技术方案,首先给出本申请相关技术的简要介绍如下。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, a brief introduction to the relevant technologies of the present application is first given as follows.

1、非陆地网络(non-terrestrial networks,NTN):1. Non-terrestrial networks (NTN):

相比于陆地通信,NTN通信具有全球覆盖、远距离传输、组网灵活、部署方便和不受地理条件限制等显著优点,已经被广泛应用于多个领域。按照飞行平台距离地面的高度,NTN可以包括低空平台(low altitude platform,LAP)子网(LAP subnetwork)、高空平台(high altitude platform,HAP)子网(HAP subnetwork)、以及卫星通信子网(SATCOM subnetwork)。Compared to terrestrial communications, NTN communications offer significant advantages, including global coverage, long-distance transmission, flexible networking, easy deployment, and freedom from geographical restrictions. Consequently, they have been widely adopted in various fields. Based on the altitude of the flight platform above the ground, NTN can include a low-altitude platform (LAP) subnetwork, a high-altitude platform (HAP) subnetwork, and a satellite communications (SATCOM) subnetwork.

进一步的,按照卫星的轨道高度,可以将卫星通信系统分为地球静止轨道(geostationary earth orbit,GEO)卫星通信系统、中地球轨道(medium earth orbit,MEO)卫星通信系统和低地球轨道(low-earth orbit,LEO)卫星通信系统。Furthermore, according to the orbital altitude of the satellite, the satellite communication system can be divided into geostationary earth orbit (GEO) satellite communication system, medium earth orbit (MEO) satellite communication system and low-earth orbit (LEO) satellite communication system.

2、非凝视模式(earth-moving)和凝视(earth-fixed或quasi-earth fixed)模式:2. Non-gazing mode (earth-moving) and gazing (earth-fixed or quasi-earth fixed) mode:

在卫星通信系统中,根据波束的工作模式,通常可以分为非凝视模式和凝视模式。如图1中的(a)所示,在非凝视模式下,一段时间内(如时刻t0至时刻t2之间),卫星波束的覆盖范围随着卫星一起移动。如图1中的(b)所示,在凝视模式下,一段时间内(如时刻t0至时刻t2之间),卫星通过动态调整波束指向,使得波束近似覆盖地面同一区域。但是在实际应用中,由于波束指向的精度问题以及不同入射角度波束投影在地面的畸变问题,凝视模式下,波束的覆盖区域随着时间的变化仍然存在一定程度的抖动。In satellite communication systems, beam operating modes can generally be divided into non-staring mode and staring mode. As shown in Figure 1 (a), in non-staring mode, the coverage area of the satellite beam moves with the satellite over a period of time (e.g., between time t0 and time t2). As shown in Figure 1 (b), in staring mode, the satellite dynamically adjusts the beam pointing over a period of time (e.g., between time t0 and time t2) so that the beam covers approximately the same area on the ground. However, in actual applications, due to issues with beam pointing accuracy and the distortion of beam projections on the ground at different incident angles, the coverage area of the beam in staring mode still experiences a certain degree of jitter over time.

示例性的,波束在协议中的体现可以是空域滤波器(spatial domain filter),或者称空间滤波器(spatial filter),或称空域参数(spatial domain parameter),空间参数(spatial parameter),空域设置(spatial domain setting),空间设置(spatial setting),或准共址(Quasi-colocation,QCL)信息,QCL假设,QCL指示等。波束可以通过传输配置指示(transmission configuration indication,TCI)状态(TCI-state)参数来指示,或通过空间关系(spatial relation)参数来指示。因此,本申请中,波束可以替换为空域滤波器,空间滤波器,空域参数,空间参数,空域设置,空间设置,QCL信息,QCL假设,QCL指示,TCI-state,空间关系等。上述术语之间也相互等效。本申请中的波束也可以替换为其他表示波束的术语,本申请不作限定。For example, the embodiment of a beam in the protocol can be a spatial domain filter, or a spatial filter, or a spatial domain parameter, a spatial parameter, a spatial domain setting, a spatial setting, or quasi-colocation (QCL) information, a QCL assumption, a QCL indication, etc. The beam can be indicated by a transmission configuration indication (TCI) state (TCI-state) parameter or a spatial relation parameter. Therefore, in this application, beam can be replaced by spatial filter, spatial filter, spatial parameter, spatial parameter, spatial setting, spatial setting, QCL information, QCL assumption, QCL indication, TCI-state, spatial relation, etc. The above terms are also equivalent to each other. The beam in this application can also be replaced by other terms representing beams, and this application does not limit them.

3、NTN相关的区域描述:3. NTN-related regional description:

作为第一种可能的实现,可以基于天线方向图,如给定的天线模型,计算地面不同区域的天线增益或接收功率等对应的轮廓(可以理解为波束在地面的投影),来表征卫星/小区的服务区域。该轮廓也可以理解为波位。As a first possible implementation, the antenna pattern, such as a given antenna model, can be used to calculate the corresponding contours of antenna gain or received power in different areas of the ground (which can be understood as the projection of the beam on the ground) to characterize the service area of the satellite/cell. This contour can also be understood as the beam position.

示例性的,如图2中的(a)所示,示出了单颗GEO卫星72波束参考系统的天线增益图样。其中,椭圆形表示波束在地面的投影,或者说表示波位。如图2中的(b)所示,为非凝视模式下LEO卫星的波束在经纬度平面的轮廓。For example, Figure 2(a) shows the antenna gain pattern for a single GEO satellite 72-beam reference system. The ellipse represents the projection of the beam on the ground, or the beam position. Figure 2(b) shows the profile of the LEO satellite's beam in the latitude and longitude plane in non-staring mode.

在第一种可能的实现中,由于将波束在地面的投影理解为波位,因此可以认为波位与波束静态绑定。从而该方案通常用于GEO卫星网络或非凝视模式下的卫星网络。但是,在凝视模式下,卫星和地面某一区域的倾角动态变化,波束投影也随之改变,波位与波束静态绑定的方案可能不再适用。此外,由于将波束在地面的投影作为波位,因此通常需要波束参考点、波束覆盖区域轮廓、卫星运动向量等参数才能确定波位的具体位置,需要较大的信令开销。In the first possible implementation, since the projection of the beam on the ground is understood as the beam position, the beam position can be considered statically bound to the beam. Therefore, this solution is commonly used in GEO satellite networks or satellite networks operating in non-staring mode. However, in staring mode, the inclination angle between the satellite and a certain area on the ground changes dynamically, and the beam projection also changes accordingly. This static binding of the beam position to the beam may no longer be applicable. Furthermore, since the projection of the beam on the ground is used as the beam position, parameters such as the beam reference point, the beam coverage area outline, and the satellite motion vector are usually required to determine the specific location of the beam position, resulting in significant signaling overhead.

作为第二种可能的实现,可以基于H3地理网格将地球表面划分为正五边形或正六边形网格,使用该网格表示卫星/小区的服务区域,例如卫星/小区的服务区域可以包括一个或多个网格。其中,每个网格可以理解为一个波位。示例性的,基于H3地理网格进行划分时,将地球当作二十面体,该二十面体的每一个面都是球面三角形,具有12个顶点,称为球形二十面体(spherical icosahedron)。该球形二十面体的每个面上都有相同排列方式的六边形。As a second possible implementation, the Earth's surface can be divided into regular pentagonal or hexagonal grids based on the H3 geographic grid. This grid can be used to represent the service area of a satellite/cell. For example, the service area of a satellite/cell can include one or more grids. Each grid can be understood as a wave position. For example, when dividing based on the H3 geographic grid, the Earth is regarded as an icosahedron, each face of which is a spherical triangle with 12 vertices, called a spherical icosahedron. Each face of the spherical icosahedron has hexagons arranged in the same manner.

该第二种可能的实现支持波位的层次化编址。示例性的,如图3所示,存在小、中、大三种面积的正六边形,其中面积最小的正六边形表示波位,其余两种面积的正六边形可以用于波位的层次化编址。为了方便描述,下述实施例将面积最大和面积第二大的正六边形分别称为第一正六边形和第二正六边形。This second possible implementation supports hierarchical addressing of wave positions. For example, as shown in Figure 3, there are three types of regular hexagons: small, medium, and large. The regular hexagon with the smallest area represents the wave position, and the regular hexagons with the remaining two areas can be used for hierarchical addressing of wave positions. For ease of description, the following embodiments refer to the regular hexagons with the largest and second largest areas as the first and second regular hexagons, respectively.

基于图3所示的示例,在进行波位的层次化编址时,第一正六边形的索引可以理解为波位的第一层索引,第二正六边形的索引可以理解为波位的第二层索引,面积最小的正六边形的索引可以理解为波位的第三层索引。在索引某个波位时,可以先根据第一层索引确定波位所属的第一正六边形,然后根据第二层索引确定该第一正六边形中波位所属的第二正六边形,最后根据第三层索引确定该第二正六边形中的波位。Based on the example shown in Figure 3, when performing hierarchical addressing of wave positions, the index of the first regular hexagon can be understood as the first-level index of the wave position, the index of the second regular hexagon can be understood as the second-level index of the wave position, and the index of the regular hexagon with the smallest area can be understood as the third-level index of the wave position. When indexing a wave position, the first regular hexagon to which the wave position belongs can be first determined based on the first-level index, then the second regular hexagon to which the wave position in the first regular hexagon belongs can be determined based on the second-level index, and finally the wave position in the second regular hexagon can be determined based on the third-level index.

在第二种可能的实现中,目前仅支持16种不同精度的波位半径,难以适配不同的载荷能力(如波束半径)。例如,在波位半径的精度为整数,波束半径不是整数的情况下,可能无法准确地使用波位表示卫星/小区的服务区域。此外,该方案中基于波位的索引值确定波位的具体地理位置时,通常需要通过迭代循环的方式确定,无法快速计算波位的准确位置,并且,波位的索引值通常通过64比特指示,信令开销也较大。In the second possible implementation, only 16 different precisions of the beam radius are currently supported, which makes it difficult to adapt to different payload capacities (such as beam radius). For example, when the precision of the beam radius is an integer and the beam radius is not an integer, it may not be possible to accurately use the beam to represent the service area of the satellite/cell. In addition, when determining the specific geographical location of the beam based on the index value of the beam in this solution, it is usually necessary to determine it through an iterative loop, which cannot quickly calculate the exact location of the beam. Moreover, the index value of the beam is usually indicated by 64 bits, and the signaling overhead is also large.

4、群切换、群重选:4. Group switching and group reselection:

卫星的运动会导致某个区域内的连接态终端设备发生群切换,或者使得该区域内的空闲态终端设备发生群重选。The movement of the satellite may cause group handover of connected terminal devices in a certain area, or group reselection of idle terminal devices in the area.

以群切换为例,如图4所示,假设区域2内存在终端簇(记为UE-G1,其中包括多个用户设备(user equipment,UE)),在时间T1,该区域2被卫星2的一个或多个波束服务;在时间T2,卫星2的运动导致卫星2不能继续服务区域2,而是由卫星1的一个或多个波束接替卫星2服务区域2。在该过程中,由于覆盖区域2的卫星发生变化,因此UE-G1中的多个UE发生群切换,由卫星2切换至卫星1。Taking group handover as an example, as shown in Figure 4, assume that a terminal cluster (denoted as UE-G1, which includes multiple user equipment (UE)) exists in region 2. At time T1, region 2 is served by one or more beams from satellite 2. At time T2, the movement of satellite 2 causes it to no longer serve region 2. Instead, one or more beams from satellite 1 take over. During this process, because the satellite covering region 2 changes, multiple UEs in UE-G1 undergo group handover, switching from satellite 2 to satellite 1.

由于卫星的运动速度较快,例如LEO卫星的运动速度约为7.5km/s,因此发生群切换的频次较高,约为几秒到几十秒一次。Since the satellite moves at a relatively high speed, for example, the speed of a LEO satellite is about 7.5 km/s, the frequency of group switching is relatively high, about once every few seconds to tens of seconds.

5、移动性管理:5. Mobility Management

移动性管理主要包括小区切换、小区重选、注册更新和跟踪区更新等。以小区切换为例,如图5所示,地面网络中的小区切换流程主要包括如下步骤:Mobility management mainly includes cell handover, cell reselection, registration update, and tracking area update. Taking cell handover as an example, as shown in Figure 5, the cell handover process in the terrestrial network mainly includes the following steps:

1)小区切换测量:源基站(如下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNodeB或gNB))可以向终端设备发送多个小区(包括服务小区和邻区)的测量配置。终端设备根据测量配置对小区信号质量进行测量。示例性的,小区信号质量可以通过参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)和/或参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)表示。1) Cell Handover Measurement: The source base station (e.g., next-generation node B (gNodeB or gNB)) can send measurement configurations for multiple cells (including the serving cell and neighboring cells) to the terminal device. The terminal device measures the cell signal quality based on the measurement configurations. For example, the cell signal quality can be represented by reference signal received power (RSRP) and/or reference signal received quality (RSRQ).

2)测量结果上报:终端设备向源基站上报测量结果。示例性的,终端设备可以周期性上报或基于事件的触发上报。示例性的,上报触发事件可以为服务小区的信号质量小于门限1,和/或邻区信号质量大于门限2。2) Measurement Result Reporting: The terminal device reports the measurement results to the source base station. For example, the terminal device can report periodically or based on event triggering. For example, the reporting triggering event can be the signal quality of the serving cell being less than threshold 1 and/or the signal quality of the neighboring cell being greater than threshold 2.

3)切换判决:源基站根据测量结果选择合适的邻区作为目标小区,并向目标基站发送切换请求,其中携带用户切换相关的上下文信息。3) Handover decision: The source base station selects a suitable neighboring cell as the target cell based on the measurement results and sends a handover request to the target base station, which carries context information related to the user handover.

4)准入控制:目标基站收到切换请求后,进行准入控制。在允许终端设备接入的情况下,向源基站发送切换请求确认消息,其中携带用于终端设备接入目标小区的相关信息。源基站收到切换请求确认消息后,向终端设备发送无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)重配置消息,其中携带用于接入目标小区的相关信息。4) Admission Control: After receiving the handover request, the target base station performs admission control. If the terminal device is allowed to access, it sends a handover request confirmation message to the source base station, which contains relevant information for the terminal device to access the target cell. After receiving the handover request confirmation message, the source base station sends a radio resource control (RRC) reconfiguration message to the terminal device, which contains relevant information for accessing the target cell.

5)切换执行:终端设备接收切换相关的信息后,在目标小区完成接入流程。5) Handover execution: After receiving the handover-related information, the terminal device completes the access process in the target cell.

示例性的,终端设备向目标小区发送随机接入前导码,以发起在目标小区的随机接入。此外,小区切换时网络配置的随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)的周期可以为10/20/40/80/160毫秒(ms)。For example, the terminal device sends a random access preamble to the target cell to initiate random access in the target cell. Furthermore, the period of the random access channel (RACH) configured by the network during cell handover can be 10/20/40/80/160 milliseconds (ms).

在小区重选过程中,基站以广播形式发送邻区相关的测量配置等参数,终端设备基于信号质量测量值与网络下发的参数(如重选阈值等)进行比较,符合重选条件后自主重选到目标邻区。During the cell reselection process, the base station broadcasts parameters such as the measurement configuration related to the neighboring cell. The terminal device compares the signal quality measurement value with the parameters sent by the network (such as the reselection threshold, etc.) and autonomously reselects to the target neighboring cell if the reselection conditions are met.

也就是说,地面网络中,终端设备基于信号质量进行小区切换或小区重选。但是,NTN中远近效应不明显,仅基于信号质量进行小区切换或小区重选的效率较低。因此,NTN在以网络移动为主触发的群切换/群重选场景下,提出基于时间、位置(如终端设备与源小区的参考位置(Reference Location)以及目标小区的参考位置之间的距离)等信息,实现NTN网络下的移动性管理。值得注意的是,此处的参考位置也可以称为参考点、参考位置点、位置参考点、参考点位置等。That is, in terrestrial networks, terminal devices perform cell handover or cell reselection based on signal quality. However, the near-far effect is not significant in NTNs, and cell handover or cell reselection based solely on signal quality is inefficient. Therefore, in group handover/group reselection scenarios triggered primarily by network mobility, NTN proposes to implement mobility management in NTN networks based on information such as time and location (such as the distance between the terminal device and the reference location (Reference Location) of the source cell and the reference location of the target cell). It is worth noting that the reference location here can also be referred to as a reference point, reference location point, location reference point, or reference point location.

然而,将基于位置等信息进行移动性管理的方案应用于卫星移动触发的群切换/群重选场景中时,会带来频繁的配置信息更新,如网络需要频繁更新小区的参考点位置信息,从而导致网络侧进行移动性相关配置的信令开销较大。However, when the mobility management solution based on location information and other information is applied to the group switching/group reselection scenario triggered by satellite mobility, it will lead to frequent configuration information updates. For example, the network needs to frequently update the reference point location information of the cell, resulting in a large signaling overhead for mobility-related configuration on the network side.

6、波束管理:6. Beam management:

示例性的,地面新无线(new radio,NR)系统中的一种波束管理流程如图6所示。首先,基站(如gNB)在小区覆盖范围内采用波束扫描方式,分时发送不同方向的同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)波束。相应的,终端设备采用波束扫描的方式接收SSB,并测量各个SSB波束的信号质量。Figure 6 illustrates an exemplary beam management process in a terrestrial new radio (NR) system. First, a base station (e.g., a gNB) uses beam scanning within its cell coverage area to time-share synchronization signal block (SSB) beams in different directions. In response, a terminal device uses beam scanning to receive SSBs and measure the signal quality of each SSB beam.

后续,若终端设备处于无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)空闲态,则终端设备进行随机接入(random access,RA),向基站发送消息1(message 1,Msg1),其中携带随机接入前导,随机接入前导中携带信号质量最优的SSB波束对应的SSB索引(index)。基站采用波束扫描的方式接收随机接入前导后,可以将信号质量最优的SSB波束确定为下行发送波束,基站接收上行信号时可以复用该下行发送波束。此外,终端设备接收下行信号的波束为信号质量最优的SSB波束,发送上行信号时可以复用该下行接收波束。Subsequently, if the terminal device is in the radio resource control (RRC) idle state, it performs random access (RA) and sends message 1 (Msg1) to the base station, which carries a random access preamble. The random access preamble carries the SSB index corresponding to the SSB beam with the best signal quality. After the base station receives the random access preamble using beam scanning, it can determine the SSB beam with the best signal quality as the downlink transmit beam. The base station can reuse this downlink transmit beam when receiving uplink signals. In addition, the beam used by the terminal device to receive downlink signals is the SSB beam with the best signal quality, and the downlink receive beam can be reused when sending uplink signals.

若终端设备处于RRC连接态,终端设备通过测量报告向基站发送SSB测量结果,基站根据SSB测量结果确定下行发送波束,并在接收上行信号时复用该下行波束。此外,基站可以向终端设备指示其确定的下行发送波束,终端设备可以基于该下行发送波束,根据波束配对结果确定与该下行发送波束匹配的下行接收波束。If the terminal device is in the RRC connected state, the terminal device sends the SSB measurement result to the base station via a measurement report. The base station determines the downlink transmit beam based on the SSB measurement result and reuses the downlink beam when receiving uplink signals. In addition, the base station can indicate the downlink transmit beam it has determined to the terminal device. The terminal device can determine the downlink receive beam that matches the downlink transmit beam based on the beam pairing result.

此外,基站可以在下行发送波束(即最优SSB波束)附近,采用更窄的用于波束管理(beam management,BM)信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS)(CSI-RS for BM)波束进行波束扫描。In addition, the base station can use a narrower channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS) beam for beam management (BM) (CSI-RS for BM) for beam scanning near the downlink transmit beam (i.e., the optimal SSB beam).

相应的,终端设备通过测量报告向基站反馈CSI-RS for MB波束的测量结果。基站根据该测量结果确定下行发送波束(如最优CSI-RS for BM波束),并在接收上行信号时复用该下行发送波束。终端设备可以通过波束扫描的方式接收CSI-RS for BM波束,以确定下行接收波束(如最优CSI-RS for BM波束),并在发送上行信号时复用该下行接收波束。Accordingly, the terminal device feeds back the CSI-RS for MB beam measurement results to the base station via a measurement report. Based on the measurement results, the base station determines a downlink transmit beam (e.g., the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam) and reuses this downlink transmit beam when receiving uplink signals. The terminal device can receive the CSI-RS for BM beam using beam scanning to determine a downlink receive beam (e.g., the optimal CSI-RS for BM beam) and reuse this downlink receive beam when sending uplink signals.

然而,在NTN中,卫星的运动导致终端侧的接收波束频繁变化,从而导致网络侧需要频繁向终端配置接收波形和收发时频资源,信令开销较大。However, in NTN, the movement of the satellite causes the receiving beam on the terminal side to change frequently, which requires the network side to frequently configure the receiving waveform and transceiver time and frequency resources to the terminal, resulting in large signaling overhead.

综上,目前NTN的服务区域划分方式、NTN中的移动性管理、波束管理等流程均存在信令开销较大的问题。基于此,本申请提供一种通信方法,可以先将地面离散为一些初始区域,再基于初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则确定包含于初始区域中的子区域,使得网络侧和终端设备可以基于子区域标识进行通信。例如,网络侧可以通过子区域标识向终端设备指示其覆盖区域或服务区域,或者通过子区域标识配置参考子区域等。相比于网络侧通过显性方式向终端设备指示其覆盖区域(如指示经纬度、波束指向和张角等),可以显著降低信令开销。In summary, the current NTN service area division method, mobility management in NTN, beam management and other processes all have the problem of large signaling overhead. Based on this, the present application provides a communication method, which can first discretize the ground into some initial areas, and then determine the sub-areas included in the initial area based on the initial area, subdivision level and sub-area determination criteria, so that the network side and the terminal device can communicate based on the sub-area identifier. For example, the network side can indicate its coverage area or service area to the terminal device through the sub-area identifier, or configure a reference sub-area through the sub-area identifier. Compared with the network side indicating its coverage area to the terminal device in an explicit manner (such as indicating longitude and latitude, beam pointing and angle, etc.), the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced.

此外,本申请的方案可以基于细分等级对初始区域进行进一步细分,使得网络侧能够基于实际应用灵活确定细分等级,从而灵活确定子区域的数目以及大小,提升通信的灵活性。再者,由于采用细分等级对初始区域进行划分,而初始区域通常是固定的,因此,可以认为本申请提供了统一的子区域划分方式(即对固定的初始区域进行划分),从而使得网络节点能够识别各种细分等级下的子区域,进而提升通信性能。In addition, the solution of the present application can further subdivide the initial area based on the subdivision level, so that the network side can flexibly determine the subdivision level based on actual application, thereby flexibly determining the number and size of sub-areas, thereby improving communication flexibility. Furthermore, since the initial area is divided by subdivision levels, and the initial area is usually fixed, it can be considered that the present application provides a unified sub-area division method (i.e., dividing the fixed initial area), so that network nodes can identify sub-areas at various subdivision levels, thereby improving communication performance.

本申请实施例的技术方案可用于NTN系统。NTN系统可以包括但不限于:卫星通信系统、高空平台(high altitude platform station,HAPS)通信、无人机通信、通信导航一体化(integrated communication and navigation,IcaN)系统、全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS)等。NTN系统可以与传统的移动通信系统相融合。例如:所述移动通信系统可以为第四代(4th generation,4G)通信系统(例如,长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信系统、第五代(5th generation,5G)通信系统(例如,NR系统)、设备到设备(device-to-device,D2D)通信系统、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)通信系统、物联网(internet of things,IoT)通信系统、车联网通信系统、以及未来的移动通信系统等。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be used in NTN systems. NTN systems may include, but are not limited to, satellite communication systems, high altitude platform station (HAPS) communications, drone communications, integrated communication and navigation (IcaN) systems, and global navigation satellite systems (GNSS). NTN systems can be integrated with traditional mobile communication systems. For example, the mobile communication systems may include fourth-generation (4G) communication systems (e.g., long-term evolution (LTE) systems), world-wide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) communication systems, fifth-generation (5G) communication systems (e.g., NR systems), device-to-device (D2D) communication systems, machine-to-machine (M2M) communication systems, Internet of Things (IoT) communication systems, Internet of Vehicles (IoV) communication systems, and future mobile communication systems.

其中,上述适用本申请的通信系统仅是举例说明,适用本申请的通信系统和通信场景不限于此,本申请提供的通信系统和通信场景对本申请的方案不造成任何限定,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。Among them, the above-mentioned communication system applicable to this application is only an example, and the communication system and communication scenarios applicable to this application are not limited to this. The communication system and communication scenarios provided in this application do not impose any limitations on the solution of this application. They are uniformly explained here and will not be repeated below.

作为一种可能的实现,适用于本申请方案的通信系统可以包括至少一个终端设备和至少一个网络设备。网络设备可以包括接入网设备和/或核心网设备。示例性的,终端设备和终端设备之间、终端设备和网络设备之间、以及网络设备和网络设备之间可以通过有线或无线的方式相互通信。As a possible implementation, a communication system applicable to the solution of the present application may include at least one terminal device and at least one network device. The network device may include an access network device and/or a core network device. For example, terminal devices may communicate with each other, with network devices, and with each other via wired or wireless means.

可选的,终端设备可以是具有无线收发功能的用户侧设备,或可以是设置于该设备中的芯片或芯片系统。终端设备也可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、终端、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站(mobile station,MS)、远方站、远程终端、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)、用户终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置等。终端设备例如可以是IoT、V2X、D2D、M2M、5G网络、或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)中的终端设备。终端设备可以部署在陆地上,包括室内或室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。Optionally, the terminal device may be a user-side device with wireless transceiver functions, or may be a chip or chip system provided in the device. The terminal device may also be referred to as user equipment (UE), terminal, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station (MS), remote station, remote terminal, mobile terminal (MT), user terminal, wireless communication device, user agent or user device, etc. The terminal device may be, for example, a terminal device in IoT, V2X, D2D, M2M, 5G network, or a future evolved public land mobile network (PLMN). The terminal device may be deployed on land, including indoors or outdoors, handheld or vehicle-mounted; it may also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it may also be deployed in the air (such as airplanes, balloons and satellites, etc.).

示例性的,终端设备可以是无人机、IoT设备(例如,传感器,电表,水表等)、V2X设备、无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)中的站点(station,ST)、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)设备、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备(也可以称为穿戴式智能设备)、平板电脑或带无线收发功能的电脑、虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、车载终端、具有车对车(vehicle-to-vehicle,V2V)通信能力的车辆、智能网联车、具有无人机(unmanned aerial vehicle,UAV)对无人机(UAV to UAV,U2U)通信能力的无人机等等。终端设备可以是移动的,也可以是固定的,本申请对此不作具体限定。Exemplarily, the terminal device can be a drone, an IoT device (e.g., a sensor, an electricity meter, a water meter, etc.), a V2X device, a station (ST) in a wireless local area network (WLAN), a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA) device, a handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, an in-vehicle device, a wearable device (also called a wearable smart device), a tablet computer or a computer with wireless transceiver capabilities, a virtual reality (VR) device, or a similar device. The present invention relates to wireless terminals for use in various fields, including virtual reality (VR) terminals, wireless terminals in industrial control, wireless terminals in self-driving, wireless terminals in remote medical care, wireless terminals in smart grids, wireless terminals in transportation safety, wireless terminals in smart cities, wireless terminals in smart homes, in-vehicle terminals, vehicles with vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication capabilities, intelligent connected vehicles, and drones with unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) to unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) communication capabilities. The terminal device may be mobile or fixed, and this application does not impose specific limitations on this.

核心网设备为部署于移动通信架构的核心网(core network,CN)中的设备。核心网作为承载网络提供到数据网络的接口,为终端设备提供通信连接、认证、管理、策略控制以及对数据业务完成承载等。示例性的,核心网设备包括但不限于:接入和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元、会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元,认证服务功能(authentication server function,AUSF)网元、策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元等。Core network equipment is deployed in the core network (CN) of the mobile communications architecture. As a bearer network, the core network provides an interface to the data network, offering communication connectivity, authentication, management, policy control, and data service bearer services for terminal devices. Exemplary core network equipment includes, but is not limited to, access and mobility management function (AMF) network elements, session management function (SMF) network elements, authentication server function (AUSF) network elements, policy control function (PCF) network elements, and user plane function (UPF) network elements.

接入网设备可以是具有无线收发功能的网络侧设备,或可以是设置于该设备中的芯片或芯片系统或模块。接入网设备位于移动通信系统的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN),用于为终端设备提供接入服务。接入网设备可以包括但不限于:部署(或搭载)于卫星的接入网设备、部署于空中节点的接入网设备、或部署于地面的接入网设备。Access network equipment can be a network-side device with wireless transceiver capabilities, or it can be a chip, chip system, or module installed in the device. Access network equipment is located in the radio access network (RAN) of a mobile communication system and is used to provide access services to terminal devices. Access network equipment may include, but is not limited to, access network equipment deployed (or carried) on satellites, access network equipment deployed on aerial nodes, or access network equipment deployed on the ground.

部署于卫星或空中节点的接入网设备可以是无线中继节点或无线回传节点。例如,该接入网设备可以作为层1中继设备,用于将物理层信号重新生成(即无线频点过滤,频率转换和放大的处理),而不具有其他更高协议层。或者,部署于卫星或空中节点的接入网设备可以实现基站部分或全部功能。此时,该接入网设备也可以称为卫星基站或空中基站等。示例性的,卫星可以是LEO卫星、MEO卫星、GEO卫星等;空中节点可以是无人机(unmanned aerial vehicle,UAV)、飞机、空中平台(high attitude platform,HAP)等。The access network device deployed on a satellite or an aerial node can be a wireless relay node or a wireless backhaul node. For example, the access network device can serve as a layer 1 relay device to regenerate the physical layer signal (i.e., wireless frequency filtering, frequency conversion, and amplification processing) without having other higher protocol layers. Alternatively, the access network device deployed on a satellite or an aerial node can implement some or all of the functions of a base station. In this case, the access network device can also be called a satellite base station or an aerial base station, etc. Exemplarily, the satellite can be a LEO satellite, a MEO satellite, a GEO satellite, etc.; the aerial node can be an unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV), an aircraft, a high altitude platform (HAP), etc.

部署于地面的接入网设备可以称为地面基站。其可以是LTE或演进的LTE系统(LTE-Advanced,LTE-A)中的演进型基站(evolutional Node B,eNB或eNodeB),如传统的宏基站eNB和异构网络场景下的微基站eNB;或者可以是5G系统中的下一代节点B(next generation node B,gNodeB或gNB);或者可以是传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP);或者可以是gNB的一个或一组天线面板;或者可以是未来演进的PLMN中的基站;或者可以是IoT、V2X、D2D、或M2M中实现基站功能的设备。Access network equipment deployed on the ground is called a terrestrial base station. It can be an evolutionary Node B (eNB or eNodeB) in LTE or evolved LTE systems (LTE-Advanced, LTE-A), such as a traditional macro eNB or a micro eNB in heterogeneous network scenarios; or a next-generation Node B (gNodeB or gNB) in a 5G system; or a transmission reception point (TRP); or one or a group of antenna panels in a gNB; or a base station in a future evolved PLMN; or a device that implements base station functions in IoT, V2X, D2D, or M2M.

或者,可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),CU和DU,CU-控制面(control plane,CP),CU-用户面(user plane,UP),或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元中,例如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)中。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中,例如包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。Alternatively, it can be a centralized unit (CU), a distributed unit (DU), a CU and DU, a CU-control plane (CP), a CU-user plane (UP), or a radio unit (RU). The CU and DU can be separate or included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU). The RU can be included in a radio frequency device or radio unit, such as a remote radio unit (RRU), an active antenna unit (AAU), or a remote radio head (RRH).

在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,网络设备可以是开放无线接入网(open RAN,ORAN)系统中的网络设备或网络设备的模块。在ORAN系统中,CU还可以称为开放(open,O)-CU,DU还可以称为O-DU,CU-CP还可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP还可以称为O-CU-UP,RU还可以称为O-RU。本申请中的CU(或CU-CP、CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, CU (or CU-CP and CU-UP), DU or RU may also have different names, but those skilled in the art can understand their meanings. For example, the network device may be a network device or a module of a network device in an open radio access network (open RAN, ORAN) system. In the ORAN system, CU may also be referred to as open (open, O)-CU, DU may also be referred to as O-DU, CU-CP may also be referred to as O-CU-CP, CU-UP may also be referred to as O-CU-UP, and RU may also be referred to as O-RU. Any of the CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU and RU in this application may be implemented by a software module, a hardware module, or a combination of a software module and a hardware module.

示例性的,以接入网设备部署在卫星上,或者说接入网设备为卫星为例,该通信系统还可以包括NTN网关(NTN gateway)(或称为关口站)。通常,NTN网关部署在地面。NTN网关可以与卫星进行通信,卫星与NTN网关之间的链路可以称为馈电链路(feeder link)。For example, in the case where the access network equipment is deployed on a satellite, or in other words, the access network equipment is a satellite, the communication system may further include an NTN gateway (or gateway station). Typically, the NTN gateway is deployed on the ground. The NTN gateway can communicate with the satellite, and the link between the satellite and the NTN gateway is called a feeder link.

如图7所示,在卫星作为无线中继节点,或者说卫星具有中继转发功能的情况下,NTN网关具有基站的功能或部分基站功能,此时NTN网关可以作为基站。或者,NTN网关可以与基站分开部署,即除了NTN网关外,该通信系统还包括地面基站。图7中以NTN网关和基站分开部署为例进行说明。As shown in Figure 7, when a satellite functions as a wireless relay node, or in other words, a satellite has relay and forwarding capabilities, the NTN gateway has base station functions or partial base station functions. In this case, the NTN gateway can function as a base station. Alternatively, the NTN gateway can be deployed separately from the base station. In other words, in addition to the NTN gateway, the communication system also includes ground base stations. Figure 7 illustrates the example of separate deployment of the NTN gateway and base station.

如图8所示,在卫星可以实现基站部分或全部功能的情况下,卫星具有数据处理能力,可以将卫星作为基站。此时,NTN网关和卫星可以通过卫星无线接口(satellite radio interface,SRI)传输终端设备的用户面数据。As shown in Figure 8, when a satellite can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, it has data processing capabilities and can be used as a base station. In this case, the NTN gateway and the satellite can transmit user-plane data from the terminal device via the satellite radio interface (SRI).

此外,卫星可以实现基站部分或全部功能的情况下,如图9所示,不同卫星之间存在星间链路(inter-satellite link,ISL),卫星之间可以通过ISL通信。或者,如图10所示,卫星可以具有基站的DU处理功能,或者说卫星能够作为DU。该场景下,基站的CU处理功能可以部署在地面,CU和DU之间通过NTN网关使用F1接口通信。In addition, satellites can perform some or all of the functions of a base station. As shown in Figure 9, inter-satellite links (ISLs) exist between different satellites, allowing satellites to communicate via ISLs. Alternatively, as shown in Figure 10, a satellite can have the DU processing capabilities of a base station, or in other words, the satellite can act as a DU. In this scenario, the CU processing capabilities of the base station can be deployed on the ground, and the CU and DU communicate using the F1 interface through the NTN gateway.

在图7至图10所示的架构中,NG指基站和核心网之间的接口。Uu指基站和终端设备之间的接口。Xn指基站之间的接口。可以理解的是,随着通信系统的演进,基站和核心网之间的接口名称、基站和终端设备之间的接口名称、以及基站之间的接口名称也可能发生变化,本申请对此不作具体限定。In the architectures shown in Figures 7 to 10, NG refers to the interface between the base station and the core network. Uu refers to the interface between the base station and the terminal device. Xn refers to the interface between base stations. It is understood that as communication systems evolve, the names of the interfaces between the base station and the core network, between the base station and the terminal device, and between base stations may also change, and this application does not specifically limit this.

可选的,卫星作为无线中继节点,具有中继转发功能时,可以认为卫星工作在透传(transparent)模式下。透传也可以称为弯管转发传输,即信号在卫星上只进行了频率的转换、信号的放大等过程,卫星对于信号而言是透明的。卫星具有数据处理能力,能够实现基站部分或全部功能时,可以认为卫星工作在再生(regenerative)模式下。对于某个卫星,可以仅支持透传模式或仅支持再生模式,也可以支持透传模式和再生模式,并且能够在透传模式和再生模式之间进行切换。Optionally, when a satellite acts as a wireless relay node and has relay forwarding capabilities, the satellite can be considered to be operating in transparent mode. Transparent transmission can also be called bent-pipe forwarding transmission, where the signal only undergoes frequency conversion, signal amplification, and other processes on the satellite, and the satellite is transparent to the signal. When a satellite has data processing capabilities and can perform some or all of the functions of a base station, it can be considered to be operating in regenerative mode. A satellite may support only transparent mode, only regenerative mode, or both, and be able to switch between transparent mode and regenerative mode.

在一些实施场景下,NTN和地面网络可以融合。示例性的,图11为本申请实施例提供的NTN和地面网络的融合网络架构。在图11所示的架构中,卫星101和卫星102工作在再生模式下,卫星103工作在透传模式下。此外,该架构还可以包括地面基站104和105,空中基站106和107以及核心网设备。In some implementation scenarios, the NTN and terrestrial networks can be integrated. For example, Figure 11 illustrates a converged network architecture for the NTN and terrestrial networks, as provided in an embodiment of the present application. In the architecture shown in Figure 11, satellites 101 and 102 operate in regenerative mode, while satellite 103 operates in transparent mode. Furthermore, the architecture may include ground base stations 104 and 105, aerial base stations 106 and 107, and core network equipment.

示例性的,卫星、空中基站和地面基站可以通过无线链路、光链路等实现直接或间接通信。卫星可以通过多波束向终端设备提供通信服务、导航服务或定位服务等。卫星采用多个波束覆盖服务区域,不同的波束可通过时分、频分和空分中的一种或多种进行通信。卫星通过广播通信信号或导航信号等与终端设备进行无线通信,卫星可与地面设备进行无线通信。For example, satellites, aerial base stations, and ground base stations can communicate directly or indirectly via wireless links, optical links, or other means. Satellites can provide communication, navigation, or positioning services to terminal devices using multiple beams. Satellites use multiple beams to cover their service area, and different beams can communicate using one or more of time division, frequency division, and space division. Satellites communicate wirelessly with terminal devices by broadcasting communication signals or navigation signals, and can also communicate wirelessly with ground-based devices.

需要说明的是,本申请实施例描述的通信系统是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。It should be noted that the communication system described in the embodiment of the present application is intended to more clearly illustrate the technical solution of the embodiment of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application. Ordinary technicians in this field can know that with the evolution of network architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solution provided in the embodiment of the present application is also applicable to similar technical problems.

为了方便理解本申请实施例的技术方案,在介绍本申请提供的通信方法之前,首先给出本申请提供的相关名词的简要介绍。In order to facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, before introducing the communication method provided by the present application, a brief introduction to the relevant terms provided by the present application is first given.

1、区域:1. Region:

除特殊说明外,本申请下述实施例中的“区域”均指地理区域。示例性的,区域可以具有以下至少一项属性:形状、轮廓、大小、半径、面积、地理位置等。Unless otherwise specified, the term "region" in the following embodiments of this application refers to a geographical region. For example, a region may have at least one of the following attributes: shape, outline, size, radius, area, geographical location, etc.

“区域”还可以具有高度属性,即区域可以理解为某个给定高度或高度范围的地理区域。默认情况下,区域可以指地面上海拔高度为0千米(km)或海拔高度在0km左右(如[-2,2]km范围内)的地理区域,或者指某个平均海拔高度的地理区域。此外,也可以指其他特定高度或特定高度范围的地理区域,例如海拔高度为10km的地理区域,或海拔高度在10km左右(如[7,13]km范围内)的地理区域。"Region" can also have an altitude attribute, that is, a region can be understood as a geographical area of a given altitude or altitude range. By default, a region can refer to a geographical area with an altitude of 0 kilometers (km) above sea level or an altitude of about 0 km (such as in the range of [-2, 2] km), or a geographical area with an average altitude. In addition, it can also refer to geographical areas of other specific altitudes or specific altitude ranges, such as a geographical area with an altitude of 10 km above sea level, or a geographical area with an altitude of about 10 km (such as in the range of [7, 13] km).

在一种可能的实施方式中,区域也可以称为“波位”、“地理区域”等。当然,还可以有其他名称,本申请对区域的名称不作具体限定。In a possible implementation, the region may also be referred to as a "wavelength," a "geographical region," etc. Of course, other names are also possible, and this application does not specifically limit the name of the region.

不同区域的形状、轮廓、大小、半径、面积可以相同也可以不相同。不同区域的地理位置不同。不同区域之间可以存在重叠也可以不存在重叠。The shapes, outlines, sizes, radii, and areas of different regions may or may not be the same. Different regions may have different geographical locations. Different regions may or may not overlap.

在一种可能的实施方式中,区域相对于地球固定,或者理解为区域指相对地球固定的地理区域。区域相对地球固定,可以理解为:区域的轮廓、大小或地理位置不变,例如区域的轮廓、大小或地理位置不随时间的变化而变化。或者,区域相对地球固定,可以理解为:区域轮廓以及区域中的点可以通过地心地固(earth-centered earth-fixed,ECEF)坐标、大地坐标系(geodetic coordinate system)、地心惯性(earth-centered inertial,ECI)坐标系等三维坐标系描述,或区域轮廓上的各个点在ECEF、大地坐标系、ECI坐标系等三维坐标系中的坐标固定不变。In one possible implementation, the region is fixed relative to the earth, or it can be understood that the region refers to a geographical area that is fixed relative to the earth. The region is fixed relative to the earth, which can be understood as: the outline, size or geographical location of the region does not change, for example, the outline, size or geographical location of the region does not change with time. Alternatively, the region is fixed relative to the earth, which can be understood as: the outline of the region and the points in the region can be described by a three-dimensional coordinate system such as earth-centered earth-fixed (ECEF) coordinates, a geodetic coordinate system, or an earth-centered inertial (ECI) coordinate system, or the coordinates of each point on the outline of the region in a three-dimensional coordinate system such as ECEF, geodetic coordinate system, or ECI coordinate system are fixed and unchanged.

在一种可能的实施方式中,区域的形状可以为正六边形,或者为其他形状如正五边形、圆形、椭圆形等。或者,区域的形状还可以为不规则形状,不予限制。In a possible embodiment, the shape of the region may be a regular hexagon, or other shapes such as a regular pentagon, a circle, an ellipse, etc. Alternatively, the shape of the region may be an irregular shape, which is not limited.

示例性的,区域的形状可以是协议定义的,或者可以是网络设备定义的。不同网络设备定义的区域形状可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种区域形状。类似的,区域的大小、半径、面积也可以是协议定义的,或者可以是网络设备定义的。不同网络设备定义的区域大小、半径、面积可以相同,也可以不同。同一网络设备也可以定义多种区域大小、多种区域半径、或多种区域面积。For example, the shape of a region can be defined by a protocol or by a network device. The region shapes defined by different network devices can be the same or different. The same network device can also define multiple region shapes. Similarly, the size, radius, and area of a region can be defined by a protocol or by a network device. The size, radius, and area of a region defined by different network devices can be the same or different. The same network device can also define multiple region sizes, multiple region radii, or multiple region areas.

在一种可能的实施方式中,可以在地球上划分多个区域,并对多个区域进行索引(如编号)。In a possible implementation, the earth may be divided into multiple regions, and the multiple regions may be indexed (eg, numbered).

作为一种可能的划分方式,该区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的,即可以根据某个区域的标识得到该区域的地理位置,或者说,区域的标识和区域的地理位置之间存在关联关系。示例性的,可以在地球上离散出多个区域,每个区域对应一个标识,区域的地理位置可以根据该区域的标识得到。As one possible division method, the geographic location of a region is determined by the region's identifier. That is, the geographic location of a region can be obtained based on the region's identifier, or in other words, there is a correlation between the region's identifier and the region's geographic location. For example, multiple regions can be discretized on the earth, each corresponding to an identifier, and the geographic location of the region can be obtained based on the region's identifier.

进一步的,区域的地理位置还可以根据以下至少一项确定:区域总数Nspot、区域的半径Rspot、或地球半径ReFurthermore, the geographical location of the area may be determined according to at least one of the following: the total number of areas N spot , the radius of the area R spot , or the radius of the earth Re .

示例性的,区域总数可以理解为在地球上离散出的区域总数。该Nspot个区域可以完全覆盖地球,如地球上的任意位置均属于某个区域;或者,该Nspot个区域也可以覆盖地球上的部分地理位置,例如,该Nspot个区域可以不覆盖地球南极和/或北极,即南极和/或北极可以不存在该区域。Nspot为正整数,例如Nspot=78702。For example, the total number of regions can be understood as the total number of discrete regions on Earth. The N spot regions can completely cover the Earth, e.g., any location on Earth belongs to a certain region; alternatively, the N spot regions can cover a portion of Earth's geographic locations, e.g., the N spot regions may not cover the South Pole and/or the North Pole, i.e., the South Pole and/or the North Pole may not contain such regions. N spot is a positive integer, e.g., N spot = 78702.

示例性的,该Nspot个区域的半径可以相同,即每个区域的半径均为Rspot。在区域的形状为正六边形的情况下,区域的半径可以为正六边形外接圆的半径;在区域的形状为圆形的情况下,区域的半径可以为圆形的半径;在区域的形状为椭圆形的情况下,区域的半径可以包括长半径或短半径。Rspot的单位可以为千米(km),例如Rspot=50千米,或者也可以为米(m)等其他长度单位,不予限制。For example, the radii of the N spot areas can be the same, that is, the radius of each area is R spot . When the area is a regular hexagon, the radius of the area can be the radius of the circumcircle of the regular hexagon; when the area is a circle, the radius of the area can be the radius of the circle; when the area is an ellipse, the radius of the area can include a major radius or a minor radius. R spot can be expressed in kilometers (km), for example, R spot = 50 kilometers, or can be other length units such as meters (m), without limitation.

示例性的,本申请实施例中,地球半径可以为常数,例如取值6378km;或者,对于不同时空位置,地球半径可以不同,例如,地球半径可以包括赤道半径或极半径。例如,在南极和/或北极划分区域时,可以使用极半径;在非两极地区划分区域时,可以使用赤道半径。或者,当用椭球描述地球(即认为地球的形状为椭球形)时,地球半径可能包括长轴和短轴,且长轴和短轴的取值存在差异。For example, in an embodiment of the present application, the radius of the earth can be a constant, such as 6378 km; or, the radius of the earth can be different for different time and space positions, for example, the radius of the earth can include the equatorial radius or the polar radius. For example, when dividing regions at the South Pole and/or the North Pole, the polar radius can be used; when dividing regions in non-polar regions, the equatorial radius can be used. Alternatively, when the earth is described by an ellipsoid (i.e., the shape of the earth is considered to be an ellipsoid), the radius of the earth may include a major axis and a minor axis, and the values of the major axis and the minor axis are different.

作为一种可能的实现,区域总数、区域的半径以及地球半径对每个区域来说可以是相同的,即可以认为区域总数、区域的半径以及地球半径是常量。此时,可以认为影响区域的地理位置的变量即为区域的标识。As a possible implementation, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth can be the same for each region, that is, the total number of regions, the radius of the region, and the radius of the earth can be considered constants. In this case, the variable affecting the geographical location of the region can be considered as the identifier of the region.

在一种可能的实施方式中,每个区域中包括(或存在)一个参考位置,该参考位置例如可以为区域的中心位置。示例性的,区域的地理位置可以指该区域中的参考位置的地理位置,此时,区域的地理位置是由区域的标识确定的,可以理解为:区域中的参考位置是由区域的标识确定的;或者,区域的地理位置可以表示区域的轮廓或区域的范围,此时,可以根据区域的标识确定区域中的参考位置的地理位置,再根据参考位置的地理位置和区域的半径确定区域的范围或轮廓。In one possible implementation, each region includes (or has) a reference location, which may be, for example, the center of the region. For example, the geographic location of a region may refer to the geographic location of the reference location in the region. In this case, the geographic location of the region is determined by the region's identifier, which can be understood as follows: the reference location in the region is determined by the region's identifier. Alternatively, the geographic location of the region may represent the outline of the region or the range of the region. In this case, the geographic location of the reference location in the region may be determined based on the region's identifier, and the range or outline of the region may be determined based on the geographic location of the reference location and the radius of the region.

作为一种可能的实现,区域的参考位置和区域的标识之间的关联关系是根据斐波那契准则确定的,或者说该区域的参考位置和区域的标识之间的关联关系满足斐波那契准则。示例性的,该关联关系存在如下三种实现方式:As a possible implementation, the association relationship between the reference position of the region and the identifier of the region is determined based on the Fibonacci criterion, or in other words, the association relationship between the reference position of the region and the identifier of the region satisfies the Fibonacci criterion. Exemplarily, there are three implementations of this association relationship:

方式一、区域的参考位置的三维坐标和该区域的标识满足如下关系(1):
Method 1: The three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position of the region and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship (1):

其中,i表示区域的标识。Re表示地球半径。[x]表示x的小数部分,如x=2.3,则[x]=0.3。Nspot表示区域总数。RL(i)表示区域中参考位置的三维坐标,该三维坐标是指在三维坐标系中的坐标。示例性的,三维坐标系可以是球面坐标系,如ECEF坐标系。当然,还可以是其他三维坐标系,如大地坐标系(geodetic coordinate system),地心惯性(earth-centered inertial,ECI)坐标系等。Wherein, i represents the identifier of the region. Re represents the radius of the earth. [x] represents the decimal part of x, such as x=2.3, then [x]=0.3. N spot represents the total number of regions. RL(i) represents the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position in the region, and the three-dimensional coordinates refer to the coordinates in the three-dimensional coordinate system. Exemplarily, the three-dimensional coordinate system can be a spherical coordinate system, such as the ECEF coordinate system. Of course, it can also be other three-dimensional coordinate systems, such as the geodetic coordinate system, the earth-centered inertial (ECI) coordinate system, etc.

作为一种示例,该参考位置在单位正方形(Unit Square)上的投影RL(xi,yi)和区域的标识满足如下关系:
RL(xi)=(1-cosθi)/2
As an example, the projection RL(x i ,y i ) of the reference position on the unit square (Unit Square) and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi ) = (1 - cosθi ) / 2

其中,θi可参考上述相关说明。单位正方形指笛卡尔平面中顶点位于(0,0)、(1,0)、(0,1)和(1,1)的正方形。RL(xi)表示参考位置在单位正方形的x轴方向的投影度量,RL(yi)表示参考位置在单位正方形的y轴方向的投影度量。Among them, θ i and Refer to the above explanation. The unit square is the square in the Cartesian plane with vertices at (0,0), (1,0), (0,1), and (1,1). RL( xi ) represents the projection metric of the reference position onto the unit square's x-axis, and RL( yi ) represents the projection metric of the reference position onto the unit square's y-axis.

作为另一种示例,该参考位置在斐波那契网格中的笛卡尔坐标RL(xi,yi)和区域的标识满足如下关系:
RL(xi)=i/Nspot
As another example, the Cartesian coordinates RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position in the Fibonacci grid and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship:
RL( xi )=i/ Nspot

其中,[x]表示x的小数部分。也可以表示为frac(z)表示返回z的小数部分。RL(xi)表示区域的参考位置在笛卡尔坐标系下x轴方向的投影度量,RL(yi)表示区域的参考位置在笛卡尔坐标系下y轴方向的投影度量。示例性的,笛卡尔坐标系指笛卡尔直角坐标系。Where [x] represents the decimal part of x. It can also be expressed as frac(z) returns the fractional part of z. RL( xi ) represents the projection metric of the region's reference position on the x-axis in a Cartesian coordinate system, and RL( y ) represents the projection metric of the region's reference position on the y-axis in a Cartesian coordinate system. For example, the Cartesian coordinate system refers to a rectangular Cartesian coordinate system.

方式二、区域的参考位置的三维坐标和该区域的标识满足如下关系(2):
Method 2: The three-dimensional coordinates of the reference position of the region and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship (2):

其中,各个参数的物理含义可参考上述关系(1)中的相关说明,在此不再赘述。The physical meaning of each parameter can be found in the relevant description in the above relationship (1), which will not be repeated here.

可以理解的,上述关系(1)和关系(2)所示的参考位置的三维坐标均可以等价转换为经纬度位置,本申请对参考位置的具体表现形式不作限定。It can be understood that the three-dimensional coordinates of the reference positions shown in the above relationship (1) and relationship (2) can be equivalently converted into longitude and latitude positions, and this application does not limit the specific form of expression of the reference position.

方式三、区域的参考位置的经纬度坐标和该区域的标识满足如下关系(3):
Method 3: The latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference position of the region and the identifier of the region satisfy the following relationship (3):

其中,RL(i)表示参考位置的经纬度坐标,如lon(i)表示参考位置的经度,lat(i)表示参考位置的纬度。lon(i)和lat(i)的单位为弧度(rad)。Nspot表示区域总数。Where RL(i) represents the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference location, for example, lon(i) represents the longitude of the reference location, and lat(i) represents the latitude of the reference location. The units of lon(i) and lat(i) are radians (rad). N spot represents the total number of spots.

可以理解的,上述关系(3)所示的参考位置的经纬度坐标可以等价转换为三维坐标,本申请对参考位置的具体表现形式不作限定。It can be understood that the latitude and longitude coordinates of the reference position shown in the above relationship (3) can be equivalently converted into three-dimensional coordinates, and this application does not limit the specific form of expression of the reference position.

作为一种可能的实现,区域的半径和区域总数满足如下关系(4):
As a possible implementation, the radius of the region and the total number of regions satisfy the following relationship (4):

其中,Re表示地球半径,Nspot表示区域总数,Rspot表示区域的半径。各个参数的解释可参考前述相关说明,在此不再赘述。Where Re represents the radius of the Earth, Nspot represents the total number of spots, and Rspot represents the radius of a spot. For explanations of each parameter, refer to the previous description and will not be repeated here.

在一种可能的实施方式中,本申请实施例中的区域可以包括第一类区域、第二类区域或第三类区域中的至少一项。其中,第一类区域与广播波束对应,第二类区域与业务波束对应,第三类区域与跟踪区(tracking area,TA)对应。In one possible implementation, the area in the embodiment of the present application may include at least one of a first type area, a second type area, or a third type area. The first type area corresponds to a broadcast beam, the second type area corresponds to a service beam, and the third type area corresponds to a tracking area (TA).

示例性的,第一类区域可以为能够被接入网设备的广播波束服务或覆盖的区域,或者,第一类区域对应广播波束的服务或覆盖情况。广播波束可以用于发送和/或接收广播信息(如系统信息等),广播波束例如可以为SSB波束;广播波束可以为宽波束。Illustratively, the first type of area may be an area that can be served or covered by a broadcast beam of an access network device, or the first type of area corresponds to the service or coverage of a broadcast beam. A broadcast beam may be used to send and/or receive broadcast information (such as system information). The broadcast beam may be, for example, an SSB beam; the broadcast beam may be a wide beam.

第二类区域可以为能够被接入网设备的业务波束服务或覆盖的区域,或者,第二类区域对应业务波束的服务或覆盖情况。业务波束可以用于发送和/或接收业务数据,业务波束可以包括物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel,PDSCH)波束、物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel,PDCCH)波束、信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information-reference signal,CSI-RS)等。业务波束可以为窄波束。The second type of area may be an area that can be served or covered by a service beam of an access network device, or the second type of area corresponds to the service or coverage of a service beam. A service beam may be used to send and/or receive service data. A service beam may include a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) beam, a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) beam, a channel state information-reference signal (CSI-RS), etc. A service beam may be a narrow beam.

第三类区域能够对应跟踪区的大小信息。例如一个第三类区域可以理解为一个跟踪区。此时,第三类区域的大小即为跟踪区的大小。The third type of area can correspond to the size information of the tracking area. For example, a third type of area can be understood as a tracking area. In this case, the size of the third type of area is the size of the tracking area.

示例性的,第一类区域也可以称为“广播区域”、“广播波位”、“广播地理区域”等,第二类区域也可以称为“业务区域”、“业务波位”、“业务地理区域”等,第三类区域也可以称为“跟踪区波位”等。本申请对三类区域的具体名称不作限定。For example, the first type of area may also be referred to as a "broadcast area," "broadcast waveband," or "broadcast geographic area," the second type of area may also be referred to as a "service area," "service waveband," or "service geographic area," and the third type of area may also be referred to as a "tracking area waveband." This application does not limit the specific names of the three types of areas.

基于上述区域划分方式,一方面,可以根据区域的标识快速、准确地确定区域中参考位置的坐标,从而可以快速、准确地确定区域的轮廓、地理位置等。另一方面,可以灵活调整区域的半径,以适配不同载荷能力,例如适配不同波束半径。再一方面,由于区域的地理位置可以通过区域的标识确定,因此,网络设备和终端设备之间可以基于区域的标识进行信息交互。相比于直接交互波束参考点、波束覆盖区域轮廓等信息,可以显著降低信令开销;相比于基于H3地理网格进行划分的方式,由于区域总数相对较少,因此指示区域标识所需的比特数也较少,从而也可以降低信令开销。Based on the above-mentioned area division method, on the one hand, the coordinates of the reference position in the area can be quickly and accurately determined according to the identification of the area, so that the outline, geographical location, etc. of the area can be quickly and accurately determined. On the other hand, the radius of the area can be flexibly adjusted to adapt to different load capacities, such as adapting to different beam radii. On the other hand, since the geographical location of the area can be determined by the identification of the area, information exchange can be carried out between network equipment and terminal equipment based on the identification of the area. Compared with directly exchanging information such as beam reference points and beam coverage area outlines, signaling overhead can be significantly reduced; compared with the division method based on the H3 geographic grid, since the total number of areas is relatively small, the number of bits required to indicate the area identification is also small, which can also reduce signaling overhead.

2、接入网设备的覆盖区域:2. Coverage area of access network equipment:

接入网设备的覆盖区域可以指接入网设备能够覆盖的最大区域,或者说,接入网设备的覆盖区域指示(或体现)接入网设备的最大覆盖能力。The coverage area of an access network device may refer to the maximum area that the access network device can cover, or in other words, the coverage area of the access network device indicates (or reflects) the maximum coverage capability of the access network device.

在接入网设备部署于卫星或空中平台的情况下,接入网设备的覆盖区域随接入网设备的运动而变化,即不同时刻接入网设备的覆盖区域可能不同。接入网设备的覆盖区域包括至少一个上述区域(即波位)。When the access network equipment is deployed on a satellite or aerial platform, the coverage area of the access network equipment changes with the movement of the access network equipment, that is, the coverage area of the access network equipment may be different at different times. The coverage area of the access network equipment includes at least one of the above-mentioned areas (i.e., wavebands).

由于接入网设备的覆盖区域随接入网设备的运动而变化,而区域(波位)是相对地球固定的,因此,不同时刻接入网设备的覆盖区域包括的波位可能不同。Since the coverage area of the access network device changes with the movement of the access network device, and the area (wavelength) is fixed relative to the earth, the wavelength included in the coverage area of the access network device may be different at different times.

示例性的,以区域的形状为正六边形为例,如图12所示,椭圆形的实线可以表示接入网设备的覆盖区域。椭圆形实线中的所有正六边形表示的区域为接入网设备的覆盖区域所包括的区域。For example, taking the shape of a regular hexagon as an example, as shown in Figure 12, the elliptical solid line can represent the coverage area of the access network device. The areas represented by all regular hexagons in the elliptical solid line are the areas included in the coverage area of the access network device.

3、接入网设备的服务区域:3. Service area of access network equipment:

接入网设备的服务区域可以指接入网设备的波束能够服务(或覆盖)的最大区域,或者说,接入网设备的服务区域指示(或体现)接入网设备的最大服务能力。The service area of an access network device may refer to the maximum area that a beam of the access network device can serve (or cover), or in other words, the service area of the access network device indicates (or reflects) the maximum service capability of the access network device.

接入网设备的服务区域小于或等于接入网设备的覆盖区域。示例性的,基于图12所示的示例,接入网设备的服务区域可以为椭圆形实线表示的范围,此时,接入网设备的服务区域等于第一接入网设备的覆盖区域;或者,接入网设备的服务区域也可以小于椭圆形实线表示的范围。The service area of the access network device is smaller than or equal to the coverage area of the access network device. For example, based on the example shown in FIG12 , the service area of the access network device may be the range indicated by the solid ellipse, in which case the service area of the access network device is equal to the coverage area of the first access network device; alternatively, the service area of the access network device may be smaller than the range indicated by the solid ellipse.

在接入网设备部署于卫星或空中平台的情况下,接入网设备的服务区域随接入网设备的运动而变化,即不同时刻接入网设备的服务区域可能不同。接入网设备的服务区域包括至少一个上述区域(即波位)。When an access network device is deployed on a satellite or aerial platform, its service area changes as the device moves. This means the service area may be different at different times. The service area of an access network device includes at least one of the aforementioned areas (i.e., wavebands).

由于接入网设备的服务区域随接入网设备的运动而变化,而区域(波位)是相对地球固定的,因此,不同时刻接入网设备的服务区域包括的波位可能不同。Since the service area of the access network device changes with the movement of the access network device, and the area (wavelength) is fixed relative to the earth, the wavelengths included in the service area of the access network device may be different at different times.

此外,在某一时刻,接入网设备的波束实际上可能服务(或覆盖)该服务区域中的部分区域,在不同时刻,接入网设备的波束可能服务(或覆盖)服务区域中的不同区域。示例性的,如图12中的(a)所示,在时刻T1,接入网设备的波束服务服务区域中的区域x1、x2和x3;如图12中的(b)所示,在时刻T2,接入网设备的波束服务服务区域中的区域y1、y2、y3和y4。In addition, at a certain moment, the beam of the access network device may actually serve (or cover) part of the service area, and at different moments, the beam of the access network device may serve (or cover) different areas in the service area. For example, as shown in (a) of Figure 12, at time T1, the beam of the access network device serves areas x1, x2, and x3 in the service area; as shown in (b) of Figure 12, at time T2, the beam of the access network device serves areas y1, y2, y3, and y4 in the service area.

4、接入网设备的激活区域:4. Activation area of access network equipment:

当前正在被接入网设备的波束服务(或覆盖)的区域可以称为激活区域,或者被激活的区域。当前未被接入网设备的波束服务(或覆盖)的区域可以称为未激活区域,或者未被激活的区域。The area currently being served (or covered) by the beam of the access network device can be called an active area or an activated area. The area currently not being served (or covered) by the beam of the access network device can be called an inactive area or an inactive area.

下面结合上述通信系统,以终端设备和网络设备交互为例,对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行描述。需要说明的是,本申请下述实施例中,终端设备和网络设备之间的消息名称、各参数的名称、或各信息的名称等只是一个示例,在其他的实施例中也可以是其他的名称,本申请所提供的方法对此不作具体限定。The following describes the communication method provided in the embodiments of the present application, taking the interaction between a terminal device and a network device as an example, in conjunction with the above-mentioned communication system. It should be noted that in the following embodiments of the present application, the message names, parameter names, or information names between the terminal device and the network device are merely examples, and other names may be used in other embodiments, and the method provided in the present application does not specifically limit this.

可以理解的,本申请实施例中,终端设备或网络设备可以执行本申请实施例中的部分或全部步骤,这些步骤或操作仅是示例,本申请实施例还可以执行其它操作或者各种操作的变形。此外,各个步骤可以按照本申请实施例呈现的不同的顺序来执行,并且有可能并非要执行本申请实施例中的全部操作。It is understood that in the embodiments of the present application, the terminal device or network device may perform some or all of the steps in the embodiments of the present application. These steps or operations are merely examples, and the embodiments of the present application may also perform other operations or variations of various operations. In addition, the various steps may be performed in a different order than those presented in the embodiments of the present application, and it is possible that not all of the operations in the embodiments of the present application need to be performed.

可以理解的,本申请中是以网络设备和终端设备作为该交互示意的执行主体为例进行示意的,但本申请并不限制交互示意的执行主体。例如,本申请中由网络设备执行的方法,也可以由应用于网络设备的模块(例如芯片、芯片系统、或处理器)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分网络设备功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件来实现;本申请中由终端设备执行的方法,也可以由应用于终端设备的模块(例如芯片、芯片系统、或处理器)执行,还可以由能实现全部或部分终端设备功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件来实现。It is understandable that this application uses network devices and terminal devices as examples to illustrate the execution subjects of the interaction diagram, but this application does not limit the execution subjects of the interaction diagram. For example, the method executed by the network device in this application can also be executed by a module (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor) applied to the network device, and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the network device; the method executed by the terminal device in this application can also be executed by a module (such as a chip, a chip system, or a processor) applied to the terminal device, and can also be implemented by a logical node, a logical module, or software that can realize all or part of the functions of the terminal device.

此外,本申请中“发送信息”可以理解为一个设备向另一个设备发送信息,或者,也可以理解为设备内部的一个逻辑模块向另一个逻辑模块发送信息。例如,“网络设备发送信息”可以理解为网络设备向另一个设备(如终端设备)发送信息,或者,可以理解为网络设备中的逻辑模块1(如处理模块)向网络设备中的逻辑模块2(如收发模块)发送信息。In addition, in this application, "sending information" can be understood as one device sending information to another device, or it can also be understood as one logic module within a device sending information to another logic module. For example, "a network device sending information" can be understood as the network device sending information to another device (such as a terminal device), or it can be understood as logic module 1 (such as a processing module) in the network device sending information to logic module 2 (such as a transceiver module) in the network device.

本申请中“接收信息”可以理解为一个设备接收来自另一个设备的信息,或者,也可以理解为设备内部的一个逻辑模块接收来自另一个逻辑模块的信息。例如,“终端设备接收信息”可以理解为终端设备接收来自另一个设备(如网络设备)的信息,或者,可以理解为终端设备中的逻辑模块1(如处理模块)接收来自终端设备中的逻辑模块2(如收发模块)的信息。In this application, "receiving information" can be understood as one device receiving information from another device, or it can also be understood as a logic module within a device receiving information from another logic module. For example, "a terminal device receiving information" can be understood as the terminal device receiving information from another device (such as a network device), or it can be understood as logic module 1 (such as a processing module) in the terminal device receiving information from logic module 2 (such as a transceiver module) in the terminal device.

本申请中“向…(例如终端设备)发送信息”或者附图中的相关示意可以理解为该信息的目的端是终端设备。可以包括直接或间接的向终端设备发送信息,例如发送端发送信息后,经过中间设备的转发等到达目的端。“从…(例如网络设备)接收信息”或者“接收来自…(例如网络设备)的信息”或者“接收(例如网络设备)发送的信息”,或者附图中的相关示意可以理解为该信息的源端是网络设备,可以包括直接或间接的从网络设备接收信息。信息在信息发送的源端和目的端之间可能会被进行必要的处理,例如格式变化、封装形式变化等,但目的端可以理解来自源端的有效信息。本申请中类似的表述可以做类似的理解,在此不再赘述。In this application, "sending information to... (e.g., a terminal device)" or the related diagrams in the accompanying drawings can be understood as the destination end of the information being the terminal device. This can include sending information to the terminal device directly or indirectly, for example, after the sending end sends the information, it reaches the destination end through forwarding by an intermediate device. "Receiving information from... (e.g., a network device)" or "receiving information from... (e.g., a network device)" or "receiving information sent by (e.g., a network device)", or the related diagrams in the accompanying drawings can be understood as the source end of the information being the network device, which can include receiving information directly or indirectly from the network device. The information may be processed as necessary between the source end and the destination end of the information transmission, such as format changes, encapsulation changes, etc., but the destination end can understand the valid information from the source end. Similar expressions in this application can be understood similarly and will not be repeated here.

下面对本申请实施例提供的通信方法进行介绍。参见图13,为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图,该通信方法可以包括如下步骤:The following describes a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application. Referring to FIG13 , which is a flow chart of a communication method provided in an embodiment of the present application, the communication method may include the following steps:

S1301、第一网络设备获取子区域的配置信息。S1301. A first network device obtains configuration information of a sub-area.

其中,该配置信息指示初始区域和细分等级。该初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定子区域。子区域包含于初始区域中,即子区域可以小于或等于初始区域。The configuration information indicates an initial region and a subdivision level. The initial region, subdivision level, and subregion determination criteria are used to determine a subregion. A subregion is included in the initial region, that is, the subregion can be smaller than or equal to the initial region.

在一种可能的实施方式中,初始区域满足上述介绍的区域的所有特征,例如,初始区域的参考位置是由初始区域的标识确定的,进一步的,初始区域的参考位置还根据以下至少一项确定:初始区域的半径、地球半径或初始区域的总数。初始区域的总数可以理解为在地球上离散出的初始区域的总数,可参考上述对区域的相关说明,在此不再赘述。In one possible implementation, the initial region meets all the characteristics of the region described above. For example, the reference position of the initial region is determined by an identifier of the initial region. Furthermore, the reference position of the initial region is determined based on at least one of the following: the radius of the initial region, the radius of the Earth, or the total number of initial regions. The total number of initial regions can be understood as the total number of initial regions discretely defined on the Earth. For details on regions, refer to the above description and are not further elaborated here.

示例性的,如图14所示,为初始区域的总数等于197时,按照上述区域离散方式离散出的初始区域的分布示意图;如图15所示,为初始区域的总数等于78702时,按照上述区域离散方式离散出的初始区域的分布示意图。其中,圆圈表示初始区域的参考位置,以参考位置为中心的多边形表示初始区域的形状。For example, Figure 14 shows the distribution of initial regions discretized using the above discretization method when the total number of initial regions is 197. Figure 15 shows the distribution of initial regions discretized using the above discretization method when the total number of initial regions is 78,702. The circles represent the reference positions of the initial regions, and the polygons centered at the reference positions represent the shapes of the initial regions.

作为一种可能的实现,配置信息指示初始区域可以包括:配置信息指示初始区域的半径Rspot和/或初始区域的总数NspotAs a possible implementation, the configuration information indicating the initial area may include: the configuration information indicating a radius R spot of the initial area and/or a total number N spot of the initial areas.

示例性的,在初始区域的总数已知的情况下,即可获知初始区域的标识,例如初始区域的标识属于0,1,…,Nspot-1或1,2,…,Nspot,基于各个初始区域的标识即可获知各个初始区域的参考位置,例如初始区域的标识及其参考位置满足上述关系(1)至关系(3)中的一种,从而可以获知Nspot个初始区域的地理位置,即获知初始区域的分布。Exemplarily, when the total number of initial areas is known, the identification of the initial areas can be obtained, for example, the identification of the initial areas belongs to 0, 1, ..., N spot -1 or 1, 2, ..., N spot . Based on the identification of each initial area, the reference position of each initial area can be obtained, for example, the identification of the initial area and its reference position satisfy one of the above-mentioned relationships (1) to (3), so that the geographical locations of N spot initial areas can be known, that is, the distribution of the initial areas can be known.

此外,在初始区域的半径已知的情况下,可以根据初始区域的半径和初始区域总数的关系,例如上述关系(4),确定初始区域的总数,再根据初始区域的标识确定各个初始区域的参考位置,从而确定初始区域的分布。In addition, when the radius of the initial area is known, the total number of initial areas can be determined based on the relationship between the radius of the initial area and the total number of initial areas, such as the above relationship (4), and then the reference position of each initial area can be determined based on the identification of the initial area, thereby determining the distribution of the initial areas.

示例性的,配置信息可以包括初始区域的总数Nspot和/或初始区域的半径Rspot的具体取值。或者,协议可以预先定义多种初始区域总数,或第一网络设备和终端设备可以预先协商多种初始区域总数,例如,第一网络设备可以通过RRC信令向终端设备预配置多种初始区域总数。该场景下,配置信息可以包括初始区域总数索引,该初始区域总数索引对应多种初始区域总数中的一种,例如,初始区域总数索引可以承载于媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)控制元素(control element,CE)或下行控制信息(downlink control information,DCI)中。例如,共定义N个初始区域总数,配置信息可以包括索引n,n∈1,2,…,N,则配置信息指示的初始区域总数即为N个初始区域总数中的第n个初始区域总数。Exemplarily, the configuration information may include the total number of initial areas N spot and/or the specific value of the radius R spot of the initial area. Alternatively, the protocol may predefine multiple total numbers of initial areas, or the first network device and the terminal device may pre-negotiate multiple total numbers of initial areas. For example, the first network device may pre-configure multiple total numbers of initial areas to the terminal device through RRC signaling. In this scenario, the configuration information may include an initial area total number index, which corresponds to one of the multiple initial area total numbers. For example, the initial area total number index may be carried in a media access control (MAC) control element (CE) or downlink control information (DCI). For example, a total number of N initial areas is defined, and the configuration information may include an index n, n∈1,2,…,N, then the total number of initial areas indicated by the configuration information is the nth total number of initial areas among the N total numbers of initial areas.

在一种可能的实施方式中,细分等级可以为0或正整数。细分等级越大,子区域数目越多,例如,子区域总数可以为4LNspot。其中,L表示细分等级,Nspot表示初始区域的总数。In a possible implementation, the subdivision level may be 0 or a positive integer. A higher subdivision level means a greater number of sub-areas. For example, the total number of sub-areas may be 4 L N spot , where L represents the subdivision level and N spot represents the total number of initial areas.

可以理解的,细分等级为0的情况下,可以表示未对初始区域进行细分,或者表示子区域和初始区域相同。It can be understood that when the subdivision level is 0, it may indicate that the initial area has not been subdivided, or that the sub-area is the same as the initial area.

在一种可能的实施方式中,子区域确定准则包括:子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影是根据细分等级确定的;子区域的参考位置是根据子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影确定的。进一步的,子区域的参考位置是根据子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影和初始区域的总数确定的。即可以先根据细分等级确定子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影,再根据子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影和初始区域的总数确定子区域的参考位置。In one possible implementation, the sub-region determination criteria include: the projection of the sub-region's reference position on a unit square is determined based on the subdivision level; and the sub-region's reference position is determined based on the projection of the sub-region's reference position on the unit square. Furthermore, the sub-region's reference position is determined based on the projection of the sub-region's reference position on the unit square and the total number of initial regions. That is, the projection of the sub-region's reference position on a unit square can be first determined based on the subdivision level, and then the sub-region's reference position is determined based on the projection of the sub-region's reference position on the unit square and the total number of initial regions.

示例性的,子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影RL(xi,yi)满足如下关系:
Exemplarily, the projection RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square satisfies the following relationship:

其中,i表示子区域的标识,L表示细分等级,Nspot表示初始区域的总数。此外,各个子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影满足如下递推关系:
RL(xi,yi)=FiRL(x1,y1)+FiRL(x0,y0)
Where i represents the identifier of the subregion, L represents the subdivision level, and N spots represents the total number of initial regions. In addition, the projection of the reference position of each subregion on the unit square satisfies the following recursive relationship:
RL(x i ,y i )=F i RL(x 1 ,y 1 )+F i RL(x 0 ,y 0 )

从而,网络设备或终端设备也可以先计算子区域0和子区域1的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影,进而基于该递推关系确定子区域2至4LNspot-1的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影。Therefore, the network device or terminal device may first calculate the projections of the reference positions of sub-area 0 and sub-area 1 on the unit square, and then determine the projections of the reference positions of sub-areas 2 to 4 L N spot -1 on the unit square based on the recursive relationship.

示例性的,确定子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影后,可以将RL(xi,yi)分别带入如下等式的左边,以确定θi
RL(xi)=(1-cosθi)/2
For example, after determining the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square, RL( xi , yi ) can be substituted into the left side of the following equations to determine θi and
RL( xi ) = (1 - cosθi ) / 2

确定θi后,可以将θi带入上述关系(1),即带入即可得到子区域的参考位置RL(i)。由于i∈{0,…,4LNspot-1},即i与细分等级相关,因此子区域的参考位置也可以记为RL(i,L)。Determine θ i and After that, θ i and Substitute the above relationship (1), that is, substitute The reference position RL(i) of the sub-region can be obtained. Since i∈{0,…,4 L N spot -1}, that is, i is related to the subdivision level, the reference position of the sub-region can also be recorded as RL(i,L).

可以理解的,在i∈{0,…,Nspot-1}时,子区域的索引和初始区域的索引相同,同一索引对应的子区域的参考位置和初始区域的参考位置相同,此时也可以按照上述关系1确定子区域0至Nspot-1的参考位置。但是在细分等级不为0的情况下,同一索引对应的子区域的大小和初始区域的大小不同,该索引对应的子区域包括该索引对应的初始区域中的部分区域。It is understandable that when i∈{0,…,N spot -1}, the sub-region index is the same as the initial region index, and the reference position of the sub-region corresponding to the same index is the same as the reference position of the initial region. In this case, the reference positions of sub-regions 0 to N spot -1 can also be determined according to the above relationship 1. However, when the subdivision level is not 0, the size of the sub-region corresponding to the same index is different from the size of the initial region, and the sub-region corresponding to the index includes part of the area in the initial region corresponding to the index.

示例性的,以初始区域的总数Nspot=64为例,如图16所示,(a)为初始区域的参考位置示意图,(b)为细分等级L=1时的子区域的参考位置示意图,(c)为细分等级L=2时的子区域的参考位置示意图。其中,(a)中的黑色实心圆表示初始区域的参考位置,或表示细分等级为0时的子区域的参考位置,(b)中的黑色空心圆表示在(a)的基础上新增的子区域的参考位置,(c)中的灰色实心圆表示在(b)的基础上新增的子区域的参考位置。For example, taking the total number of initial areas N spot = 64 as an example, as shown in Figure 16, (a) is a schematic diagram of the reference position of the initial area, (b) is a schematic diagram of the reference position of the sub-area when the subdivision level L = 1, and (c) is a schematic diagram of the reference position of the sub-area when the subdivision level L = 2. The black solid circle in (a) represents the reference position of the initial area, or the reference position of the sub-area when the subdivision level is 0, the black hollow circle in (b) represents the reference position of the sub-area newly added based on (a), and the gray solid circle in (c) represents the reference position of the sub-area newly added based on (b).

在一种可能的实施方式中,初始区域可以包括第一类区域、第二类区域或第三类区域中的至少一项,可参考前述相关说明,在此不再赘述。相应的,配置信息可以指示以下至少一项:第一类区域的半径和/或总数、第二类区域的半径和/或总数、或第三类区域的半径和/或总数。In one possible implementation, the initial area may include at least one of the first, second, or third categories of areas. For details, refer to the aforementioned description and are not further described here. Accordingly, the configuration information may indicate at least one of the following: the radius and/or total number of first category areas, the radius and/or total number of second category areas, or the radius and/or total number of third category areas.

示例性的,三类区域的半径或总数可以相同,此时,配置信息可以配置一个半径或总数;或者,三类区域的半径或总数互不相同,此时,配置信息可以分别为三类区域配置半径和/或总数;或者,三类区域中存在两类区域的半径或总数相同,另一类区域的半径或总数与其不同,则配置信息可以配置两套半径或总数。For example, the radius or total number of the three types of areas may be the same, in which case the configuration information may configure one radius or total number; or the radius or total number of the three types of areas may be different from each other, in which case the configuration information may configure the radius and/or total number for each of the three types of areas respectively; or, if the radius or total number of two types of areas among the three types of areas is the same, and the radius or total number of the other type of areas is different from it, then the configuration information may configure two sets of radius or total numbers.

在一种可能的实施方式中,子区域可以包括第一类子区域、第二类子区域或第三类子区域中的至少一项。第一类子区域与广播波束对应,第一类子区域为第一类区域的子区域;第二类子区域与业务波束对应,第二类子区域为第二类区域的子区域;第三类子区域与跟踪区对应,第三类子区域为第二类区域的子区域。In one possible implementation, the sub-area may include at least one of a first-category sub-area, a second-category sub-area, or a third-category sub-area. The first-category sub-area corresponds to a broadcast beam and is a sub-area of the first-category area; the second-category sub-area corresponds to a service beam and is a sub-area of the second-category area; and the third-category sub-area corresponds to a tracking area and is a sub-area of the second-category area.

作为一种可能的实现,配置信息指示的细分等级可以包括第一类子区域对应的细分等级(记为第一细分等级)、第二类子区域对应的细分等级(记为第二细分等级)、或第三类细分等级(记为第三细分等级)。As a possible implementation, the subdivision level indicated by the configuration information may include the subdivision level corresponding to the first type of sub-area (recorded as the first subdivision level), the subdivision level corresponding to the second type of sub-area (recorded as the second subdivision level), or the third type of subdivision level (recorded as the third subdivision level).

可选的,第一类区域、第一细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定第一类子区域;第二类区域、第二细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定第二类子区域;第三类区域、第三细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定第三类子区域。可参考前述根据初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则确定子区域的说明,在此不再赘述。Optionally, the first type of area, the first subdivision level, and the sub-area determination criteria are used to determine the first type of sub-area; the second type of area, the second subdivision level, and the sub-area determination criteria are used to determine the second type of sub-area; and the third type of area, the third subdivision level, and the sub-area determination criteria are used to determine the third type of sub-area. Reference is made to the aforementioned description of determining sub-areas based on the initial area, subdivision level, and sub-area determination criteria, and will not be repeated here.

作为另一种可能的实现,配置信息指示的细分等级可以包括多个网络设备分别对应的细分等级。该多个网络设备中可以包括第一网络设备。该多个网络设备可以包括不同类型的接入网设备,例如包括部署于卫星的接入网设备、部署于空中平台的接入网设备、地面基站等。不同类型的接入网设备对应的细分等级可以不同。As another possible implementation, the subdivision level indicated by the configuration information may include subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices. The multiple network devices may include the first network device. The multiple network devices may include different types of access network devices, such as access network devices deployed on satellites, access network devices deployed on aerial platforms, and ground base stations. Different types of access network devices may correspond to different subdivision levels.

作为一种示例,接入网设备对应的细分等级可以与位置或角度信息关联。角度信息可以为波束张角、终端设备的仰角、天线张角等。As an example, the subdivision level corresponding to the access network device may be associated with location or angle information. The angle information may be beam angle, elevation angle of the terminal device, antenna angle, etc.

例如,细分等级与波束张角之间的关联关系可以如表1所示。For example, the correlation between the subdivision level and the beam angle may be as shown in Table 1.

表1
Table 1

又例如,星下点附近和卫星边缘点附近可以采用不同的细分等级。如星下点附近采用细分等级Lx,卫星边缘点附近采用细分等级Ly。在不同位置采用不同的细分等级可以用于动态调整参考位置之间的距离。如图17所示,参考位置1和参考位置2-6可以是基于不同细分等级确定的参考位置。通过不同细分等级,可以适配不同角度(如仰角或者天线张角)下小区覆盖范围不同的情形,提升移动性管理的效率。For another example, different subdivision levels can be used near the sub-satellite point and near the satellite edge point. For example, subdivision level Lx is used near the sub-satellite point, and subdivision level Ly is used near the satellite edge point. Using different subdivision levels at different locations can be used to dynamically adjust the distance between reference positions. As shown in Figure 17, reference position 1 and reference positions 2-6 can be reference positions determined based on different subdivision levels. Through different subdivision levels, different cell coverage ranges at different angles (such as elevation angle or antenna angle) can be adapted to improve the efficiency of mobility management.

在一种可能的实施方式中,配置信息可以配置多套初始区域信息和细分等级。例如配置初始区域的总数Nspot_1和细分等级L1、初始区域的总数Nspot_2和细分等级L2以及初始区域的总数Nspot_3和细分等级L3。该情况下,第一网络设备还需要向终端设备指示最终使用的配置。In one possible implementation, the configuration information may configure multiple sets of initial area information and subdivision levels. For example, the total number of initial areas, N spot_1 , and subdivision level, L1, the total number of initial areas, N spot_2 , and subdivision level, L2, and the total number of initial areas, N spot_3 , and subdivision level, L3, may be configured. In this case, the first network device may also indicate to the terminal device the configuration to be ultimately used.

在一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备可以是接入网设备或核心网设备。第一网络设备是接入网设备的情况下,第一网络设备可以部署于卫星或空中平台,或者第一网络设备可以是地面基站。第一网络设备是部署于卫星或空中平台的情况下,第一网络设备可以具有部分或全部基站功能,或者第一网络设备可以用于透明转发。In one possible implementation, the first network device may be an access network device or a core network device. If the first network device is an access network device, the first network device may be deployed on a satellite or an aerial platform, or the first network device may be a ground base station. If the first network device is deployed on a satellite or an aerial platform, the first network device may have some or all base station functions, or the first network device may be used for transparent forwarding.

可选的,在第一网络设备部署于卫星或空中平台,且具有部分或全部基站功能,或者第一网络设备为地面基站或核心网设备的情况下,第一网络设备获取子区域的配置信息,可以包括:第一网络设备确定或生成子区域的配置信息。在第一网络设备部署于卫星或空中平台,且用于透明转发的情况下,第一网络设备获取子区域的配置信息,可以包括:第一网络设备接收来自核心网设备或地面基站的子区域的配置信息。Optionally, when the first network device is deployed on a satellite or an aerial platform and has some or all base station functions, or when the first network device is a ground base station or a core network device, the first network device obtaining the sub-area configuration information may include: the first network device determining or generating the sub-area configuration information. When the first network device is deployed on a satellite or an aerial platform and is used for transparent forwarding, the first network device obtaining the sub-area configuration information may include: the first network device receiving the sub-area configuration information from the core network device or the ground base station.

S1302、第一网络设备发送子区域的配置信息。相应的,终端设备接收子区域的配置信息。S1302: The first network device sends sub-area configuration information. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the sub-area configuration information.

在一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备为接入网设备的情况下,第一网络设备可以通过广播的方式发送该配置信息。此时,终端设备可以是接收该配置信息的任意终端设备。或者,第一网络设备可以通过单播方式向终端设备发送该配置信息,例如,第一网络设备通过与该终端设备之间的RRC连接,向该终端设备发送配置信息。In one possible implementation, when the first network device is an access network device, the first network device may send the configuration information via broadcast. In this case, the terminal device may be any terminal device that receives the configuration information. Alternatively, the first network device may send the configuration information to the terminal device via unicast, for example, by sending the configuration information to the terminal device via an RRC connection between the first network device and the terminal device.

在另一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备为核心网设备的情况下,第一网络设备可以通过接入网设备向终端设备发送子区域的配置信息。例如,第一网络设备可以向接入网设备发送该子区域的配置信息,再由接入网设备通过广播或单播的方式发送该配置信息。In another possible implementation, when the first network device is a core network device, the first network device may send the sub-area configuration information to the terminal device via the access network device. For example, the first network device may send the sub-area configuration information to the access network device, and the access network device may then send the configuration information via broadcast or unicast.

在一种可能的实施方式中,终端设备收到子区域的配置信息后,可以基于初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则确定各个子区域的分布情况等。例如,确定各个子区域的参考位置、子区域的拓扑或覆盖情况(如子区域之间的邻接关系)等。存在第三类子区域的情况下,还可以确定第三类子区域对应的跟踪区的大小。In one possible implementation, after receiving the sub-area configuration information, the terminal device may determine the distribution of each sub-area based on the initial area, subdivision level, and sub-area determination criteria. For example, the terminal device may determine the reference location of each sub-area, the sub-area topology or coverage (such as the adjacency relationship between sub-areas), etc. If a third type of sub-area exists, the size of the tracking area corresponding to the third type of sub-area may also be determined.

示例性的,子区域的参考位置的确定方式可参考步骤S1301中的相关说明,子区域的参考位置确定后,即可获知子区域之间的邻接关系。获知第三类子区域的参考位置和半径后,即可获知第三类子区域的大小和地理位置,从而可以将第三类子区域的大小确定为跟踪区的大小。For example, the method for determining the reference position of the sub-area can refer to the relevant description in step S1301. Once the reference position of the sub-area is determined, the adjacency relationship between the sub-areas can be determined. Once the reference position and radius of the third type of sub-area are known, the size and geographic location of the third type of sub-area can be known, and the size of the third type of sub-area can be determined as the size of the tracking area.

S1303、终端设备根据子区域的配置信息进行通信。S1303. The terminal device communicates according to the configuration information of the sub-area.

示例性的,终端设备根据子区域的配置信息进行通信,也可以理解为终端设备使用子区域的配置信息辅助通信。通信可以包括初始接入、波束管理、移动性管理或跟踪区更新中的至少一项。Exemplarily, the terminal device communicates according to the configuration information of the sub-area, which can also be understood as the terminal device using the configuration information of the sub-area to assist in communication. The communication may include at least one of initial access, beam management, mobility management, or tracking area update.

在一种可能的实施方式中,如图18所示,终端设备根据子区域的配置信息进行通信可以包括如下步骤S1303a和S1303b:In a possible implementation, as shown in FIG18 , the terminal device communicating according to the sub-area configuration information may include the following steps S1303a and S1303b:

S1303a、终端设备根据终端设备的位置信息和子区域的配置信息确定子区域标识。S1303a. The terminal device determines a sub-area identifier according to the location information of the terminal device and the configuration information of the sub-area.

作为一种可能的实现,终端设备的位置信息可以为终端设备的GNSS位置信息。子区域标识为终端设备所在的子区域的标识。As a possible implementation, the location information of the terminal device may be GNSS location information of the terminal device. The sub-area identifier is an identifier of the sub-area where the terminal device is located.

作为一种可能的实现,终端设备收到子区域的配置信息后,可以基于子区域的配置信息确定各个子区域的标识,例如子区域的标识属于0,1,…,4LNspot-1。基于各个子区域的标识即可获知各个子区域的参考位置,例如子区域的标识及其参考位置满足上述关系(1)至关系(3)中的一种。进而根据终端设备的位置信息获知终端设备与各个子区域的参考位置之间的距离,进而将距离终端设备最近的参考位置所属的子区域确定为终端设备所在的子区域。存在多个子区域的参考位置与终端设备之间的距离相同且最近的情况下,终端设备可以确定上述子区域标识包括该多个子区域的标识。As a possible implementation, after receiving the configuration information of the sub-area, the terminal device can determine the identifier of each sub-area based on the configuration information of the sub-area, for example, the identifier of the sub-area belongs to 0, 1, ..., 4 L N spot -1. Based on the identifier of each sub-area, the reference position of each sub-area can be obtained, for example, the identifier of the sub-area and its reference position satisfy one of the above-mentioned relationships (1) to (3). Then, based on the location information of the terminal device, the distance between the terminal device and the reference position of each sub-area is obtained, and then the sub-area to which the reference position closest to the terminal device belongs is determined as the sub-area where the terminal device is located. In the case where the distance between the reference positions of multiple sub-areas and the terminal device is the same and closest, the terminal device can determine that the above-mentioned sub-area identifier includes the identifiers of the multiple sub-areas.

作为一种可能的实现,初始区域包括第一类区域、第二类区域或第三类区域的情况下,子区域标识可以包括第一子区域的标识、第二子区域的标识或第三子区域的标识中的至少一项。其中,第一子区域为终端设备所在的第一类子区域,第二子区域为终端设备所在的第二类子区域,第三子区域为终端设备所在的第三类子区域。示例性的,终端设备可以基于配置信息确定各类子区域的标识和参考位置,进而根据终端设备的位置信息确定终端设备所在的第一类子区域、第二类子区域或第三类子区域。As a possible implementation, when the initial area includes a first-category area, a second-category area, or a third-category area, the sub-area identifier may include at least one of an identifier of the first sub-area, an identifier of the second sub-area, or an identifier of the third sub-area. The first sub-area is the first-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, the second sub-area is the second-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, and the third sub-area is the third-category sub-area where the terminal device is located. Exemplarily, the terminal device may determine the identifiers and reference locations of various sub-areas based on the configuration information, and then determine the first-category sub-area, the second-category sub-area, or the third-category sub-area where the terminal device is located based on the location information of the terminal device.

作为另一种可能的实现,细分等级包括多个网络设备分别对应的细分等级的情况下,子区域标识可以包括终端设备在各个网络设备分别对应的多个子区域中所在的子区域。例如,细分等级包括第一网络设备、第二网络设备或第三网络设备对应的细分等级中的至少一项的情况下,子区域标识包括第四子区域的标识、第五子区域的标识或第六子区域的标识中的至少一项。其中,第四子区域为终端设备所在的第四类子区域,第五子区域为终端设备所在的第五类子区域,第六子区域为终端设备所在的第六类子区域。As another possible implementation, when the subdivision level includes subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices, the sub-area identifier may include the sub-area where the terminal device is located in the multiple sub-areas corresponding to each network device. For example, when the subdivision level includes at least one of the subdivision levels corresponding to the first network device, the second network device, or the third network device, the sub-area identifier includes at least one of the identifier of the fourth sub-area, the identifier of the fifth sub-area, or the identifier of the sixth sub-area. The fourth sub-area is the fourth type of sub-area where the terminal device is located, the fifth sub-area is the fifth type of sub-area where the terminal device is located, and the sixth sub-area is the sixth type of sub-area where the terminal device is located.

其中,第四类子区域是根据初始区域、第一网络设备对应的细分等级以及子区域确定准则确定的;第五类子区域是根据初始区域、第二网络设备对应的细分等级以及子区域确定准则确定的;第六类子区域是根据初始区域、第三网络设备对应的细分等级以及子区域确定准则确定的。第一网络设备、第二网络设备或第三网络设备的类型可以不同。如三个网络设备分别为部署于卫星的接入网设备、部署于空中平台的接入网设备以及地面基站。The fourth type of sub-area is determined based on the initial area, the subdivision level corresponding to the first network device, and the sub-area determination criteria; the fifth type of sub-area is determined based on the initial area, the subdivision level corresponding to the second network device, and the sub-area determination criteria; and the sixth type of sub-area is determined based on the initial area, the subdivision level corresponding to the third network device, and the sub-area determination criteria. The first network device, the second network device, or the third network device can be of different types. For example, the three network devices may be an access network device deployed on a satellite, an access network device deployed on an aerial platform, and a ground base station.

S1303b、终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信。示例性的,通信可以包括初始接入、波束管理、移动性管理中的一项或多项。S1303b: The terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier. Exemplarily, the communication may include one or more of initial access, beam management, and mobility management.

作为一种可能的实现,若子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识和第二子区域的标识,那么终端设备处于RRC非连接态(如RRC空闲态或RRC去激活态)的情况下,终端设备根据第第一子区域的标识进行通信;终端设备处于RRC连接态的情况下,终端设备根据第二子区域的标识进行通信。As a possible implementation, if the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area and the identifier of the second sub-area, then when the terminal device is in an RRC non-connected state (such as an RRC idle state or an RRC deactivated state), the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the first sub-area; when the terminal device is in an RRC connected state, the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the second sub-area.

作为一种可能的实现,终端设备进行通信,可以包括:终端设备接入网络设备(如发起随机接入),或终端设备和网络设备之间进行信息和/或数据传输。示例性的,终端设备处于RRC非连接态的情况下,终端设备接入网络设备;终端设备处于RRC连接态的情况下,终端设备和网络设备之间进行信息和/或数据传输。As a possible implementation, the terminal device communicating may include: the terminal device accessing the network device (such as initiating random access), or information and/or data transmission between the terminal device and the network device. Exemplarily, when the terminal device is in an RRC non-connected state, the terminal device accesses the network device; when the terminal device is in an RRC connected state, information and/or data transmission is performed between the terminal device and the network device.

在另一种可能的实施方式中,如图18所示,终端设备根据子区域的配置信息进行通信可以包括如下步骤S1303c:In another possible implementation, as shown in FIG18 , the terminal device communicating according to the sub-area configuration information may include the following step S1303c:

S1303c、终端设备根据子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新。步骤S1303c的具体实现将在后续实施例中进行详细说明,此处不予赘述。S1303c: The terminal device updates the tracking area according to the configuration information of the sub-area. The specific implementation of step S1303c will be described in detail in subsequent embodiments and will not be repeated here.

基于上述方案,可以先将地面离散为一些初始区域,再基于初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则确定包含于初始区域中的子区域,使得网络侧和终端设备可以基于子区域标识进行通信。例如,网络侧可以通过子区域标识向终端设备指示其覆盖区域或服务区域,或者通过子区域标识配置参考子区域等。相比于网络侧通过显性方式向终端设备指示其覆盖区域(如指示经纬度、波束指向和张角等),可以显著降低信令开销。Based on the above scheme, the ground can be discretized into some initial areas first, and then the sub-areas included in the initial area can be determined based on the initial area, the subdivision level and the sub-area determination criteria, so that the network side and the terminal device can communicate based on the sub-area identifier. For example, the network side can indicate its coverage area or service area to the terminal device through the sub-area identifier, or configure a reference sub-area through the sub-area identifier. Compared with the network side indicating its coverage area to the terminal device in an explicit manner (such as indicating longitude and latitude, beam pointing and angle, etc.), the signaling overhead can be significantly reduced.

此外,本申请的方案可以基于细分等级对初始区域进行进一步细分,使得网络侧能够基于实际应用灵活确定细分等级,从而灵活确定子区域的数目以及大小,提升通信的灵活性。再者,由于采用细分等级对初始区域进行划分,而初始区域通常是固定的,因此,可以认为本申请提供了统一的子区域划分方式(即对固定的初始区域进行划分),从而使得网络节点能够识别各种细分等级下的子区域,并获取不同子区域的邻接关系,减少网络位置管理的复杂度,实现基于区域的业务特性聚合分析,进而提升通信性能。In addition, the solution of the present application can further subdivide the initial area based on the subdivision level, so that the network side can flexibly determine the subdivision level based on actual application, thereby flexibly determining the number and size of sub-areas, thereby improving the flexibility of communication. Furthermore, since the initial area is divided by subdivision level, and the initial area is usually fixed, it can be considered that the present application provides a unified sub-area division method (i.e., dividing the fixed initial area), so that network nodes can identify sub-areas at various subdivision levels and obtain the adjacency relationship between different sub-areas, reducing the complexity of network location management, realizing area-based service characteristic aggregation analysis, and thus improving communication performance.

以上对本申请实施例提供的通信方法的整体流程进行了说明,下面对上述步骤S1303b和S1303c的实现进行详细介绍。示例性的,步骤S1303b可以通过如下八种方式实现:The above describes the overall process of the communication method provided in the embodiment of the present application. The implementation of the above steps S1303b and S1303c is described in detail below. For example, step S1303b can be implemented in the following eight ways:

方式一、子区域包括第一类子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,如图19所示,终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:Mode 1: When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG19 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:

S130311、终端设备根据第一子区域的标识,确定第一子区域对应的第一接入信息。S130311. The terminal device determines first access information corresponding to the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area.

在一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备还发送第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息。第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息可以和子区域的配置信息携带在同一条消息中,此时,第一接入信息可以包含于子区域的配置信息中,也可以不包含于子区域的配置信息中;或者,第一接入信息可以和子区域的配置信息在不同消息中。示例性的,第一网络设备发送的是第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域内的每个第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,或者,第一网络设备发送的是第一网络设备的被激活的每个第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息。In a possible implementation, the first network device also sends first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area. The first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area can be carried in the same message as the configuration information of the sub-area. In this case, the first access information can be included in the configuration information of the sub-area or not; or, the first access information and the configuration information of the sub-area can be in different messages. Exemplarily, the first network device sends the first access information corresponding to each first type of sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device, or the first network device sends the first access information corresponding to each activated first type of sub-area of the first network device.

其中,第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息用于该第一类子区域中的终端设备接入第一网络设备。示例性的,第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息包括以下至少一项:随机接入时机(RACH occasion,RO)、随机接入前导码、定时提前(timing advance,TA)或第一时间段。The first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access the first network device. Exemplarily, the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area includes at least one of the following: a random access occasion (RACH occasion, RO), a random access preamble, a timing advance (TA), or a first time period.

示例性的,RO指示随机接入信道(random access channel,RACH)占用的时域和/或频域资源。第一时间段为第一网络设备的波束服务该第一类子区域的时间段,或者,第一时间段为允许接入第一网络设备的时间段,或者,第一时间段为RO、随机接入前导、TA的生效时间段。Exemplarily, the RO indicates time domain and/or frequency domain resources occupied by a random access channel (RACH). The first time period is a time period during which a beam of the first network device serves the first type of sub-area, or the first time period is a time period during which access to the first network device is allowed, or the first time period is a time period during which the RO, random access preamble, and TA are valid.

可选的,第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中不同的第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息可以相同,也可以不同;第一网络设备的被激活的不同第一类子区域对应的接入信息可以相同,也可以不同。本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the first access information corresponding to different first-type sub-areas in the coverage area or service area of the first network device may be the same or different; the access information corresponding to different activated first-type sub-areas of the first network device may be the same or different. This application does not make specific limitations on this.

基于上述实施方式,终端设备收到第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息后,可以根据第一子区域的标识进行查找,该第一子区域的标识对应的第一接入信息即为第一子区域对应的第一接入信息。Based on the above implementation, after receiving the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, the terminal device can search according to the identifier of the first sub-area. The first access information corresponding to the identifier of the first sub-area is the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

S130312、终端设备根据第一子区域对应的第一接入信息,接入第一网络设备。S130312. The terminal device accesses the first network device according to the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

在一种可能的实施方式中,接入第一网络设备,可以包括:向第一网络设备发起随机接入,或者发起随机接入以接入第一网络设备。示例性的,终端设备可以在第一时间段内,在第一子区域对应的第一接入信息指示的RO上,向第一网络设备发送随机接入前导。In one possible implementation, accessing the first network device may include: initiating random access to the first network device, or initiating random access to access the first network device. Exemplarily, the terminal device may send a random access preamble to the first network device on the RO indicated by the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area within the first time period.

基于上述方式一,由于第一网络设备可以指示第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,使得第一类子区域中的终端设备可以根据第一接入信息接入第一网络设备。从而,第一网络设备可以为不同的第一类子区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同第一类子区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入第一网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on the above-described first approach, since the first network device can indicate the first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, terminal devices in the first type of sub-area can access the first network device based on the first access information. Thus, the first network device can indicate different random access resources for different first type sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different first type sub-areas to access the first network device using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions when terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.

在一种可能的实施方式中,子区域的配置信息配置的细分等级包括多个网络设备分别对应的细分等级的情况下,第一网络设备还可以发送各个网络设备分别对应的接入信息。示例性的,基于上述步骤S1303a中的示例,第一网络设备可以发送第一网络设备对应的第四子区域的接入信息、第二网络设备对应的第五子区域的接入信息或第三网络设备对应的第六子区域的接入信息中的至少一项。终端设备接入各个网络设备分别对应的接入信息后,可以基于某个网络设备对应的接入信息,接入该网络设备。In one possible implementation, if the subdivision level configured in the sub-area configuration information includes subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices, the first network device may also send access information corresponding to each network device. For example, based on the example in step S1303a above, the first network device may send at least one of the following: access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area of the first network device, access information corresponding to the fifth sub-area of the second network device, or access information corresponding to the sixth sub-area of the third network device. After the terminal device accesses the access information corresponding to each network device, it may access a network device based on the access information corresponding to that network device.

方式二、子区域包括第二类子区域,子区域标识包括第二子区域的标识的情况下,如图20所示,终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:Mode 2: When the sub-area includes the second type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the second sub-area, as shown in FIG20 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:

S130321、终端设备根据第二子区域的标识,确定第二子区域对应的通信资源。S130321. The terminal device determines the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area according to the identifier of the second sub-area.

在一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备还发送第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息。第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息可以和子区域的配置信息携带在同一条消息中,或者,也可以携带在不同消息中。示例性的,第一网络设备发送第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域内的每个第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息,或者,第一网络设备的被激活的每个第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息。In one possible implementation, the first network device also sends communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area. The communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area can be carried in the same message as the sub-area configuration information, or can be carried in different messages. Exemplarily, the first network device sends the communication resource information corresponding to each second-type sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device, or the communication resource information corresponding to each activated second-type sub-area of the first network device.

其中,第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息指示的通信资源用于该第二类子区域中的终端设备进行信息传输。示例性的,第二类子区域对应的通信资源包括以下至少一项:频域资源、极化方式或第二时间段。The communication resources indicated by the communication resource information corresponding to the second type of sub-area are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second type of sub-area. Exemplarily, the communication resources corresponding to the second type of sub-area include at least one of the following: frequency domain resources, polarization mode, or second time period.

示例性的,第二时间段为第一网络设备的波束服务第二类子区域的时间段,或者,第二时间段为该频域资源的可用时间段,或者,第二时间段为该频域资源的生效时间段。Exemplarily, the second time period is the time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the second type of sub-area, or the second time period is the available time period of the frequency domain resource, or the second time period is the effective time period of the frequency domain resource.

可选的,第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息也可以理解为第二类子区域对应的部分带宽(bandwidth part,BWP)信息。此时,频域资源可以理解为BWP的频率,如BWP的中心频率等。Optionally, the communication resource information corresponding to the second type of sub-area can also be understood as the bandwidth part (BWP) information corresponding to the second type of sub-area. In this case, the frequency domain resource can be understood as the frequency of the BWP, such as the center frequency of the BWP.

可选的,第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中不同的第二类子区域对应的通信资源可以相同,也可以不同;第一网络设备的被激活的不同第二类子区域对应的通信资源可以相同,也可以不同。本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, the communication resources corresponding to different second-type sub-areas in the coverage area or service area of the first network device may be the same or different; the communication resources corresponding to different activated second-type sub-areas of the first network device may be the same or different. This application does not impose any specific limitation on this.

基于上述实施方式,终端设备收到第二类子区域的通信资源信息后,可以根据第二子区域的标识进行查找,该第二子区域的标识对应的通信资源即为第二子区域对应的通信资源。Based on the above implementation, after receiving the communication resource information of the second type of sub-area, the terminal device can search according to the identifier of the second sub-area. The communication resource corresponding to the identifier of the second sub-area is the communication resource corresponding to the second sub-area.

S130322、终端设备在第二子区域对应的通信资源上发送信息A。相应的,第一网络设备在第二子区域对应的通信资源上接收信息A。其中,信息A指示第二子区域的标识。S130322: The terminal device sends information A on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area. Correspondingly, the first network device receives information A on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area. Information A indicates an identifier of the second sub-area.

示例性的,第一终端设备可以在第二时间段内,在第二子区域对应的频域资源上向第一网络设备发送信息A。Exemplarily, the first terminal device may send information A to the first network device on the frequency domain resources corresponding to the second sub-area within the second time period.

示例性的,信息A可以包括第二子区域的标识。或者,信息A可以包括比特位图,该比特位图中的比特和第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域内的第二类子区域的标识一一对应,终端设备可以将该比特位图中与第二子区域的标识对应的比特位设置为预设值(如“1”或“0”)。即比特位图中被设置为预设值的比特对应的标识即为第二子区域的标识。Exemplarily, information A may include an identifier of the second sub-area. Alternatively, information A may include a bitmap, wherein the bits in the bitmap correspond one-to-one to the identifier of the second type of sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device. The terminal device may set the bit in the bitmap corresponding to the identifier of the second sub-area to a preset value (e.g., "1" or "0"). That is, the identifier corresponding to the bit in the bitmap set to the preset value is the identifier of the second sub-area.

在一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备收到信息A,获知第二子区域的标识后,可以根据第二子区域的标识进行终端设备的位置鉴定。In a possible implementation, after receiving the information A and learning the identifier of the second sub-area, the first network device may perform location identification of the terminal device according to the identifier of the second sub-area.

示例性的,假设终端设备在步骤S130322之前向第一网络设备发送了终端设备的位置(记为位置1)。第一网络设备获知第二子区域的标识后,可以基于上述关系(1)至关系(3)中的一种或多种确定第二子区域的参考位置,再结合第二子区域的半径确定第二子区域的范围。若位置1位于第二子区域内,或者位置1与第二子区域的参考位置之间的距离小于或等于预设阈值,则第一网络设备认为位置1是真实的。For example, it is assumed that the terminal device has sent the location of the terminal device (referred to as location 1) to the first network device before step S130322. After the first network device learns the identifier of the second sub-area, it can determine the reference location of the second sub-area based on one or more of the above relationships (1) to (3), and then determine the range of the second sub-area in combination with the radius of the second sub-area. If location 1 is within the second sub-area, or the distance between location 1 and the reference location of the second sub-area is less than or equal to a preset threshold, the first network device considers location 1 to be true.

在另一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备收到信息A,获知第二子区域的标识后,可以根据第二子区域的标识确定第二子区域的参考位置(记为位置2),再结合第一类子区域的半径、第一类子区域总数,确定位置2所处的第一类子区域,将位置2所处的第一类子区域确定为终端设备所处的第一类子区域(即第一子区域)。即第一网络设备可以根据第二子区域的标识确定终端设备所处的第一类子区域。In another possible implementation, after receiving information A and learning the identifier of the second sub-area, the first network device can determine the reference location of the second sub-area (denoted as location 2) based on the identifier of the second sub-area. Furthermore, combining the radius of the first sub-area and the total number of first sub-areas, the first sub-area in which location 2 is located is determined, and the first sub-area in which location 2 is located is determined as the first sub-area (i.e., the first sub-area) in which the terminal device is located. That is, the first network device can determine the first sub-area in which the terminal device is located based on the identifier of the second sub-area.

在又一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备收到信息A,获知第二子区域的标识后,可以为第二子区域中的终端设备进行测量配置。例如,为第二子区域中的终端设备配置邻区集合1,以便第二子区域中的终端设备测量邻区集合1中的邻区。In another possible implementation, after receiving information A and learning the identifier of the second sub-area, the first network device may perform measurement configuration for the terminal device in the second sub-area. For example, neighboring cell set 1 may be configured for the terminal device in the second sub-area so that the terminal device in the second sub-area can measure neighboring cells in neighboring cell set 1.

可选的,第一网络设备可以为不同第二类子区域配置不同的邻区集合,例如,为第二类子区域1中的终端设备配置邻区集合1,为第二类子区域2中的终端设备配置邻区集合2。基于该实现,相比于为所有终端设备配置较大的邻区集合,例如配置邻区集合1+邻区集合2,能够避免终端设备进行不必要的测量,减少终端设备的测量复杂度,降低终端设备的功耗。Optionally, the first network device may configure different neighboring cell sets for different second-type sub-areas, for example, configuring neighboring cell set 1 for terminal devices in second-type sub-area 1, and configuring neighboring cell set 2 for terminal devices in second-type sub-area 2. Based on this implementation, compared to configuring a larger neighboring cell set for all terminal devices, such as configuring neighboring cell set 1 + neighboring cell set 2, it is possible to avoid unnecessary measurements by the terminal device, reduce the measurement complexity of the terminal device, and reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.

在又一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备收到信息A,获知第二子区域的标识后,可以根据第二子区域的标识进行波束管理。In another possible implementation, after receiving the information A and learning the identifier of the second sub-area, the first network device may perform beam management according to the identifier of the second sub-area.

示例性的,第一网络设备可以根据第二子区域的标识确定终端设备所处的第一类子区域,即确定终端设备处于第一子区域。之后可以向终端设备配置第二子区域的波束和第一子区域的波束满足QCL关系,使得终端设备能够基于第二子区域的波束或第一子区域的波束实现动态、自主的波束调整,相比于传统仅基于信号质量进行波束匹配的方案,可以提高波束匹配的速度和灵活性。For example, the first network device can determine the first type of sub-area in which the terminal device is located based on the identifier of the second sub-area, that is, determine that the terminal device is in the first sub-area. Subsequently, the second sub-area beam and the first sub-area beam can be configured for the terminal device to satisfy the QCL relationship, allowing the terminal device to dynamically and autonomously adjust the beam based on the second sub-area beam or the first sub-area beam. Compared to traditional beam matching solutions based solely on signal quality, this can improve the speed and flexibility of beam matching.

基于上述方式二,由于第一网络设备可以指示第二类子区域的标识及其对应的通信资源,使得第二类子区域中的终端设备可以使用该通信资源和第一网络设备通信。从而,第一网络设备可以为不同的第二类子区域指示不同的通信资源,使得不同第二类子区域中的终端设备可以在不同的资源上和第一网络设备通信,减少资源碰撞,从而提高通信性能。Based on the second approach described above, since the first network device can indicate the identifier of the second-type sub-area and its corresponding communication resource, terminal devices in the second-type sub-area can use this communication resource to communicate with the first network device. Consequently, the first network device can indicate different communication resources for different second-type sub-areas, allowing terminal devices in different second-type sub-areas to communicate with the first network device using different resources, reducing resource collisions and thereby improving communication performance.

在一种可能的实施方式中,子区域的配置信息配置的细分等级包括多个网络设备分别对应的细分等级的情况下,上述步骤S1303b中,终端设备可以指示其所在的各个网络设备对应的子区域的标识。示例性的,基于步骤1303a中的示例,终端设备可以指示第四子区域的标识、第五子区域的标识或第六子区域的标识中的一项或多项。In one possible implementation, if the subdivision levels configured in the sub-area configuration information include subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices, in step S1303b above, the terminal device may indicate the identifiers of the sub-areas corresponding to the respective network devices in which it is located. For example, based on the example in step 1303a, the terminal device may indicate one or more of the identifiers of the fourth sub-area, the fifth sub-area, or the sixth sub-area.

可以理解的,上述方式一和方式二可以单独执行,也可以结合执行,例如,终端设备根据第一子区域的标识接入第一网络设备之后,可以向第一网络设备发送第一信息。It is understandable that the above-mentioned method 1 and method 2 can be executed separately or in combination. For example, after the terminal device accesses the first network device according to the identifier of the first sub-area, it can send the first information to the first network device.

方式三、子区域包括第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识和/或第二子区域的标识的情况下,终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:Mode 3: When the sub-area includes the first sub-area and/or the second sub-area, and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area, the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:

终端设备在第一子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段内,根据第一子区域的标识进行通信,和/或,终端设备在第二子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段内,根据第二子区域的标识进行通信。The terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the first sub-area during the time period when the first sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, and/or the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the second sub-area during the time period when the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device.

在一种可能的实施方式中,第一网络设备可以向终端设备指示第一子区域和/或第二子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段,从而终端设备在该时间段内根据第一子区域的标识和/或第二子区域的标识进行通信。示例性的,第一网络设备可以通过如下几种方式进行指示:In one possible implementation, the first network device may indicate to the terminal device the time period during which the first sub-area and/or the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, so that the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area during the time period. Exemplarily, the first network device may provide the indication in the following ways:

方式1、第一网络设备向终端设备发送信息B和/或信息C。相应的,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的信息B和/或信息C。示例性的,信息B也可以称为第一信息,信息C也可以称为第二信息。Mode 1: The first network device sends information B and/or information C to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives information B and/or information C from the first network device. For example, information B may also be referred to as first information, and information C may also be referred to as second information.

其中,第一信息指示第一子区域集合和/或第二子区域集合。第一子区域集合包括第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中的第一类子区域。第二子区域集合包括第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中的第二类子区域。可以理解的,第一子区域集合中包括第一子区域,第二子区域集合中包括第二子区域。The first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set. The first sub-area set includes a first type of sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device. The second sub-area set includes a second type of sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the first network device. It is understood that the first sub-area set includes the first sub-area, and the second sub-area set includes the second sub-area.

示例性的,信息B可以存在如下两种实现形式:Exemplarily, information B may be implemented in the following two forms:

形式A、信息B包括第一子区域集合中每个第一类子区域的标识,和/或,第二子区域集合中每个第二类子区域的标识。In form A, information B includes an identifier of each first-category sub-region in the first sub-region set, and/or an identifier of each second-category sub-region in the second sub-region set.

示例性的,以第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域包括标识为1至100的第一类子区域,以及包括标识为1至150的第二类子区域为例,信息B可以包括标识{1,2,…,100}和/或标识{1,2,…,150}。For example, taking the example that the coverage area or service area of the first network device includes first-type sub-areas identified from 1 to 100 and second-type sub-areas identified from 1 to 150, information B may include identifiers {1, 2,…, 100} and/or identifiers {1, 2,…, 150}.

形式B、信息B包括第一参考区域的标识和第一门限值,和/或,信息B包括第二参考区域的标识和/或第二门限值。In form B, information B includes an identifier of a first reference area and a first threshold value, and/or information B includes an identifier of a second reference area and/or a second threshold value.

作为第一种可能的实现,第一子区域集合中的每个第一类子区域的参考位置,与第一参考区域的参考位置之间的距离小于或等于第一门限值。第二子区域集合中的每个第二类子区域的参考位置,与第二参考区域的参考位置之间的距离小于或等于第二门限值。As a first possible implementation, a distance between a reference position of each first-category sub-region in the first sub-region set and a reference position of the first reference region is less than or equal to a first threshold value. A distance between a reference position of each second-category sub-region in the second sub-region set and a reference position of the second reference region is less than or equal to a second threshold value.

可选的,终端设备收到信息B后,可以根据第一参考区域的标识(如50)确定第一参考区域的参考位置。之后,终端设备可以遍历第一类子区域标识,计算每个标识对应的参考位置,将对应的参考位置与第一参考区域的参考位置之间的距离小于或等于第一门限值的标识,确定为第一子区域集合中的第一类子区域的标识。终端设备确定第二子区域集合的实现与确定第一子区域集合的实现类似,不予赘述。Optionally, after receiving information B, the terminal device may determine the reference position of the first reference area based on the identifier of the first reference area (such as 50). Thereafter, the terminal device may traverse the first-category sub-area identifiers, calculate the reference position corresponding to each identifier, and determine the identifier whose distance between the corresponding reference position and the reference position of the first reference area is less than or equal to the first threshold value as the identifier of the first-category sub-area in the first sub-area set. The implementation of the terminal device determining the second sub-area set is similar to the implementation of determining the first sub-area set and is not further described.

在一种可能的实施场景下,该第一种可能的实现也可以变形为:信息B包括第一参考区域的标识和第一区域集合中第一类子区域的数目N。此时,第一子区域集合中的第一类子区域包括第一参考区域以及距离第一参考区域最近的N-1个第一类子区域。示例性的,如图21所示,以第一类子区域总数等于197为例,第一子区域集合中的第一类子区域可以为椭圆形实线中的第一类子区域。指示第二子区域集合的方式类似,不再赘述。In one possible implementation scenario, this first possible implementation can also be modified as follows: information B includes the identifier of the first reference area and the number N of first-category sub-areas in the first area set. In this case, the first-category sub-areas in the first sub-area set include the first reference area and the N-1 first-category sub-areas closest to the first reference area. For example, as shown in Figure 21, taking the total number of first-category sub-areas equal to 197, the first-category sub-areas in the first sub-area set can be the first-category sub-areas within the solid ellipse. The method for indicating the second sub-area set is similar and will not be repeated here.

作为第二种可能的实现,第一子区域集合中每个第一类子区域的标识,与第一参考区域的标识之间的差值小于或等于第一门限值。第二子区域集合中每个第二类子区域的标识,与第二参考区域的标识之间的差值小于或等于第二门限值。As a second possible implementation, a difference between the identifier of each first-category sub-region in the first sub-region set and the identifier of the first reference region is less than or equal to a first threshold value. A difference between the identifier of each second-category sub-region in the second sub-region set and the identifier of the second reference region is less than or equal to a second threshold value.

可以理解的是,第二种可能的实现与一种可能的实现中,第一门限值的取值不同,例如,第一种可能的实现中第一门限值为200km,第二种可能的实现中第一门限值为50。同理,两种实现中第二门限的取值可能不同。It is understandable that the first threshold value in the second possible implementation is different from that in the first possible implementation. For example, the first threshold value in the first possible implementation is 200 km, while the first threshold value in the second possible implementation is 50. Similarly, the second threshold value in the two implementations may be different.

可选的,终端设备收到信息B后,可以遍历第一类子区域标识,计算每个标识与第一参考区域的标识之间的差值,将与第一参考区域的标识之间的差值小于或等于第一门限值的标识,确定为第一子区域集合中的第一类子区域的标识。终端设备确定第二子区域集合的实现与确定第一子区域集合的实现类似,不予赘述。Optionally, after receiving information B, the terminal device may traverse the first-category sub-area identifiers, calculate the difference between each identifier and the identifier of the first reference area, and determine the identifier whose difference with the identifier of the first reference area is less than or equal to the first threshold as the identifier of the first-category sub-area in the first sub-area set. The implementation of the terminal device determining the second sub-area set is similar to the implementation of determining the first sub-area set and is not further described.

示例性的,在上述两种可能的实现中,终端设备可以从0至4LNspot-1遍历区域标识。或者,终端设备可以遍历某个标识范围内的标识,例如遍历范围[a-C,a+C]内的区域标识。其中,a表示参考区域的标识,2C可以表示区域集合内的最大区域数。For example, in the two possible implementations described above, the terminal device can traverse area identifiers from 0 to 4 L N spot -1. Alternatively, the terminal device can traverse identifiers within a certain range, such as the range [aC, a+C]. Here, a represents the identifier of the reference area, and 2C can represent the maximum number of areas in the area set.

其中,信息C指示第一子区域集合中,被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,和/或,指示第二子区域集合中,被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域。例如,指示第一子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域为第一类子区域30至第一类子区域50,和/或,指示第二子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域为第二类子区域25至第二类子区域35。The information C indicates the first-type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the first sub-area set, and/or indicates the second-type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the second sub-area set. For example, the first-type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the first sub-area set are first-type sub-areas 30 to first-type sub-areas 50, and/or the second-type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the second sub-area set are second-type sub-areas 25 to second-type sub-areas 35.

示例性的,信息C可以包括第一比特位图和/或第二比特位图。第一比特位图包括N个比特,该N个比特和第一子区域集合中的N个第一类子区域一一对应,N为第一子区域集合中第一类子区域的总数。当第一比特位图中的某个比特被设置为预设值(如“1”或“0”)的情况下,表示该比特对应的第一类子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务。第二比特位图与第二子区域集合对应,第二比特位图的实现可参考第一比特位图的相关说明,在此不再赘述。Exemplarily, the information C may include a first bitmap and/or a second bitmap. The first bitmap includes N bits, and the N bits correspond one-to-one to the N first-class sub-areas in the first sub-area set, where N is the total number of first-class sub-areas in the first sub-area set. When a bit in the first bitmap is set to a preset value (such as "1" or "0"), it indicates that the first-class sub-area corresponding to the bit is served by the beam of the first network device. The second bitmap corresponds to the second sub-area set. The implementation of the second bitmap can refer to the relevant description of the first bitmap and will not be repeated here.

若信息C指示第一子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务,则终端设备根据第一子区域的标识进行通信;若信息C指示第二子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务,则终端设备根据第二子区域的标识进行通信。在第一网络设备的波束服务的子区域发生变化时,第一网络设备可以发送更新后的信息C,更新后的信息C指示第一网络设备的波束最新服务的子区域,终端设备可以基于更新后的信息C确定是否继续基于第一子区域的标识和/或第二子区域的标识进行通信。If information C indicates that the first sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, the terminal device communicates based on the identifier of the first sub-area. If information C indicates that the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, the terminal device communicates based on the identifier of the second sub-area. When the sub-area served by the beam of the first network device changes, the first network device can send updated information C, which indicates the sub-area most recently served by the beam of the first network device. The terminal device can determine whether to continue communicating based on the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area based on the updated information C.

方式2、第一网络设备向终端设备发送信息D。相应的,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的信息D。Mode 2: The first network device sends information D to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the information D from the first network device.

其中,信息D包括被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域的标识,和/或,被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域的标识。可以理解的,该方式2不依赖于信息B。The information D includes the identifier of the first type of sub-area served by the beam of the first network device and/or the identifier of the second type of sub-area served by the beam of the first network device.

可选的,在上述方式1和方式2中,第一网络设备指示的可以是当前时刻被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域的标识,和/或当前时刻被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域的标识。第一网络设备的波束服务第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域的时间段的起始时刻可以为当前时刻,结束时刻可以为下一次收到更新后的信息C或信息D的时刻。Optionally, in the above-mentioned method 1 and method 2, the first network device may indicate an identifier of a first-type sub-area currently served by the beam of the first network device, and/or an identifier of a second-type sub-area currently served by the beam of the first network device. The start time of the time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the first-type sub-area and/or the second-type sub-area may be the current time, and the end time may be the time when the next updated information C or information D is received.

其中,更新后的信息C或信息D指示最新的被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域的标识和/或第二类子区域的标识。The updated information C or information D indicates the latest identifier of the first type of sub-area and/or the identifier of the second type of sub-area served by the beam of the first network device.

方式3、第一网络设备向终端设备发送信息E。相应的,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的信息E。Mode 3: The first network device sends information E to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the information E from the first network device.

其中,信息E指示N个第三时间段和N个第一子区域子集合,和/或,指示M个第四时间段和M个第二子区域子集合。The information E indicates N third time periods and N first sub-region subsets, and/or indicates M fourth time periods and M second sub-region subsets.

其中,第n个第一子区域子集合包括第一子区域集合中,在第n个第三时间段内被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,N为正整数,n=1,2,…,N。即第一网络设备向终端设备指示第一网络设备的波束服务每个第一类子区域的时间段。The nth first sub-area subset includes the first type of sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the nth third time period in the first sub-area set, where N is a positive integer, n=1, 2, …, N. That is, the first network device indicates to the terminal device the time period in which the beam of the first network device serves each first type of sub-area.

其中,第m个第二子区域子集合包括第二子区域集合中,在第m个第四时间段内被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域,M为正整数,m=1,2,…,M。即第一网络设备向终端设备指示第一网络设备的波束服务每个第二类子区域的时间段。The mth second sub-area subset includes the second type sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the mth fourth time period in the second sub-area set, where M is a positive integer, m=1, 2, …, M. That is, the first network device indicates to the terminal device the time period in which the beam of the first network device serves each second type sub-area.

方式4、第一网络设备向终端设备发送进入仰角和离开仰角。相应的,终端设备接收来自第一网络设备的进入仰角和离开仰角。Mode 4: The first network device sends the entry elevation angle and the exit elevation angle to the terminal device. Correspondingly, the terminal device receives the entry elevation angle and the exit elevation angle from the first network device.

其中,进入仰角可以用于确定第一网络设备的波束是否开始服务第一子区域或第二子区域。离开仰角可以用于确定第一网络设备的波束是否已经结束服务第一子区域或第二子区域。The entry elevation angle can be used to determine whether the beam of the first network device starts serving the first sub-area or the second sub-area, and the exit elevation angle can be used to determine whether the beam of the first network device ends serving the first sub-area or the second sub-area.

示例性的,终端设备可以根据进入仰角和离开仰角确定当前时刻第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域。若第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域包括第一子区域,则终端设备在当前时刻根据第一子区域的标识进行通信;若第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域包括第二子区域,则终端设备在当前时刻根据第二子区域的标识进行通信。For example, the terminal device may determine the first sub-area and/or the second sub-area currently served by the beam of the first network device based on the entry elevation angle and the exit elevation angle. If the first sub-area served by the beam of the first network device includes the first sub-area, the terminal device currently communicates based on the identifier of the first sub-area; if the second sub-area served by the beam of the first network device includes the second sub-area, the terminal device currently communicates based on the identifier of the second sub-area.

在该方式三中,终端设备根据第一子区域的标识和/或第二子区域的标识进行通信的具体实现可以参考上述方式一至方式二中的相关说明,在此不再赘述。In this method three, the specific implementation of the terminal device communicating according to the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area can refer to the relevant descriptions in the above methods one to two, and will not be repeated here.

基于上述方式三,第一网络设备能够向终端设备指示第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域,使得终端设备能够在波束服务时间内进行通信,提高通信性能。此外,通过子区域的标识或比特位图即可指示第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域,相比于显性描述第一网络设备的波束服务的地理区域,如通过经纬度等信息描述,可以降低信令开销。Based on the third method described above, the first network device can indicate to the terminal device the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area of the beam service of the first network device, allowing the terminal device to communicate within the beam service time, thereby improving communication performance. In addition, the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area of the beam service of the first network device can be indicated by a sub-area identifier or bitmap, which can reduce signaling overhead compared to explicitly describing the geographical area of the beam service of the first network device, such as through information such as latitude and longitude.

方式四、子区域包括第一类子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,如图22所示,终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:Mode 4: When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG22 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:

S130341、终端设备根据第一子区域的标识确定第一子区域的参考位置。确定方式可参考上述步骤S1301中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。S130341. The terminal device determines a reference position of the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area. The determination method can refer to the relevant description in the above step S1301 and will not be repeated here.

S130342、终端设备根据第一子区域的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及第一仰角,确定第一子区域的剩余服务时间。S130342. The terminal device determines the remaining service time of the first sub-area based on the reference position of the first sub-area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, and the first elevation angle.

作为一种可能的实现,第一仰角为第一子区域对应的最小仰角。在第一子区域对应的仰角大于或等于第一仰角的情况下,第一子区域被第一网络设备覆盖。示例性的,第一子区域对应的仰角可以为第一子区域的参考位置处的仰角。As a possible implementation, the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area. When the elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area is greater than or equal to the first elevation angle, the first sub-area is covered by the first network device. Exemplarily, the elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area can be the elevation angle at a reference position of the first sub-area.

示例性的,对于地球上的某个位置,视线在水平线以上时,在视线所在的垂直平面内,视线与水平线之间的夹角可以理解为仰角。参考位置处的仰角可以理解为参考位置和第一网络设备的位置之间的连线与参考位置处的地平线之间的夹角。通过参考位置处的仰角可以描述第一网络设备经过参考位置上方的位置。例如,参考位置处的仰角为90°,表示第一网络设备位于该参考位置的正上方。如图23中的(a)所示,示出了参考位置位于点P时的仰角;如图23中的(b)所示,示出了参考位置位于点Q时的仰角。For example, for a certain position on the earth, when the line of sight is above the horizontal line, the angle between the line of sight and the horizontal line in the vertical plane where the line of sight is located can be understood as the elevation angle. The elevation angle at the reference position can be understood as the angle between the line between the reference position and the position of the first network device and the horizon at the reference position. The position of the first network device passing above the reference position can be described by the elevation angle at the reference position. For example, the elevation angle at the reference position is 90°, indicating that the first network device is located directly above the reference position. As shown in (a) of Figure 23, the elevation angle when the reference position is at point P is shown; as shown in (b) of Figure 23, the elevation angle when the reference position is at point Q is shown.

作为一种可能的实现,第一网络设备的星历信息描述第一网络设备的随时间而变的位置和速度的表达式。当然,星历信息还可以有其他名称,如轨迹信息、速度轨迹信息等,本申请对此不作具体限定。As a possible implementation, the ephemeris information of the first network device describes an expression of the position and velocity of the first network device over time. Of course, the ephemeris information can also have other names, such as trajectory information, velocity trajectory information, etc., which are not specifically limited in this application.

示例性的,第一子区域的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息、第一仰角γ0、第一子区域的剩余服务时间Tc可以满足如下关系:
Tc=1/w×arccos(cos(γ0)/cos(γm))
Exemplarily, the reference position of the first sub-area, the ephemeris information of the first network device, the first elevation angle γ 0 , and the remaining service time T c of the first sub-area may satisfy the following relationship:
T c =1/w×arccos(cos(γ 0 )/cos(γ m ))

其中,w为第一网络设备在三维坐标系(如地心惯性坐标系ECI)下的角速度,γm可以基于第一子区域的参考位置和第一网络设备的星历信息计算得到。Wherein, w is the angular velocity of the first network device in a three-dimensional coordinate system (such as the Earth-centered inertial coordinate system ECI), and γm can be calculated based on the reference position of the first sub-area and the ephemeris information of the first network device.

S130343、终端设备在第一子区域的剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。S130343. The terminal device starts neighboring cell measurement before the remaining service time of the first sub-area ends.

示例性的,若第一子区域的剩余服务时间的起始时刻为t1,结束时刻为t2,那么,终端设备在t2时刻之前,启动邻区测量。For example, if the starting time of the remaining service time of the first sub-area is t1 and the ending time is t2, then the terminal device starts the neighboring cell measurement before time t2.

作为一种可能的实现,启动邻区测量,也可以理解为执行邻区测量。邻区测量结果可以用于终端设备进行小区重选。As a possible implementation, starting neighbor cell measurement can also be understood as performing neighbor cell measurement. The neighbor cell measurement result can be used by the terminal device for cell reselection.

方式五、子区域包括第一类子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,如图24所示,终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:Mode 5: When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG24 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:

S130351、终端设备根据第一子区域的标识确定第一子区域的参考位置。确定方式可参考上述步骤S1301中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。S130351. The terminal device determines a reference position of the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area. The determination method can refer to the relevant description in the above step S1301 and will not be repeated here.

S130352、终端设备在第一时间窗内对第二网络设备进行邻区测量。S130352. The terminal device performs neighboring area measurement on the second network device within the first time window.

其中,第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移为第一时延和第二时延之差。示例性的,如图25所示,第一时延为第一子区域的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延;第二时延为第一子区域的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。The offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between the first delay and the second delay. For example, as shown in FIG25 , the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference location in the first sub-area and the first network device; the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference location in the first sub-area and the second network device.

示例性的,可以根据第一网络设备的星历信息确定第一网络设备的位置,再确定第一子区域的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延。类似的,可以根据第二网络设备的星历信息确定第二网络设备的位置,再确定第一子区域的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。For example, the position of the first network device can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the first network device, and then the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the first network device can be determined. Similarly, the position of the second network device can be determined based on the ephemeris information of the second network device, and then the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the second network device can be determined.

示例性的,第一子区域的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延等于第一子区域的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的距离除以光速。第一子区域的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延等于第一子区域的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的距离除以光速。Illustratively, the propagation delay between the reference location in the first sub-area and the first network device is equal to the distance between the reference location in the first sub-area and the first network device divided by the speed of light. The propagation delay between the reference location in the first sub-area and the second network device is equal to the distance between the reference location in the first sub-area and the second network device divided by the speed of light.

示例性的,参考时刻和偏移可以为通用协调时(universal time coordinated,UTC),或者,参考时刻和偏移的单位可以为系统帧号、子帧号、时隙号、正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing,OFDM)符号等。参考时刻可以是终端设备自行确定的,或者可以是第一网络设备配置的,不予限制。Exemplarily, the reference time and offset may be universal time coordinated (UTC), or the units of the reference time and offset may be a system frame number, a subframe number, a time slot number, an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbol, etc. The reference time may be determined by the terminal device itself or configured by the first network device, without limitation.

示例性的,第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移也可以称为同步信号块(synchronization signal block,SSB)测量定时配置(SSB measurement timing configuration,SMTC)偏移量(offset)。第一时间窗的结束时刻可以基于网络侧配置的SMTC周期和持续时间确定。For example, the offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time may also be referred to as a synchronization signal block (SSB) measurement timing configuration (SMTC) offset. The end time of the first time window may be determined based on the SMTC period and duration configured on the network side.

在一种可能的实施方式中,上述方式四和方式五可以结合,例如终端设备可以在第一子区域的剩余服务时间结束之前,在第一时间窗内对第二网络设备进行邻区测量。In a possible implementation, the above-mentioned method 4 and method 5 can be combined. For example, the terminal device can perform neighboring area measurement on the second network device within the first time window before the remaining service time of the first sub-area ends.

在一种可能的实施方式中,第一仰角、第一网络设备的星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息可以是第一网络设备向终端设备指示的。例如,第一网络设备还发送信息F,信息F指示第一仰角、第一网络设备的星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息中的至少一项。In one possible implementation, the first elevation angle, the ephemeris information of the first network device, or the ephemeris information of the second network device may be indicated by the first network device to the terminal device. For example, the first network device further sends information F indicating at least one of the first elevation angle, the ephemeris information of the first network device, or the ephemeris information of the second network device.

此外,第一网络设备还可以指示参考子区域的标识。参考区域为第一小区中的一个第一类子区域,或者说为第一小区的覆盖区域或服务区域中的一个第一类子区域。示例性的,参考区域可以为第一小区的小区中心所在的第一类子区域。第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区。该场景下,第一仰角可以为第一小区对应的最小仰角。第一小区的每个第一类子区域的参考位置处的仰角均大于或等于第一仰角。在第一网络设备指示参考子区域的标识的情况下,上述步骤S1303a可以不执行,上述步骤S1303b中,终端设备根据参考子区域的标识进行通信。示例性的,终端设备根据参考子区域的标识进行通信的实现,与终端设备根据第一子区域的标识进行通信的实现类似,可以将上述方式四或方式五中的第一子区域替换为参考子区域理解,在此不再赘述。In addition, the first network device may also indicate the identifier of the reference sub-area. The reference area is a first-class sub-area in the first cell, or a first-class sub-area in the coverage area or service area of the first cell. Exemplarily, the reference area may be the first-class sub-area where the cell center of the first cell is located. The first cell is a cell managed by the first network device. In this scenario, the first elevation angle may be the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell. The elevation angle at the reference position of each first-class sub-area of the first cell is greater than or equal to the first elevation angle. In the case where the first network device indicates the identifier of the reference sub-area, the above-mentioned step S1303a may not be executed, and in the above-mentioned step S1303b, the terminal device communicates according to the identifier of the reference sub-area. Exemplarily, the implementation of the terminal device communicating according to the identifier of the reference sub-area is similar to the implementation of the terminal device communicating according to the identifier of the first sub-area. The first sub-area in the above-mentioned method four or method five may be replaced with the reference sub-area for understanding, and will not be repeated here.

在一种可能的实施方式中,上述方式四中,由于终端设备在第一子区域的剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量,而第一子区域是否被覆盖由网络设备的移动决定,因此,方式四可以适用于由第一网络设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。In one possible implementation, in the above-mentioned method four, since the terminal device starts the neighboring cell measurement before the remaining service time in the first sub-area ends, and whether the first sub-area is covered is determined by the movement of the network device, method four can be applicable to the scenario where the cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.

此外,上述方式五中,终端设备在第一时间窗内进行邻区测量,且第一时间窗的起始时刻与终端设备和网络设备之间的传播时延相关,由于网络设备的移动,在不同时间网络设备可能位于不同位置,从而终端设备和网络设备之间的传播时延随时间变化,因此,方式五也可以适用于由第一网络设备的移动触发小区重选的场景。In addition, in the above-mentioned method five, the terminal device performs neighboring cell measurements within the first time window, and the starting time of the first time window is related to the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device. Due to the movement of the network device, the network device may be located at different positions at different times, so that the propagation delay between the terminal device and the network device changes with time. Therefore, method five can also be applied to the scenario where the cell reselection is triggered by the movement of the first network device.

方式六、子区域包括第一类子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:Mode 6: When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:

第一子区域的参考位置与参考子区域的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第三门限,或者,第一子区域的标识与参考子区域的标识之差大于或等于第四门限的情况下,启动邻区测量。When the distance between the reference position of the first sub-area and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to the third threshold, or the difference between the identifier of the first sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold, the neighboring cell measurement is started.

示例性的,参考子区域可以是第一网络设备配置的。第三门限、第四门限可以是第一网络设备配置的,或者可以是协议定义的,本申请对此不作具体限定。Exemplarily, the reference sub-area may be configured by the first network device. The third threshold and the fourth threshold may be configured by the first network device, or may be defined by a protocol, which is not specifically limited in this application.

方式七、子区域包括第一类子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,如图26所示,终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:Mode 7: When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG26 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:

S130371、终端设备确定至少一个第四子区域的标识中是否包括第一子区域的标识。S130371. The terminal device determines whether the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area.

其中,第四子区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中的第一类子区域,或者说,第四子区域为能够被第一网络设备覆盖或能够被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域。The fourth sub-area is a first type of sub-area in the coverage area or service area of the first network device, or in other words, the fourth sub-area is a first type of sub-area that can be covered by the first network device or can be served by the beam of the first network device.

可以理解的,上述至少一个第四子区域指第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中的部分或全部区域。示例性的,以第一网络设备的覆盖区域包括第一类子区域1至100为例,上述至少一个第四子区域可以为第一类子区域20至30,或者为第一类子区域25-40等,不予限制。It is understood that the at least one fourth sub-area refers to part or all of the coverage area or service area of the first network device. For example, if the coverage area of the first network device includes first-category sub-areas 1 to 100, the at least one fourth sub-area may be first-category sub-areas 20 to 30, or first-category sub-areas 25 to 40, etc., without limitation.

在一种可能的实施方式中,该步骤130371也可以理解为:终端设备确定至少一个第四子区域中是否包括第一子区域。In a possible implementation, step 130371 may also be understood as: the terminal device determines whether at least one fourth sub-area includes the first sub-area.

在一种可能的实施方式中,在步骤S130371之前,第一网络设备向终端设备发送信息G,该信息G指示至少一个第四子区域的标识和至少一个第四子区域分别对应的第二接入信息。第四子区域对应的第二接入信息用于该第四子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。示例性的,信息G也可以称为第三信息。In one possible implementation, before step S130371, the first network device sends information G to the terminal device, indicating the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area. The second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used by the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device. Information G may also be referred to as third information.

示例性的,第二接入信息包括以下至少一项:第二网络设备的标识、目标波束的标识、随机接入资源或随机接入前导码。目标波束为第二网络设备的波束。随机接入资源可以包括RO。随机接入前导码可以为小区切换过程中的专用前导码。Exemplarily, the second access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of the second network device, an identifier of the target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble. The target beam is the beam of the second network device. The random access resource may include an RO. The random access preamble may be a dedicated preamble used during cell handover.

作为一种可能的实现,第四子区域的标识和第四子区域对应的第二接入信息可以携带在媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)中。示例性的,如图27所示,为一种可能的MAC PDU的帧结构。As a possible implementation, the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area can be carried in a media access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU). For example, FIG27 shows a possible MAC PDU frame structure.

参见图27,MAC PDU包括至少一个MAC子PDU(MAC subPDU)。MAC subPDU分为包含MAC控制元素(control element,CE)的MAC subPDU、包含MAC业务数据单元(service data unit,SDU)的MAC subPDU以及包含填充(padding)的MAC subPDU(可选)。其中,包含MAC CE的MAC subPDU包括子头(subheader)和MAC CE。包含MAC PDU的MAC subPDU包括子头和MAC SDU。As shown in Figure 27 , a MAC PDU includes at least one MAC sub-PDU (MAC subPDU). A MAC subPDU is divided into a MAC subPDU containing a MAC control element (CE), a MAC subPDU containing a MAC service data unit (SDU), and an optional MAC subPDU containing padding. A MAC subPDU containing a MAC CE includes a subheader and a MAC CE. A MAC subPDU containing a MAC PDU includes a subheader and a MAC SDU.

示例性的,第四子区域的标识和第四子区域对应的第二接入信息可以位于MAC PDU的子头中,如位于包含MAC PDU的MAC subPDU的子头中;Illustratively, the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area may be located in a sub-header of a MAC PDU, such as a sub-header of a MAC subPDU that includes the MAC PDU.

或者,第四子区域的标识和第四子区域对应的第二接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC CE中;Alternatively, the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area are located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU;

或者,第四子区域的标识位于MAC PDU的子头中,如位于包含MAC PDU的MAC subPDU的子头中;第四子区域对应的第二接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC CE中。Alternatively, the identifier of the fourth sub-area is located in the sub-header of the MAC PDU, such as in the sub-header of the MAC subPDU containing the MAC PDU; the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU.

可选的,不同第四子区域的标识及其对应的第二接入信息可以位于不同的MAC PDU中,或者,也可以位于相同的MAC PDU中,不予限制。Optionally, the identifiers of different fourth sub-areas and their corresponding second access information can be located in different MAC PDUs, or they can be located in the same MAC PDU, without restriction.

在一种可能的实施方式中,除第四子区域的标识和第四子区域对应的第二接入信息外,第一网络设备还指示终端设备的标识或终端设备组的标识。第四子区域中的终端设备收到第一网络设备的指示后,若第一网络设备指示的终端设备的标识包括自身的标识,或者包括自身所属终端设备组的标识,则该终端设备根据第四子区域对应的第二接入信息接入其他网络设备。In one possible implementation, in addition to the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area, the first network device further indicates the identifier of the terminal device or the identifier of the terminal device group. After the terminal device in the fourth sub-area receives the instruction from the first network device, if the identifier of the terminal device indicated by the first network device includes the terminal device's own identifier or the identifier of the terminal device group to which the terminal device belongs, the terminal device accesses the other network device according to the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area.

或者,第一网络设备可以向同一第四子区域中的不同终端设备或终端设备组指示不同的第二接入信息,如指示不同的随机接入资源、不同的目标网络设备等。Alternatively, the first network device may indicate different second access information to different terminal devices or terminal device groups in the same fourth sub-area, such as indicating different random access resources, different target network devices, etc.

在一种可能的实施方式中,由于第四子区域中的终端设备会接入其他网络设备,因此,第一网络设备向终端设备指示的第四子区域的标识、终端设备的标识或终端设备组的标识,可以理解为切换命令,用于指示第四子区域中的终端设备接入其他网络设备。In one possible implementation, since the terminal device in the fourth sub-area will access other network devices, the identifier of the fourth sub-area, the identifier of the terminal device, or the identifier of the terminal device group indicated by the first network device to the terminal device can be understood as a switching command, used to instruct the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access other network devices.

S130372、若至少一个第四子区域的标识包括第一子区域的标识,终端设备根据第一子区域对应的第二接入信息,接入第二网络设备。S130372: If the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the terminal device accesses the second network device according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

示例性的,若至少一个第四子区域的标识包括第一子区域的标识,则表示第一网络设备指示第一子区域中的终端设备接入其他网络设备或进行小区切换,从而终端设备可以根据第一子区域对应的接入信息,接入第二网络设备。Exemplarily, if the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, it means that the first network device instructs the terminal device in the first sub-area to access other network devices or perform cell switching, so that the terminal device can access the second network device according to the access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

作为一种可能的实现,若第一网络设备还指示终端设备的标识或终端设备组的标识,则在至少一个第四子区域的标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,终端设备还需要判断第一网络设备指示的终端设备的标识是否包括自身的标识,或者判断第一网络设备指示的终端设备组的标识是否包括自身所属终端设备组的标识,若是,则根据第一子区域对应的第二接入信息,接入第二网络设备。As a possible implementation, if the first network device also indicates the identifier of the terminal device or the identifier of the terminal device group, then when the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the terminal device also needs to determine whether the identifier of the terminal device indicated by the first network device includes its own identifier, or determine whether the identifier of the terminal device group indicated by the first network device includes the identifier of the terminal device group to which it belongs. If so, access the second network device according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

示例性的,根据第一子区域对应的第二接入信息,接入第二网络设备可以包括:在第二接入信息指示的随机接入资源上,使用目标波束对应的发送波束,向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导码。Exemplarily, according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area, accessing the second network device may include: sending a random access preamble code to the second network device using a transmitting beam corresponding to the target beam on the random access resource indicated by the second access information.

基于该方式七,第一网络设备可以向终端设备指示第四子区域的标识及其对应的接入信息,使得第四子区域中的终端设备可以根据接入信息接入其他网络设备。此外,第一网络设备可以为不同的第四子区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同第四子区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入其他网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on this seventh approach, the first network device can indicate the identifier of the fourth sub-area and its corresponding access information to the terminal device, so that the terminal device in the fourth sub-area can access other network devices based on the access information. In addition, the first network device can indicate different random access resources for different fourth sub-areas, so that terminal devices in different fourth sub-areas can access other network devices using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions when the terminal device performs random access, thereby improving the access success rate.

在上述方式一至方式七中,上述初始区域可以理解为第一网络设备生效或使用的初始区域。此时,第一子区域、第二子区域或第三子区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中,终端设备所处的区域。此外,上述初始区域也可以为第二网络设备生效或使用的初始区域。此时,第一子区域、第二子区域或第三子区域为第二网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中,终端设备所处的区域。该场景下,终端设备可以采用如下方式八进行通信。In the above-mentioned methods 1 to 7, the above-mentioned initial area can be understood as the initial area in which the first network device is effective or used. In this case, the first sub-area, the second sub-area, or the third sub-area is the area in which the terminal device is located within the coverage area or service area of the first network device. In addition, the above-mentioned initial area can also be the initial area in which the second network device is effective or used. In this case, the first sub-area, the second sub-area, or the third sub-area is the area in which the terminal device is located within the coverage area or service area of the second network device. In this scenario, the terminal device can communicate using the following method 8.

方式八、子区域包括第一类子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,如图28所示,终端设备根据子区域标识进行通信,包括:Mode 8: When the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, as shown in FIG28 , the terminal device communicates according to the sub-area identifier, including:

S130381、终端设备根据第一子区域的标识,接收第一子区域对应的第三接入信息。S130381. The terminal device receives third access information corresponding to the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area.

其中,第一子区域为第二网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中终端设备所处的第一类子区域。第一子区域对应的第三接入信息用于第一子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。第一子区域对应的第三接入信息是第二网络设备发送的。示例性的,该第三接入信息包括以下至少一项:目标波束的标识、随机接入资源或随机接入前导码。目标波束为第二网络设备的波束。The first sub-area is a first-type sub-area within the coverage area or service area of the second network device where the terminal device is located. The third access information corresponding to the first sub-area is used for the terminal device in the first sub-area to access the second network device. The third access information corresponding to the first sub-area is sent by the second network device. Exemplarily, the third access information includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource, or a random access preamble. The target beam is the beam of the second network device.

作为一种可能的实现,第二网络设备可以通过PDCCH承载第二信息。进一步的,该PDCCH可以采用第一子区域的标识加扰。因此,终端设备根据第一子区域的标识,接收第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,可以包括:终端设备根据第一子区域的标识解析该PDCCH,从而获取PDCCH中承载的第三接入信息。As a possible implementation, the second network device may carry the second information via a PDCCH. Further, the PDCCH may be scrambled using the identifier of the first sub-region. Therefore, the terminal device receiving the third access information corresponding to the first sub-region based on the identifier of the first sub-region may include: the terminal device parsing the PDCCH based on the identifier of the first sub-region, thereby obtaining the third access information carried in the PDCCH.

可选的,第二网络设备可以通过不同的PDCCH发送不同子区域对应的接入信息。进一步的,不同PDCCH可以采用相应子区域的标识加扰,例如,PDCCH#1承载第一类子区域1对应的第三接入信息,PDCCH#2承载第一类子区域2对应的第三接入信息,则PDCCH#1采用第一类子区域1的标识加扰,PDCCH#2采用第一类子区域2的标识加扰。不同子区域对应的接入信息可以不同。Optionally, the second network device may send access information corresponding to different sub-areas via different PDCCHs. Furthermore, different PDCCHs may be scrambled using the identifiers of the corresponding sub-areas. For example, if PDCCH#1 carries the third access information corresponding to first-category sub-area 1, and PDCCH#2 carries the third access information corresponding to first-category sub-area 2, then PDCCH#1 is scrambled using the identifier of first-category sub-area 1, and PDCCH#2 is scrambled using the identifier of first-category sub-area 2. The access information corresponding to different sub-areas may be different.

S130382、终端设备根据第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,接入第二网络设备。S130382. The terminal device accesses the second network device according to the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

示例性的,终端设备根据第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,接入第二网络设备可以包括:在第三接入信息指示的随机接入资源上,使用目标波束对应的发送波束,向第二网络设备发送随机接入前导码。Exemplarily, the terminal device accessing the second network device according to the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area may include: sending a random access preamble code to the second network device using the transmitting beam corresponding to the target beam on the random access resource indicated by the third access information.

示例性的,可以认为上述方式八对应的方案适用于以下场景:终端设备首先接入第一网络设备,在第一网络设备保持RRC连接态。后续第一网络设备向终端设备指示第二网络设备生效的初始区域,终端设备根据自身位置信息确定第二网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中,终端设备所处的子区域(即第一子区域)。再根据第一子区域的标识接收来自第二网络设备的第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,根据该第三接入信息接入第二网络设备。即可以认为终端设备从第一网络设备切换到第二网络设备。For example, it can be considered that the solution corresponding to the above-mentioned method eight is applicable to the following scenario: the terminal device first accesses the first network device and maintains the RRC connection state on the first network device. Subsequently, the first network device indicates to the terminal device the initial area in which the second network device takes effect, and the terminal device determines the sub-area (i.e., the first sub-area) in which the terminal device is located in the coverage area or service area of the second network device based on its own location information. Then, based on the identifier of the first sub-area, the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area from the second network device is received, and the second network device is accessed based on the third access information. That is, it can be considered that the terminal device switches from the first network device to the second network device.

基于该方式八,第二网络设备可以指示各个第一类子区域对应的接入信息,使得第一类子区域中的终端设备可以根据接入信息接入第二网络设备。此外,第二网络设备可以为不同的第一类子区域指示不同的随机接入资源,使得不同第一类子区域中的终端设备可以在不同的随机接入资源上接入第二网络设备,减少终端设备进行随机接入时的资源碰撞,从而提高接入成功率。Based on this eighth approach, the second network device can indicate the access information corresponding to each first-class sub-area, so that terminal devices in the first-class sub-area can access the second network device based on the access information. In addition, the second network device can indicate different random access resources for different first-class sub-areas, so that terminal devices in different first-class sub-areas can access the second network device using different random access resources, thereby reducing resource collisions when terminal devices perform random access, thereby improving the access success rate.

以上对步骤S1303b进行了说明。此外,子区域包括第三类子区域的情况下,步骤S1303c可以包括:终端设备根据信息H和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新。示例性的,信息G也可以称为第四信息。信息G可以是第一网络设备向终端设备发送的,即终端设备还接收来自第一网络设备的信息G。Step S1303b is described above. Furthermore, if the sub-area includes a third-type sub-area, step S1303c may include: the terminal device performing a tracking area update based on the information H and the sub-area configuration information. For example, information G may also be referred to as fourth information. Information G may be sent by the first network device to the terminal device, i.e., the terminal device also receives information G from the first network device.

在一种可能的实施方式中,信息G包括参考子区域的标识和数值K。其中,该参考子区域为第三类子区域,K为正整数。In a possible implementation, the information G includes an identifier of a reference sub-region and a value K. The reference sub-region is a third-category sub-region, and K is a positive integer.

作为一种可能的实现,信息G包括参考子区域的标识和数值K的情况下,如图29所示,终端设备根据信息G和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新,包括:As a possible implementation, when the information G includes the identifier of the reference sub-area and the value K, as shown in FIG29 , the terminal device performs a tracking area update according to the information G and the configuration information of the sub-area, including:

S2901、终端设备根据子区域的配置信息确定Nspot_ta个第三类子区域。S2901. The terminal device determines N spot_ta third-category sub-areas according to configuration information of the sub-areas.

其中,Nspot_ta为第三类子区域的总数。示例性的,终端设备可以根据子区域的配置信息确定Nspot_ta个第三类子区域的标识和参考位置等。确定方式可以参考前述相关说明,在此不再赘述。Wherein, N spot_ta is the total number of the third type sub-areas. Exemplarily, the terminal device can determine the identifiers and reference positions of N spot_ta third type sub-areas according to the configuration information of the sub-areas. The determination method can refer to the above related description and will not be repeated here.

S2902、终端设备确定第一跟踪区码列表。S2902. The terminal device determines a first tracking area code list.

示例性的,终端设备可以将参考子区域的标识以及Nspot_ta个第三类子区域中距离参考子区域最近的K或K-1个第三类子区域的标识,确定为第一跟踪区码列表。取距离参考子区域最近的K个第三类子区域的标识时,第一跟踪区码列表包括K+1个标识;取距离参考子区域最近的K-1个第三类子区域的标识时,第一跟踪区码列表包括K个标识。Exemplarily, the terminal device may determine the identifier of the reference sub-area and the identifiers of the K or K-1 third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area among the N spot_ta third-category sub-areas as the first tracking area code list. When the identifiers of the K third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area are taken, the first tracking area code list includes K+1 identifiers; when the identifiers of the K-1 third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area are taken, the first tracking area code list includes K identifiers.

作为一种可能的实现,一个第三类子区域可以理解为一个跟踪区。因此,第三类子区域的标识可以理解为跟踪区码(tracking area code,TAC)。As a possible implementation, a third-category sub-area can be understood as a tracking area. Therefore, the identifier of the third-category sub-area can be understood as a tracking area code (TAC).

作为一种可能的实现,终端设备可以确定Nspot_ta个第三类子区域的参考位置,从而可以确定Nspot_ta个第三类子区域的参考位置与参考子区的参考位置之间的距离,进而确定距离参考子区域最近的K个第三类子区域。As a possible implementation, the terminal device can determine the reference positions of N spot_ta third-category sub-areas, thereby determining the distance between the reference positions of N spot_ta third-category sub-areas and the reference position of the reference sub-area, and then determining the K third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area.

作为一种可能的实现,第一跟踪区码列表中的标识对应的第三类子区域,为第一网络设备的覆盖区域或服务区域中的第三类子区域。As a possible implementation, the third type of sub-area corresponding to the identifier in the first tracking area code list is the third type of sub-area in the coverage area or service area of the first network device.

示例性的,以初始区域包括第三类区域,第三类区域的半径为1000km,或第三类区域的数目为197,细分等级等于0为例,第三类子区域的数目同样为197。第三类子区域的分布可以如图30所示。若信息G包括的参考子区域的标识为32,K为3或4,即信息G包括{32,3}或{32,4},则如图30所示,第一跟踪区码列表包括第三类子区域32、40、45和53。若第二网络设备对应的跟踪区码列表包括第三类子区域28、33和41,则网络侧可以通过信元{28,2}或{28,3}配置第二网络设备对应的第二跟踪区码列表。For example, if the initial area includes a third-category area, the radius of the third-category area is 1000 km, or the number of third-category areas is 197, and the subdivision level is 0, the number of third-category sub-areas is also 197. The distribution of the third-category sub-areas can be shown in FIG30. If the identifier of the reference sub-area included in the information G is 32, and K is 3 or 4, that is, the information G includes {32, 3} or {32, 4}, then as shown in FIG30, the first tracking area code list includes third-category sub-areas 32, 40, 45, and 53. If the tracking area code list corresponding to the second network device includes third-category sub-areas 28, 33, and 41, the network side can configure the second tracking area code list corresponding to the second network device through the information element {28, 2} or {28, 3}.

S2903、在终端设备的跟踪区码列表和第一跟踪区码列表不存在交集的情况下,发起跟踪区更新。S2903: Initiate a tracking area update when there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list.

作为一种可能的实现,终端设备的跟踪区码列表是第一网络设备配置的。终端设备的跟踪区码列表包括至少一个第三类子区域的标识。终端设备的跟踪区码列表可以指示终端设备的寻呼范围。例如,当终端设备处于RRC空闲态时,网络需要在终端设备的跟踪区码列表指示的子区域内对终端设备进行寻呼。示例性的,基于图30所示的示例,终端设备的跟踪区码列表包括的第三类子区域的标识可以为25、30、33、38和46。第一网络设备可以通过信元{25,4}或{25,5}指示终端设备的跟踪区码列表。As a possible implementation, the tracking area code list of the terminal device is configured by the first network device. The tracking area code list of the terminal device includes an identifier of at least one third-category sub-area. The tracking area code list of the terminal device may indicate the paging range of the terminal device. For example, when the terminal device is in the RRC idle state, the network needs to page the terminal device within the sub-area indicated by the tracking area code list of the terminal device. Exemplarily, based on the example shown in Figure 30, the identifiers of the third-category sub-areas included in the tracking area code list of the terminal device may be 25, 30, 33, 38, and 46. The first network device may indicate the tracking area code list of the terminal device through the information element {25,4} or {25,5}.

作为一种可能的实现,终端设备的跟踪区码列表和第一跟踪区码列表不存在交集可以理解为:第一跟踪区码列表不包括终端设备的跟踪区码列表中的任何标识,或者,终端设备的跟踪区码列表中的任何标识都不属于第一跟踪区码列表。As a possible implementation, the fact that there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list can be understood as: the first tracking area code list does not include any identifier in the tracking area code list of the terminal device, or any identifier in the tracking area code list of the terminal device does not belong to the first tracking area code list.

在另一种可能的实施方式中,信息G可以包括第一跟踪区码列表。示例性的,基于图30所示的示例,信息G可以包括32、40、45和53。此时,上述步骤S2902可以不执行,终端设备收到信息G后,直接执行步骤S2903。In another possible implementation, information G may include a first tracking area code list. For example, based on the example shown in FIG30 , information G may include 32, 40, 45, and 53. In this case, step S2902 may not be performed. Upon receiving information G, the terminal device directly executes step S2903.

在又一种可能的实施方式中,信息G包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限。其中,该参考子区域为第三类子区域。更新距离门限也可以有其他名称,不予限制。In another possible implementation, the information G includes an identifier of a reference sub-region and an updated distance threshold. The reference sub-region is a third-category sub-region. The updated distance threshold may also have other names, which are not limited.

作为一种可能的实现,信息G包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限的情况下,如图31所示,终端设备根据信息G和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新,包括:As a possible implementation, when information G includes the identifier of the reference sub-area and the update distance threshold, as shown in FIG31 , the terminal device performs a tracking area update based on information G and the configuration information of the sub-area, including:

S3101、终端设备根据子区域的配置信息和参考子区域的标识确定参考子区域的参考位置。确定方式可参考上述步骤S1301中的相关说明,在此不再赘述。S3101: The terminal device determines the reference position of the reference sub-area according to the configuration information of the sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area. The determination method can refer to the relevant description in the above step S1301 and will not be repeated here.

S3102、终端设备与参考子区域的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于更新距离门限的情况下,发起跟踪区更新。S3102: When the distance between the terminal device and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to the update distance threshold, a tracking area update is initiated.

在一种可能的实施方式中,在不同时间和/或地理位置,跟踪区的大小和数目可以不同。在第三类子区域作为跟踪区,细分等级为0的情况下,即不同时间和/或地理位置初始区域的大小和数目可以不同。In one possible implementation, the size and number of tracking areas may vary at different times and/or geographic locations. When the third type of subarea is used as the tracking area and the subdivision level is 0, the size and number of the initial area may vary at different times and/or geographic locations.

示例性的,在第一时间段或第一地理区域,可以配置半径较大、总数较小的跟踪区,如跟踪区半径为1000km,跟踪区总数为197。或者,在第二时间段或第二地理区域,可以配置半径较小、总数较大的跟踪区,如跟踪区半径为200km,跟踪区总数为4919。For example, in a first time period or a first geographical area, a tracking area with a larger radius and a smaller total number can be configured, such as a tracking area radius of 1000 km and a total number of 197 tracking areas. Alternatively, in a second time period or a second geographical area, a tracking area with a smaller radius and a larger total number can be configured, such as a tracking area radius of 200 km and a total number of 4919 tracking areas.

基于该方案,在跟踪区半径较大的情况下,可以减少跟踪区更新的频次,适用于业务负载较轻的场景。在跟踪区半径较小的情况下,可以减少跟踪区更新的范围,适用于业务负载较重的场景。Based on this solution, when the tracking area radius is large, the frequency of tracking area updates can be reduced, which is suitable for scenarios with light traffic load. When the tracking area radius is small, the scope of tracking area updates can be reduced, which is suitable for scenarios with heavy traffic load.

可以理解的是,以上各个实施例中,由终端设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于该终端设备的部件(例如处理器、芯片、芯片系统、电路、逻辑模块、或软件)实现;由网络设备实现的方法和/或步骤,也可以由可用于该网络设备的部件(例如处理器、芯片、芯片系统、电路、逻辑模块、或软件)实现。其中,芯片系统可以由芯片构成,或者,芯片系统可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。It is understood that in each of the above embodiments, the methods and/or steps implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by components applicable to the terminal device (e.g., processor, chip, chip system, circuit, logic module, or software); the methods and/or steps implemented by the network device may also be implemented by components applicable to the network device (e.g., processor, chip, chip system, circuit, logic module, or software). The chip system may be composed of a chip, or may include a chip and other discrete components.

可以理解的是,该通信装置为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。It is understandable that, in order to realize the above functions, the communication device includes hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function. It should be easily appreciated by those skilled in the art that, in combination with the units and algorithm steps of each example described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed in the form of hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Professional and technical personnel can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of this application.

本申请实施例可以根据上述方法实施例对通信装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of the communication device according to the above method embodiment. For example, each functional module can be divided according to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The above integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic and is only a logical functional division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.

通信装置图32示出了一种通信装置320的结构示意图。该通信装置320包括处理模块3201和收发模块3202。该通信装置320可以用于实现上述终端设备或网络设备的功能。Communication Device Figure 32 shows a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 320. The communication device 320 includes a processing module 3201 and a transceiver module 3202. The communication device 320 can be used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned terminal device or network device.

在一些实施例中,该通信装置320还可以包括存储模块(图32中未示出),用于存储程序指令和数据。In some embodiments, the communication device 320 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 32 ) for storing program instructions and data.

在一些实施例中,收发模块3202,也可以称为收发单元用以实现发送和/或接收功能。该收发模块3202可以由收发电路、收发机、收发器或者通信接口构成。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 3202, which may also be referred to as a transceiver unit, is configured to implement a transmitting and/or receiving function. The transceiver module 3202 may be composed of a transceiver circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver, or a communication interface.

在一些实施例中,收发模块3202,可以包括接收模块和发送模块,分别用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备或网络设备执行的接收和发送类的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程;处理模块3201,可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备或网络设备执行的处理类(例如确定等)的步骤,和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。In some embodiments, the transceiver module 3202 may include a receiving module and a sending module, which are respectively used to execute the receiving and sending steps performed by the terminal device or network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and/or used to support other processes of the technology described herein; the processing module 3201 may be used to execute the processing steps (such as determination, etc.) performed by the terminal device or network device in the above-mentioned method embodiments, and/or used to support other processes of the technology described herein.

示例性的,该通信装置320用于实现上述终端设备的功能时:Exemplarily, when the communication device 320 is used to implement the functions of the above-mentioned terminal device:

收发模块3202,用于接收子区域的配置信息;处理模块3201,用于根据区域的配置信息进行通信。其中,子区域的配置信息指示初始区域和细分等级,初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定子区域,子区域包含于初始区域中。The transceiver module 3202 is configured to receive sub-region configuration information; the processing module 3201 is configured to communicate based on the region configuration information. The sub-region configuration information indicates an initial region and a subdivision level. The initial region, subdivision level, and sub-region determination criteria are used to determine a sub-region, and the sub-region is included in the initial region.

可选的,处理模块3201,用于根据终端设备的位置信息和子区域的配置信息确定子区域标识,收发模块3202,用于根据子区域标识进行通信。其中,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识、第二子区域的标识或第三子区域的标识中的至少一项;第一子区域为终端设备所在的第一类子区域,第二子区域为终端设备所在的第二类子区域,第三子区域为终端设备所在的第三类子区域。Optionally, the processing module 3201 is configured to determine a sub-area identifier based on the location information of the terminal device and the sub-area configuration information, and the transceiver module 3202 is configured to communicate based on the sub-area identifier. The sub-area identifier includes at least one of a first sub-area identifier, a second sub-area identifier, or a third sub-area identifier; the first sub-area is a first-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, the second sub-area is a second-category sub-area where the terminal device is located, and the third sub-area is a third-category sub-area where the terminal device is located.

可选的,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于接收第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,第一接入信息用于第一类子区域中的终端设备接入第一网络设备。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is further used to receive first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, and the first access information is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access the first network device.

可选的,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,处理模块3201,用于根据第一子区域的标识,确定第一子区域对应的第一接入信息;收发模块3202,用于根据第一子区域对应的第一接入信息,接入第一网络设备。Optionally, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the processing module 3201 is used to determine the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; the transceiver module 3202 is used to access the first network device based on the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

可选的,子区域包括第二类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于接收第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息,该通信资源信息指示的通信资源用于第二类子区域中的终端设备进行信息传输。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a second-type sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is further used to receive communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for terminal devices in the second-type sub-area to transmit information.

可选的,子区域标识包括第二子区域的标识的情况下,处理模块3201,还用于根据第二子区域的标识,确定第二子区域对应的通信资源;收发模块3202,还用于在第二子区域对应的通信资源上发送第一信息,第一信息指示第二子区域的标识。Optionally, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the second sub-area, the processing module 3201 is further used to determine the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area based on the identifier of the second sub-area; the transceiver module 3202 is further used to send the first information on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area, where the first information indicates the identifier of the second sub-area.

可选的,子区域包括第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于接收第一信息和/或第二信息。其中,第一信息指示第一子区域集合和/或第二子区域集合,第一子区域集合包括第一网络设备的覆盖子区域中的第一类子区域,第二子区域集合包括第一网络设备覆盖子区域中的第二类子区域。第二信息指示第一子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,和/或,指示第二子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域。Optionally, when the sub-areas include first-type sub-areas and/or second-type sub-areas, the transceiver module 3202 is further configured to receive first information and/or second information. The first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, wherein the first sub-area set includes first-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set includes second-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device. The second information indicates first-type sub-areas in the first sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device, and/or indicates second-type sub-areas in the second sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device.

可选的,收发模块3202,还用于接收信息,该信息指示N个第三时间段和N个第一子区域子集合,和/或,指示M个第四时间段和M个第二子区域子集合。其中,第n个第一子区域子集合包括第一子区域集合中,在第n个第三时间段内被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,N为正整数,n=1,2,…,N;第m个第二子区域子集合包括第二子区域集合中,在第m个第四时间段内被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域,M为正整数,m=1,2,…,M。Optionally, the transceiver module 3202 is further configured to receive information indicating N third time periods and N first sub-region subsets, and/or indicating M fourth time periods and M second sub-region subsets. The nth first sub-region subset includes, in the first sub-region set, the first type of sub-region served by the beam of the first network device during the nth third time period, where N is a positive integer, n=1, 2, ..., N; and the mth second sub-region subset includes, in the second sub-region set, the second type of sub-region served by the beam of the first network device during the mth fourth time period, where M is a positive integer, m=1, 2, ..., M.

可选的,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识和/或第二子区域的标识的情况下,收发模块3202,用于在第一子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段内,根据第一子区域的标识进行通信;或者,收发模块3202,用于在第二子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段内,根据第二子区域的标识进行通信。Optionally, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area and/or the identifier of the second sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is used to communicate according to the identifier of the first sub-area during the time period when the first sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device; or, the transceiver module 3202 is used to communicate according to the identifier of the second sub-area during the time period when the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device.

可选的,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于接收信息,该信息指示以下至少一项:参考子区域的标识、第一仰角、第一网络设备的星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息。其中,参考子区域为第一小区中的一个第一类子区域,第一小区为第一网络设备管理的一个小区;第一仰角为第一小区对应的最小仰角,或为第一子区域对应的最小仰角。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a first-category sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is further configured to receive information indicating at least one of the following: an identifier of a reference sub-area, a first elevation angle, and ephemeris information of the first network device or ephemeris information of the second network device. The reference sub-area is a first-category sub-area in a first cell, where the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device; and the first elevation angle is a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area.

可选的,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,处理模块3201,用于根据第一子区域的标识确定第一子区域的参考位置;处理模块3201,还用于根据第一子区域的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及第一子区域对应的最小仰角,确定第一子区域的剩余服务时间;处理模块3201,还用于在剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。Optionally, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the processing module 3201 is used to determine the reference position of the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; the processing module 3201 is also used to determine the remaining service time of the first sub-area based on the reference position of the first sub-area, the ephemeris information of the first network device and the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area; the processing module 3201 is also used to start neighboring cell measurement before the remaining service time ends.

可选的,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,处理模块3201,用于根据第一子区域的标识确定第一子区域的参考位置;处理模块3201,还用于在第一时间窗内对第二网络设备进行邻区测量。其中,第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移为第一时延和第二时延之差,第一时延为第一子区域的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延,第二时延为第一子区域的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。Optionally, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the processing module 3201 is configured to determine the reference position of the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area; the processing module 3201 is further configured to perform a neighboring cell measurement on the second network device within a first time window. The offset between the start time of the first time window and the reference time is the difference between a first delay and a second delay, where the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the first network device, and the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the second network device.

可选的,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,处理模块3201,用于在以下至少一项满足的情况下,启动邻区测量:第一子区域的参考位置与参考子区域的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第三门限;或者,第一子区域的标识与参考子区域的标识之差大于或等于第四门限。Optionally, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the processing module 3201 is used to start the neighboring cell measurement when at least one of the following is met: the distance between the reference position of the first sub-area and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a third threshold; or the difference between the identifier of the first sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold.

可选的,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于接收第三信息,第三信息指示至少一个第四子区域的标识和至少一个第四子区域分别对应的第二接入信息,第四子区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域中的第一类子区域,第四子区域对应的第二接入信息用于第四子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a first-type sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is also used to receive third information, where the third information indicates the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area, respectively. The fourth sub-area is a first-type sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.

可选的,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,处理模块3201,用于确定至少一个第四子区域的标识中是否包括第一子区域的标识;若至少一个第四子区域的标识包括第一子区域的标识,收发模块3202,用于根据第一子区域对应的第二接入信息,接入第二网络设备。Optionally, when the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the processing module 3201 is used to determine whether the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area; if the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is used to access the second network device according to the second access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

可选的,子区域包括第一类子区域,第一类子区域为第二网络设备生效的子区域,子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于根据第一子区域的标识,接收第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,第三接入信息用于第一子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备;根据第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,接入第二网络设备。Optionally, the sub-area includes a first-type sub-area, and the first-type sub-area is a sub-area in which the second network device is effective. When the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is also used to receive the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area based on the identifier of the first sub-area, and the third access information is used for the terminal device in the first sub-area to access the second network device; and access the second network device based on the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area.

可选的,子区域包括第三类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于接收第四信息,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和数值K,或者,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限,参考子区域为第三类子区域;根据子区域的配置信息进行通信,包括:根据第四信息和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a third-category sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is further used to receive fourth information, where the fourth information includes an identifier and a value K of the reference sub-area, or the fourth information includes an identifier and an updated distance threshold of the reference sub-area, and the reference sub-area is a third-category sub-area; communicating according to the configuration information of the sub-area, including: updating the tracking area according to the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area.

可选的,第四信息包括第二参考子区域的标识和数值K的情况下,处理模块3201,用于根据子区域的配置信息确定Nspot_ta个第三类子区域,Nspot_ta为第三类子区域的总数;处理模块3201,还用于将参考子区域的标识和Nspot_ta个第三类子区域中距离参考子区域最近的K个第三类子区域的标识,确定为第一跟踪区码列表;处理模块3201,还用于在终端设备的跟踪区码列表和第一跟踪区码列表不存在交集的情况下,发起跟踪区更新。Optionally, when the fourth information includes the identifier of the second reference sub-area and the numerical value K, the processing module 3201 is used to determine N spot_ta third-category sub-areas based on the configuration information of the sub-area, where N spot_ta is the total number of third-category sub-areas; the processing module 3201 is also used to determine the identifier of the reference sub-area and the identifiers of the K third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area among the N spot_ta third-category sub-areas as a first tracking area code list; the processing module 3201 is also used to initiate a tracking area update when there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list.

可选的,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限的情况下,处理模块3201,用于根据子区域的配置信息和参考子区域的标识确定参考子区域的参考位置;处理模块3201,还用于在终端设备与参考子区域的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于更新距离门限的情况下,发起跟踪区更新。Optionally, when the fourth information includes the identifier of the reference sub-area and the update distance threshold, the processing module 3201 is used to determine the reference position of the reference sub-area based on the configuration information of the sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area; the processing module 3201 is also used to initiate a tracking area update when the distance between the terminal device and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to the update distance threshold.

该通信装置320用于实现上述网络设备的功能时:When the communication device 320 is used to implement the functions of the above network device:

处理模块3201,用于获取子区域的配置信息;收发模块3202,用于发送该配置信息。其中,该配置信息指示初始区域和细分等级,初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定子区域,子区域包含于初始区域中。The processing module 3201 is configured to obtain sub-area configuration information, and the transceiver module 3202 is configured to send the configuration information. The configuration information indicates an initial area and a subdivision level. The initial area, subdivision level, and sub-area determination criteria are used to determine a sub-area, and the sub-area is included in the initial area.

可选的,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于发送第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,第一接入信息用于第一类子区域中的终端设备接入第一网络设备。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a first type of sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is further used to send first access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area, and the first access information is used for the terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access the first network device.

可选的,子区域包括第二类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于发送第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息,通信资源信息指示的通信资源用于第二类子区域中的终端设备进行信息传输。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a second-type sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is further used to send communication resource information corresponding to the second-type sub-area, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second-type sub-area.

可选的,子区域包括第一类子区域和/或第二类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于发送第一信息和/或第二信息。其中,第一信息指示第一子区域集合和/或第二子区域集合,第一子区域集合包括第一网络设备的覆盖子区域中的第一类子区域,第二子区域集合包括第一网络设备覆盖子区域中的第二类子区域。第二信息指示第一子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,和/或,指示第二子区域集合中被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域。Optionally, when the sub-areas include first-type sub-areas and/or second-type sub-areas, the transceiver module 3202 is further configured to send first information and/or second information. The first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, wherein the first sub-area set includes first-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set includes second-type sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device. The second information indicates first-type sub-areas in the first sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device, and/or indicates second-type sub-areas in the second sub-area set that are served by the beam of the first network device.

可选的,子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于发送第三信息,第三信息指示至少一个第四子区域的标识和至少一个第四子区域分别对应的第二接入信息,第四子区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域中的第一类子区域,第四子区域对应的第二接入信息用于第四子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a first-type sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is also used to send a third information, where the third information indicates the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to at least one fourth sub-area, respectively. The fourth sub-area is a first-type sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device.

可选的,子区域包括第三类子区域的情况下,收发模块3202,还用于发送第四信息,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和数值K,或者,第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限,参考子区域为第三类子区域。Optionally, when the sub-area includes a third-category sub-area, the transceiver module 3202 is further used to send fourth information, where the fourth information includes an identifier and a value K of the reference sub-area, or the fourth information includes an identifier and an updated distance threshold of the reference sub-area, and the reference sub-area is a third-category sub-area.

其中,上述方法实施例涉及的各步骤的所有相关内容均可以援引到对应功能模块的功能描述,在此不再赘述。Among them, all relevant contents of each step involved in the above method embodiment can be referred to the functional description of the corresponding functional module and will not be repeated here.

在本申请中,该通信装置320可以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的形式来呈现。这里的“模块”可以指特定专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),电路,执行一个或多个软件或固件程序的处理器和存储器,集成逻辑电路,和/或其他可以提供上述功能的器件。In the present application, the communication device 320 may be presented in the form of various functional modules divided in an integrated manner. The "module" here may refer to a specific application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a circuit, a processor and memory that executes one or more software or firmware programs, an integrated logic circuit, and/or other devices that can provide the above functions.

在一些实施例中,当图32中的通信装置320是芯片或芯片系统时,收发模块3202的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的输入输出接口(或通信接口)实现,处理模块3201的功能/实现过程可以通过芯片或芯片系统的处理器(或者处理电路)实现。In some embodiments, when the communication device 320 in Figure 32 is a chip or a chip system, the function/implementation process of the transceiver module 3202 can be implemented through the input and output interface (or communication interface) of the chip or chip system, and the function/implementation process of the processing module 3201 can be implemented through the processor (or processing circuit) of the chip or chip system.

由于本实施例提供的通信装置320可执行上述方法,因此其所能获得的技术效果可参考上述方法实施例,在此不再赘述。Since the communication device 320 provided in this embodiment can execute the above method, the technical effects that can be obtained can refer to the above method embodiments and will not be repeated here.

作为一种可能的产品形态,本申请实施例所述的终端设备或网络设备,还可以使用下述来实现:一个或多个现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)、控制器、状态机、门逻辑、分立硬件部件、任何其它适合的电路、或者能够执行本申请通篇所描述的各种功能的电路的任意组合。As a possible product form, the terminal device or network device described in the embodiments of the present application can also be implemented using the following: one or more field programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), controllers, state machines, gate logic, discrete hardware components, any other suitable circuits, or any combination of circuits that can perform the various functions described throughout this application.

作为另一种可能的产品形态,本申请实施例所述的终端设备或网络设备,可以由一般性的总线体系结构来实现。为了便于说明,参见图33,图33是本申请实施例提供的通信装置3300的结构示意图,该通信装置3300包括处理器3301和收发器3302。该通信装置3300可以为终端设备,或其中的芯片或芯片系统;或者,该通信装置3300可以为网络设备,或其中的芯片或芯片系统。图33仅示出了通信装置3300的主要部件。除处理器3301和收发器3302之外,所述通信装置还可以进一步包括存储器3303、以及输入输出装置(图未示意)。As another possible product form, the terminal device or network device described in the embodiment of the present application can be implemented by a general bus architecture. For ease of explanation, refer to Figure 33, which is a structural diagram of a communication device 3300 provided in an embodiment of the present application, wherein the communication device 3300 includes a processor 3301 and a transceiver 3302. The communication device 3300 can be a terminal device, or a chip or chip system therein; or, the communication device 3300 can be a network device, or a chip or chip system therein. Figure 33 only shows the main components of the communication device 3300. In addition to the processor 3301 and the transceiver 3302, the communication device may further include a memory 3303, and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).

可选的,处理器3301主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个通信装置进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。存储器3303主要用于存储软件程序和数据。收发器3302可以包括射频电路和天线,射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。Optionally, the processor 3301 is primarily used to process communication protocols and communication data, as well as control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process software program data. The memory 3303 is primarily used to store software programs and data. The transceiver 3302 may include a radio frequency circuit and an antenna. The radio frequency circuit is primarily used to convert baseband signals into radio frequency signals and process radio frequency signals. The antenna is primarily used to transmit and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as a touch screen, display, and keyboard, are primarily used to receive user input and output data to the user.

可选的,处理器3301、收发器3302、以及存储器3303可以通过通信总线连接。Optionally, the processor 3301 , the transceiver 3302 , and the memory 3303 may be connected via a communication bus.

当通信装置开机后,处理器3301可以读取存储器3303中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器3301对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到通信装置时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器3301,处理器3301将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。When the communication device is powered on, the processor 3301 can read the software program in the memory 3303, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. When data needs to be sent wirelessly, the processor 3301 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent and outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit. The radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and then transmits the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna. When data is sent to the communication device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 3301. The processor 3301 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.

在另一种实现中,所述的射频电路和天线可以独立于进行基带处理的处理器而设置,例如在分布式场景中,射频电路和天线可以与独立于通信装置,呈拉远式的布置。In another implementation, the RF circuit and antenna may be provided independently of the processor performing baseband processing. For example, in a distributed scenario, the RF circuit and antenna may be remotely arranged independent of the communication device.

在一些实施例中,在硬件实现上,本领域的技术人员可以想到上述通信装置320可以采用图33所示的通信装置3300的形式。In some embodiments, in terms of hardware implementation, those skilled in the art may conceive that the above-mentioned communication device 320 may take the form of the communication device 3300 shown in FIG. 33 .

作为一种示例,图32中的处理模块3201的功能/实现过程可以通过图33所示的通信装置3300中的处理器3301调用存储器3303中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。图32中的收发模块3202的功能/实现过程可以通过图33所示的通信装置3300中的收发器3302来实现。As an example, the functions/implementation process of the processing module 3201 in FIG32 can be implemented by the processor 3301 in the communication device 3300 shown in FIG33 calling the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory 3303. The functions/implementation process of the transceiver module 3202 in FIG32 can be implemented by the transceiver 3302 in the communication device 3300 shown in FIG33.

作为又一种可能的产品形态,本申请中的终端设备或网络设备可以采用图34所示的组成结构,或者包括图34所示的部件。图34为本申请提供的一种通信装置3400的组成示意图,该通信装置3400可以为网络设备或者网络设备中的模块或芯片或片上系统;或者该通信装置3400可以为终端设备或者终端设备中的模块或芯片或片上系统。As another possible product form, the terminal device or network device in this application may adopt the structure shown in Figure 34, or include the components shown in Figure 34. Figure 34 is a schematic diagram of the structure of a communication device 3400 provided in this application. The communication device 3400 may be a network device or a module, chip, or system-on-chip in a network device; or the communication device 3400 may be a terminal device or a module, chip, or system-on-chip in a terminal device.

如图34所示,该通信装置3400包括至少一个处理器3401,以及至少一个通信接口(图34中仅是示例性的以包括一个通信接口3404,以及一个处理器3401为例进行说明)。可选的,该通信装置3400还可以包括通信总线3402和存储器3403。As shown in FIG34 , the communication device 3400 includes at least one processor 3401 and at least one communication interface ( FIG34 is merely an example of one communication interface 3404 and one processor 3401). Optionally, the communication device 3400 may further include a communication bus 3402 and a memory 3403.

处理器3401可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、通用处理器、网络处理器(network processor,NP)、数字信号处理器(digital signal processing,DSP)、微处理器、微控制器、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或它们的任意组合。处理器3401还可以是其它具有处理功能的装置,例如电路、器件或软件模块,不予限制。Processor 3401 can be a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), a general-purpose processor, a network processor (NP), a digital signal processor (DSP), a microprocessor, a microcontroller, a programmable logic device (PLD), or any combination thereof. Processor 3401 can also be other devices with processing capabilities, such as circuits, devices, or software modules, without limitation.

通信总线3402用于连接通信装置3400中的不同组件,使得不同组件可以通信。通信总线3402可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,EISA)总线等。该总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图34中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Communication bus 3402 is used to connect the various components in communication device 3400, enabling communication between them. Communication bus 3402 may be a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus or an Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) bus. This bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and so on. For ease of illustration, FIG34 shows a single thick line, but this does not imply that there is only one bus or only one type of bus.

通信接口3404,用于与其他设备或通信网络通信。示例性的,通信接口3404可以模块、电路、收发器或者任何能够实现通信的装置。可选的,所述通信接口3404也可以是位于处理器3401内的输入输出接口,用以实现处理器的信号输入和信号输出。Communication interface 3404 is used to communicate with other devices or communication networks. Exemplarily, communication interface 3404 can be a module, circuit, transceiver, or any other device capable of communication. Optionally, communication interface 3404 can also be an input/output interface within processor 3401, used to implement signal input and output to the processor.

存储器3403,可以是具有存储功能的装置,用于存储指令和/或数据。其中,指令可以是计算机程序。The memory 3403 may be a device with a storage function, used to store instructions and/or data, wherein the instructions may be computer programs.

示例性的,存储器3403可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和/或指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,也可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或可存储信息和/或指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,还可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或其他磁存储设备等,不予限制。Exemplarily, the memory 3403 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and/or instructions, or a random access memory (RAM) or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and/or instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical disc, laser disc, optical disc, digital versatile disc, Blu-ray disc, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, etc., without limitation.

需要指出的是,存储器3403可以独立于处理器3401存在,也可以和处理器3401集成在一起。存储器3403可以位于通信装置3400内,也可以位于通信装置3400外,不予限制。处理器3401,可以用于执行存储器3403中存储的指令,以实现本申请下述实施例提供的方法。It should be noted that the memory 3403 can exist independently of the processor 3401 or can be integrated with the processor 3401. The memory 3403 can be located within the communication device 3400 or outside the communication device 3400, without limitation. The processor 3401 can be used to execute instructions stored in the memory 3403 to implement the methods provided in the following embodiments of the present application.

可选的,处理器3401和/或存储器3403中可以包括人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)模块,AI模块用于实现AI相关的功能。AI模块可以是通过软件,硬件,或软硬结合的方式实现。例如,AI模块可以包括无线网络智能控制器(RAN intelligent controller,RIC)模块。例如AI模块可以是近实时RIC或者非实时RIC。Optionally, the processor 3401 and/or the memory 3403 may include an artificial intelligence (AI) module, which is used to implement AI-related functions. The AI module can be implemented through software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. For example, the AI module may include a radio network intelligent controller (RAN intelligent controller, RIC) module. For example, the AI module may be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.

作为一种可选的实现方式,通信装置3400还可以包括输出设备3405和输入设备3406。输出设备3405和处理器3401通信,可以以多种方式来显示信息。例如,输出设备3405可以是液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD),发光二极管(light emitting diode,LED)显示设备,阴极射线管(cathode ray tube,CRT)显示设备,或投影仪(projector)等。输入设备3406和处理器3401通信,可以以多种方式接收用户的输入。例如,输入设备3406可以是鼠标、键盘、触摸屏设备或传感设备等。As an optional implementation, the communication device 3400 may further include an output device 3405 and an input device 3406. The output device 3405 communicates with the processor 3401 and can display information in a variety of ways. For example, the output device 3405 can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), a light emitting diode (LED) display device, a cathode ray tube (CRT) display device, or a projector. The input device 3406 communicates with the processor 3401 and can receive user input in a variety of ways. For example, the input device 3406 can be a mouse, a keyboard, a touch screen device, or a sensor device.

在一些实施例中,在硬件实现上,本领域的技术人员可以想到上述图32所示的通信装置320可以采用图34所示的通信装置3400的形式。In some embodiments, in terms of hardware implementation, those skilled in the art may conceive that the communication device 320 shown in FIG. 32 may take the form of the communication device 3400 shown in FIG. 34 .

作为一种示例,图32中的处理模块3201的功能/实现过程可以通过图34所示的通信装置3400中的处理器3401调用存储器3403中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。图32中的收发模块3202的功能/实现过程可以通过图34所示的通信装置3400中的通信接口3404来实现。As an example, the functions/implementation process of the processing module 3201 in FIG32 can be implemented by the processor 3401 in the communication device 3400 shown in FIG34 calling the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory 3403. The functions/implementation process of the transceiver module 3202 in FIG32 can be implemented by the communication interface 3404 in the communication device 3400 shown in FIG34.

需要说明的是,图34所示的结构并不构成对网络设备的具体限定。比如,在本申请另一些实施例中,网络设备可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It should be noted that the structure shown in FIG34 does not constitute a specific limitation on the network device. For example, in other embodiments of the present application, the network device may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or combine or split some components, or arrange the components differently. The components shown in the figure may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.

在一些实施例中,本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置,该通信装置包括处理器,用于实现上述任一方法实施例中的方法。In some embodiments, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication device, which includes a processor for implementing the method in any of the above method embodiments.

作为一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括存储器。该存储器,用于保存必要的计算机程序和数据。该计算机程序可以包括指令,处理器可以调用存储器中存储的计算机程序中的指令以指令该通信装置执行上述任一方法实施例中的方法。当然,存储器也可以不在该通信装置中。As a possible implementation, the communication device further includes a memory. The memory is used to store necessary computer programs and data. The computer program may include instructions, and the processor may invoke the instructions in the computer program stored in the memory to instruct the communication device to execute any of the above-described method embodiments. Of course, the memory may not be located in the communication device.

作为另一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括接口电路,该接口电路为代码/数据读写接口电路,该接口电路用于接收计算机执行指令(计算机执行指令存储在存储器中,可能直接从存储器读取,或可能经过其他器件)并传输至该处理器。As another possible implementation, the communication device also includes an interface circuit, which is a code/data read/write interface circuit, and the interface circuit is used to receive computer execution instructions (computer execution instructions are stored in a memory, may be read directly from the memory, or may pass through other devices) and transmit them to the processor.

作为又一种可能的实现方式,该通信装置还包括通信接口,该通信接口用于与该通信装置之外的模块通信。As another possible implementation, the communication device further includes a communication interface, where the communication interface is used to communicate with a module outside the communication device.

可以理解的是,该通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统,该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。It can be understood that the communication device can be a chip or a chip system. When the communication device is a chip system, it can be composed of chips or include chips and other discrete devices. The embodiments of the present application do not specifically limit this.

本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,该计算机程序或指令被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium having a computer program or instruction stored thereon, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.

本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。The present application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when executed by a computer.

本领域普通技术人员可以理解,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art will appreciate that, for the sake of convenience and brevity of description, the specific working processes of the above-described systems, devices, and units may refer to the corresponding processes in the aforementioned method embodiments and will not be repeated here.

可以理解,本申请中描述的系统、装置和方法也可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。It is understood that the systems, devices, and methods described in this application may also be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the units is merely a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed. In addition, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interface, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, and may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.

所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate, i.e., they may be located in one place or distributed across multiple network units. Components shown as units may or may not be physical units. Some or all of these units may be selected to achieve the objectives of this embodiment as needed.

另外,本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.

在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state drive,SSD))等。本申请实施例中,计算机可以包括前面所述的装置。In the above embodiments, it can be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using a software program, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, the process or function described in the embodiment of the present application is generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, the computer instructions can be transmitted from one website, computer, server or data center to another website, computer, server or data center by wired (such as coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (DSL)) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) means. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that can be integrated with one or more media. The available medium may be a magnetic medium (e.g., a floppy disk, a hard disk, a magnetic tape), an optical medium (e.g., a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (e.g., a solid state drive (SSD)). In the embodiment of the present application, the computer may include the aforementioned device.

尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看所述附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现所述公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。Although the present application is described herein in conjunction with various embodiments, in the process of implementing the claimed application, those skilled in the art can understand and implement other changes to the disclosed embodiments by reviewing the drawings, the disclosure, and the appended claims. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "a" or "an" does not exclude multiple situations. A single processor or other unit can implement several functions listed in the claims. Certain measures are recorded in different dependent claims, but this does not mean that these measures cannot be combined to produce good results.

尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Although the present application has been described with reference to specific features and embodiments thereof, it is apparent that various modifications and combinations may be made thereto without departing from the spirit and scope of the present application. Accordingly, this specification and the drawings are merely illustrative of the present application as defined by the appended claims and are deemed to cover any and all modifications, variations, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the present application. Obviously, those skilled in the art may make various modifications and variations to the present application without departing from the scope of the present application. Thus, the present application is intended to include such modifications and variations as fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents.

Claims (43)

一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises: 接收子区域的配置信息,所述配置信息指示初始区域和细分等级,所述初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定所述子区域,所述子区域包含于所述初始区域中;receiving configuration information of a sub-region, the configuration information indicating an initial region and a subdivision level, the initial region, the subdivision level, and a sub-region determination criterion being used to determine the sub-region, the sub-region being included in the initial region; 根据所述区域的配置信息进行通信。Communication is performed according to the configuration information of the zone. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域确定准则包括:所述子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影是根据所述细分等级确定的;所述子区域的参考位置是根据所述子区域的参考位置在所述单位正方形上的投影确定的。The method according to claim 1 is characterized in that the sub-region determination criteria include: the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square is determined according to the subdivision level; the reference position of the sub-region is determined according to the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域的参考位置是根据所述子区域的参考位置在所述单位正方形上的投影和所述初始区域的总数确定的。The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the reference position of the sub-region is determined based on the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square and the total number of the initial regions. 根据权利要求2或3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域的参考位置在所述单位正方形上的投影RL(xi,yi)满足如下关系:
The method according to claim 2 or 3, characterized in that the projection RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square satisfies the following relationship:
其中,i表示所述子区域的标识,L表示所述细分等级,Nspot表示所述初始区域的总数。Wherein, i represents the identifier of the sub-region, L represents the subdivision level, and N spot represents the total number of the initial regions.
根据权利要求1-4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述细分等级包括多个网络设备分别对应的细分等级。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the subdivision level includes subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices respectively. 根据权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括第一类子区域、第二类子区域或第三类子区域中的至少一项,所述第一类子区域与广播波束对应,所述第二类子区域与业务波束对应,所述第三类子区域与跟踪区对应。The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5 is characterized in that the sub-area includes at least one of a first type of sub-area, a second type of sub-area or a third type of sub-area, the first type of sub-area corresponds to a broadcast beam, the second type of sub-area corresponds to a service beam, and the third type of sub-area corresponds to a tracking area. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述细分等级包括所述第一类子区域对应的细分等级、所述第二类子区域对应的细分等级或所述第三类子区域对应的细分等级中的至少一项。The method according to claim 6, characterized in that the subdivision level includes at least one of the subdivision level corresponding to the first type of sub-area, the subdivision level corresponding to the second type of sub-area, or the subdivision level corresponding to the third type of sub-area. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,根据所述子区域的配置信息进行通信,包括:The method according to claim 6 or 7, wherein communicating according to the configuration information of the sub-area comprises: 根据终端设备的位置信息和所述子区域的配置信息确定子区域标识,所述子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识、第二子区域的标识或第三子区域的标识中的至少一项;所述第一子区域为所述终端设备所在的所述第一类子区域,所述第二子区域为所述终端设备所在的所述第二类子区域,所述第三子区域为所述终端设备所在的所述第三类子区域;determining a sub-area identifier based on the location information of the terminal device and the configuration information of the sub-area, the sub-area identifier including at least one of an identifier of a first sub-area, an identifier of a second sub-area, or an identifier of a third sub-area; the first sub-area being the first type of sub-area where the terminal device is located, the second sub-area being the second type of sub-area where the terminal device is located, and the third sub-area being the third type of sub-area where the terminal device is located; 根据所述子区域标识进行通信。Communication is performed according to the sub-area identifier. 根据权利要求6-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第一类子区域,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the sub-region includes the first type of sub-region, and the method further comprises: 接收所述第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,所述第一接入信息用于所述第一类子区域中的终端设备接入第一网络设备。First access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area is received, where the first access information is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access a first network device. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一接入信息包括以下至少一项:随机接入时机RO、随机接入前导码、定时提前TA或第一时间段,第一时间段为所述第一网络设备的波束服务第一类区域的时间段,所述第一类子区域为所述第一类区域的子区域。The method according to claim 9 is characterized in that the first access information includes at least one of the following: a random access timing RO, a random access preamble code, a timing advance TA or a first time period, the first time period is the time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the first type of area, and the first type of sub-area is a sub-area of the first type of area. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域标识包括第一子区域的标识的情况下,根据所述子区域标识进行通信,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein, when the sub-region identifier includes an identifier of the first sub-region, communicating according to the sub-region identifier comprises: 根据所述第一子区域的标识,确定所述第一子区域对应的第一接入信息;determining, according to the identifier of the first sub-area, first access information corresponding to the first sub-area; 根据所述第一子区域对应的第一接入信息,接入第一网络设备。Access the first network device according to the first access information corresponding to the first sub-area. 根据权利要求6-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第二类子区域,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the sub-region includes the second type of sub-region, and the method further comprises: 接收所述第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息,所述通信资源信息指示的通信资源用于所述第二类子区域中的终端设备进行信息传输。Communication resource information corresponding to the second type of sub-area is received, where the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second type of sub-area. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述通信资源包括以下至少一项:频域资源、极化方式或第二时间段,第二时间段为第一网络设备的波束服务所述第二类子区域的时间段。The method according to claim 12 is characterized in that the communication resources include at least one of the following: frequency domain resources, polarization mode or a second time period, and the second time period is a time period in which the beam of the first network device serves the second type of sub-area. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域标识包括第二子区域标识的情况下,根据所述子区域标识进行通信,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein, when the sub-region identifier includes a second sub-region identifier, communicating according to the sub-region identifier comprises: 根据所述第二子区域的标识,确定所述第二子区域对应的通信资源;determining, according to the identifier of the second sub-area, a communication resource corresponding to the second sub-area; 在所述第二子区域对应的通信资源上,发送指示所述第二子区域的标识的信息。Information indicating an identifier of the second sub-area is sent on the communication resources corresponding to the second sub-area. 根据权利要求6-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第一类子区域和/或所述第二类子区域;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area; the method further comprises: 接收第一信息和/或第二信息,所述第一信息指示第一子区域集合和/或第二子区域集合,所述第一子区域集合包括第一网络设备的覆盖子区域中的所述第一类子区域,所述第二子区域集合包括所述第一网络设备覆盖子区域中的所述第二类子区域;receiving first information and/or second information, where the first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, the first sub-area set including the first type of sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set including the second type of sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device; 所述第二信息指示所述第一子区域集合中被所述第一网络设备的波束服务的所述第一类子区域,和/或,指示所述第二子区域集合中被所述第一网络设备的波束服务的所述第二类子区域。The second information indicates the first type of sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the first sub-area set, and/or indicates the second type of sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the second sub-area set. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第一类子区域和/或所述第二类子区域;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area; the method further comprises: 接收信息,所述信息指示N个第三时间段和N个第一子区域子集合,和/或,指示M个第四时间段和M个第二子区域子集合;其中,第n个第一子区域子集合包括第一子区域集合中,在第n个第三时间段内被第一网络设备的波束服务的第一类子区域,N为正整数,n=1,2,…,N;第m个第二子区域子集合包括第二子区域集合中,在第m个第四时间段内被第一网络设备的波束服务的第二类子区域,M为正整数,m=1,2,…,M。Receive information indicating N third time periods and N first sub-region subsets, and/or indicating M fourth time periods and M second sub-region subsets; wherein the nth first sub-region subset includes the first type of sub-region served by the beam of the first network device in the first sub-region set during the nth third time period, where N is a positive integer, n=1, 2, ..., N; and the mth second sub-region subset includes the second type of sub-region served by the beam of the first network device in the second sub-region set during the mth fourth time period, where M is a positive integer, m=1, 2, ..., M. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,根据所述子区域标识进行通信,包括:The method according to claim 16, wherein communicating according to the sub-area identifier comprises: 在第一子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段内,根据第一子区域的标识进行通信;或者,During a time period in which the first sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, communicating according to the identifier of the first sub-area; or 在第二子区域被第一网络设备的波束服务的时间段内,根据第二子区域的标识进行通信。During a time period in which the second sub-area is served by the beam of the first network device, communication is performed according to the identifier of the second sub-area. 根据权利要求6-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括第一类子区域的情况下,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 6 to 17, wherein, when the sub-region includes a first-type sub-region, the method further comprises: 接收信息,所述信息指示以下至少一项:参考子区域的标识、第一仰角、第一网络设备的星历信息或第二网络设备的星历信息;receiving information indicating at least one of the following: an identifier of a reference sub-area, a first elevation angle, ephemeris information of a first network device, or ephemeris information of a second network device; 其中,所述参考子区域为第一小区中的一个第一类子区域,所述第一小区为所述第一网络设备管理的一个小区;所述第一仰角为所述第一小区对应的最小仰角,或为第一子区域对应的最小仰角。The reference sub-area is a first-type sub-area in a first cell, and the first cell is a cell managed by the first network device; the first elevation angle is the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first cell, or the minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域标识包括所述第一子区域的标识;根据所述子区域标识进行通信,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the sub-area identifier includes an identifier of the first sub-area; and communicating according to the sub-area identifier comprises: 根据所述第一子区域的标识确定所述第一子区域的参考位置;determining a reference position of the first sub-area according to the identifier of the first sub-area; 根据所述第一子区域的参考位置、第一网络设备的星历信息以及所述第一子区域对应的最小仰角,确定所述第一子区域的剩余服务时间;determining a remaining service time for the first sub-area based on a reference position of the first sub-area, ephemeris information of the first network device, and a minimum elevation angle corresponding to the first sub-area; 在所述剩余服务时间结束之前,启动邻区测量。Before the remaining service time ends, neighbor cell measurement is started. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域标识包括所述第一子区域的标识;根据所述子区域标识进行通信,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the sub-area identifier includes an identifier of the first sub-area; and communicating according to the sub-area identifier comprises: 根据所述第一子区域的标识确定第一子区域的参考位置;determining a reference position of the first sub-region according to the identifier of the first sub-region; 在第一时间窗内对第二网络设备进行邻区测量;Performing a neighboring cell measurement on the second network device within the first time window; 其中,所述第一时间窗的起始时刻和参考时刻之间的偏移为第一时延和第二时延之差,所述第一时延为所述第一子区域的参考位置与第一网络设备之间的传播时延,所述第二时延为所述第一子区域的参考位置与第二网络设备之间的传播时延。The offset between the starting time and the reference time of the first time window is the difference between the first delay and the second delay, the first delay is the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the first network device, and the second delay is the propagation delay between the reference position of the first sub-area and the second network device. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域标识包括所述第一子区域的标识;根据所述子区域标识进行通信,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the sub-area identifier includes an identifier of the first sub-area; and communicating according to the sub-area identifier comprises: 在第一条件满足的情况下,启动邻区测量;When the first condition is met, start neighboring cell measurement; 其中,所述第一条件包括以下至少一项:所述第一子区域的参考位置与参考子区域的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于第三门限;或者,所述第一子区域的标识与参考子区域的标识之差大于或等于第四门限。The first condition includes at least one of the following: the distance between the reference position of the first sub-area and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a third threshold; or the difference between the identifier of the first sub-area and the identifier of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to a fourth threshold. 根据权利要求6-8任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第一类子区域;所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 6 to 8, wherein the sub-region includes the first type of sub-region; the method further comprises: 接收第三信息,所述第三信息指示至少一个第四子区域的标识和所述至少一个第四子区域分别对应的第二接入信息,所述第四子区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域中的所述第一类子区域,所述第四子区域对应的第二接入信息用于所述第四子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。Receive third information, the third information indicating the identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the at least one fourth sub-area, the fourth sub-area being the first type of sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device. 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四子区域对应的第二接入信息包括以下至少一项:第二网络设备的标识、目标波束的标识、随机接入资源或随机接入前导码;其中,所述目标波束为第二网络设备的波束。The method according to claim 22 is characterized in that the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area includes at least one of the following: an identifier of a second network device, an identifier of a target beam, a random access resource or a random access preamble code; wherein the target beam is a beam of the second network device. 根据权利要求22或23所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四子区域的标识和所述第四子区域对应的第二接入信息位于媒体接入控制MAC协议数据单元PDU的子头中;或者,The method according to claim 22 or 23, characterized in that the identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area are located in a subheader of a media access control MAC protocol data unit PDU; or 所述第四子区域的标识和所述第四子区域对应的第二接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC控制元素CE中;或者,The identifier of the fourth sub-area and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area are located in the MAC control element CE of the MAC PDU; or, 所述第四子区域的标识位于MAC PDU的子头中,所述第四子区域对应的第二接入信息位于MAC PDU的MAC CE中。The identifier of the fourth sub-area is located in the sub-header of the MAC PDU, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is located in the MAC CE of the MAC PDU. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第一类子区域,所述第一类子区域为第二网络设备生效的子区域;所述子区域标识包括所述第一子区域的标识;根据所述子区域标识进行通信,包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area, the first type of sub-area is a sub-area in which the second network device is effective; the sub-area identifier includes the identifier of the first sub-area; and communicating according to the sub-area identifier comprises: 根据所述第一子区域的标识,接收所述第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,所述第三接入信息用于所述第一子区域中的终端设备接入所述第二网络设备;receiving, according to the identifier of the first sub-area, third access information corresponding to the first sub-area, where the third access information is used for a terminal device in the first sub-area to access the second network device; 根据所述第一子区域对应的第三接入信息,接入所述第二网络设备。Access the second network device according to the third access information corresponding to the first sub-area. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第三类子区域;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the sub-area includes the third type of sub-area; the method further comprises: 接收第四信息,所述第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和数值K,或者,所述第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限,所述参考子区域为所述第三类子区域;receiving fourth information, the fourth information including an identifier of a reference sub-region and a value K, or the fourth information including an identifier of a reference sub-region and an updated distance threshold, the reference sub-region being the third type of sub-region; 根据所述子区域的配置信息进行通信,包括:根据所述第四信息和所述子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新。Communicating according to the configuration information of the sub-area includes: performing tracking area update according to the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和数值K的情况下,根据所述第四信息和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新,包括:The method according to claim 26, wherein, when the fourth information includes an identifier of a reference sub-area and a value K, performing a tracking area update according to the fourth information and the configuration information of the sub-area comprises: 根据所述子区域的配置信息确定Nspot_ta个第三类子区域,Nspot_ta为第三类子区域的总数;Determine N spot_ta third-category sub-areas according to the configuration information of the sub-areas, where N spot_ta is the total number of the third-category sub-areas; 将所述参考子区域的标识和Nspot_ta个第三类子区域中距离参考子区域最近的K个第三类子区域的标识,确定为第一跟踪区码列表;Determine the identifier of the reference sub-area and the identifiers of the K third-category sub-areas closest to the reference sub-area among the N spot_ta third-category sub-areas as a first tracking area code list; 在终端设备的跟踪区码列表和第一跟踪区码列表不存在交集的情况下,发起跟踪区更新。When there is no intersection between the tracking area code list of the terminal device and the first tracking area code list, a tracking area update is initiated. 根据权利要求26所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限的情况下,根据所述第四信息和子区域的配置信息进行跟踪区更新,包括:The method according to claim 26, wherein, when the fourth information includes an identifier of a reference sub-area and an update distance threshold, performing a tracking area update based on the fourth information and configuration information of the sub-area comprises: 根据子区域的配置信息和参考子区域的标识确定参考子区域的参考位置;Determine a reference position of the reference sub-region according to the configuration information of the sub-region and the identifier of the reference sub-region; 在终端设备与参考子区域的参考位置之间的距离大于或等于更新距离门限的情况下,发起跟踪区更新。When the distance between the terminal device and the reference position of the reference sub-area is greater than or equal to the update distance threshold, a tracking area update is initiated. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method comprises: 获取子区域的配置信息,所述配置信息指示初始区域和细分等级,所述初始区域、细分等级和子区域确定准则用于确定所述子区域,所述子区域包含于所述初始区域中;Acquire configuration information of a sub-region, the configuration information indicating an initial region and a subdivision level, the initial region, the subdivision level, and a sub-region determination criterion being used to determine the sub-region, the sub-region being included in the initial region; 发送所述配置信息。The configuration information is sent. 根据权利要求29所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域确定准则包括:所述子区域的参考位置在单位正方形上的投影是根据所述细分等级确定的;所述子区域的参考位置是根据所述子区域的参考位置在所述单位正方形上的投影确定的。The method according to claim 29 is characterized in that the sub-region determination criteria include: the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square is determined according to the subdivision level; the reference position of the sub-region is determined according to the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square. 根据权利要求30所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域的参考位置是根据所述子区域的参考位置在所述单位正方形上的投影和所述初始区域的总数确定的。The method according to claim 30 is characterized in that the reference position of the sub-region is determined based on the projection of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square and the total number of the initial regions. 根据权利要求30或31所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域的参考位置在所述单位正方形上的投影RL(xi,yi)满足如下关系:
The method according to claim 30 or 31, characterized in that the projection RL( xi , yi ) of the reference position of the sub-region on the unit square satisfies the following relationship:
其中,i表示所述子区域的标识,L表示所述细分等级,Nspot表示所述初始区域的总数。Wherein, i represents the identifier of the sub-region, L represents the subdivision level, and N spot represents the total number of the initial regions.
根据权利要求29-32任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述细分等级包括多个网络设备分别对应的细分等级。The method according to any one of claims 29 to 32 is characterized in that the subdivision level includes subdivision levels corresponding to multiple network devices respectively. 根据权利要求29-33任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括第一类子区域、第二类子区域或第三类子区域中的至少一项,所述第一类子区域与广播波束对应,所述第二类子区域与业务波束对应,所述第三类子区域与跟踪区对应。The method according to any one of claims 29-33 is characterized in that the sub-area includes at least one of a first type of sub-area, a second type of sub-area or a third type of sub-area, the first type of sub-area corresponds to a broadcast beam, the second type of sub-area corresponds to a service beam, and the third type of sub-area corresponds to a tracking area. 根据权利要求34所述的方法,其特征在于,所述细分等级包括所述第一类子区域对应的细分等级、所述第二类子区域对应的细分等级或所述第三类子区域对应的细分等级中的至少一项。The method according to claim 34 is characterized in that the subdivision level includes at least one of the subdivision level corresponding to the first type of sub-area, the subdivision level corresponding to the second type of sub-area, or the subdivision level corresponding to the third type of sub-area. 根据权利要求34或35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第一类子区域,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area, and the method further comprises: 发送所述第一类子区域对应的第一接入信息,所述第一接入信息用于所述第一类子区域中的终端设备接入第一网络设备。First access information corresponding to the first type of sub-area is sent, where the first access information is used for a terminal device in the first type of sub-area to access a first network device. 根据权利要求34或35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第二类子区域,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the sub-area includes the second type of sub-area, and the method further comprises: 发送所述第二类子区域对应的通信资源信息,所述通信资源信息指示的通信资源用于所述第二类子区域中的终端设备进行信息传输。The communication resource information corresponding to the second type of sub-area is sent, and the communication resources indicated by the communication resource information are used for information transmission by terminal devices in the second type of sub-area. 根据权利要求34或35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第一类子区域和/或所述第二类子区域;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the sub-area includes the first type of sub-area and/or the second type of sub-area; the method further comprises: 发送第一信息和/或第二信息,所述第一信息指示第一子区域集合和/或第二子区域集合,所述第一子区域集合包括第一网络设备的覆盖子区域中的所述第一类子区域,所述第二子区域集合包括所述第一网络设备覆盖子区域中的所述第二类子区域;Sending first information and/or second information, where the first information indicates a first sub-area set and/or a second sub-area set, the first sub-area set including the first type of sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device, and the second sub-area set including the second type of sub-areas in the sub-areas covered by the first network device; 所述第二信息指示所述第一子区域集合中被所述第一网络设备的波束服务的所述第一类子区域,和/或,指示所述第二子区域集合中被所述第一网络设备的波束服务的所述第二类子区域。The second information indicates the first type of sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the first sub-area set, and/or indicates the second type of sub-areas served by the beam of the first network device in the second sub-area set. 根据权利要求34或35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第一类子区域;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the sub-region includes the first type of sub-region; the method further comprises: 发送第三信息,所述第三信息指示至少一个第四子区域的标识和所述至少一个第四子区域分别对应的第二接入信息,所述第四子区域为第一网络设备的覆盖区域中的所述第一类子区域,所述第四子区域对应的第二接入信息用于所述第四子区域中的终端设备接入第二网络设备。Send third information, wherein the third information indicates an identifier of at least one fourth sub-area and second access information corresponding to the at least one fourth sub-area, the fourth sub-area being the first type of sub-area in the coverage area of the first network device, and the second access information corresponding to the fourth sub-area is used for the terminal device in the fourth sub-area to access the second network device. 根据权利要求34或35所述的方法,其特征在于,所述子区域包括所述第三类子区域;所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 34 or 35, wherein the sub-area includes the third type of sub-area; the method further comprises: 发送第四信息,所述第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和数值K,或者,所述第四信息包括参考子区域的标识和更新距离门限,所述参考子区域为所述第三类子区域。Send fourth information, where the fourth information includes an identifier of a reference sub-area and a value K, or the fourth information includes an identifier of a reference sub-area and an updated distance threshold, where the reference sub-area is the third type of sub-area. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置包括处理器;所述处理器,用于运行计算机程序或指令,以使所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-28任一项所述的方法,或者,以使所述通信装置执行如权利要求29-40任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that the communication device includes a processor; the processor is used to run a computer program or instruction to enable the communication device to perform the method described in any one of claims 1-28, or to enable the communication device to perform the method described in any one of claims 29-40. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机指令或程序,当计算机指令或程序在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求1-28任一项所述的方法被执行,或者,使得如权利要求29-40任一项所述的方法被执行。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions or programs, which, when the computer instructions or programs are run on a computer, cause the method according to any one of claims 1 to 28 to be executed, or cause the method according to any one of claims 29 to 40 to be executed. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机指令;当部分或全部所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得如权利要求1-28任一项所述的方法被执行,或者,使得如权利要求29-40任一项所述的方法被执行。A computer program product, characterized in that the computer program product includes computer instructions; when part or all of the computer instructions are run on a computer, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 28 is executed, or the method according to any one of claims 29 to 40 is executed.
PCT/CN2025/080812 2024-03-07 2025-03-05 Communication method and apparatus Pending WO2025185663A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202410263802.5A CN120614564A (en) 2024-03-07 2024-03-07 Communication method and device
CN202410263802.5 2024-03-07

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025185663A1 true WO2025185663A1 (en) 2025-09-12
WO2025185663A8 WO2025185663A8 (en) 2025-10-02

Family

ID=96929456

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2025/080812 Pending WO2025185663A1 (en) 2024-03-07 2025-03-05 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN120614564A (en)
WO (1) WO2025185663A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113315562A (en) * 2020-02-27 2021-08-27 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, device and system
WO2023012753A1 (en) * 2021-08-05 2023-02-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Geographical divisions for ta and cgi
CN115915007A (en) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-04 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Terminal position reporting method, equipment, device and storage medium
CN116074892A (en) * 2021-10-29 2023-05-05 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Position information reporting method, receiving method, terminal, satellite and storage medium
CN118574218A (en) * 2023-02-28 2024-08-30 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113315562A (en) * 2020-02-27 2021-08-27 华为技术有限公司 Communication method, device and system
WO2023012753A1 (en) * 2021-08-05 2023-02-09 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Geographical divisions for ta and cgi
CN115915007A (en) * 2021-09-30 2023-04-04 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Terminal position reporting method, equipment, device and storage medium
CN116074892A (en) * 2021-10-29 2023-05-05 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Position information reporting method, receiving method, terminal, satellite and storage medium
CN118574218A (en) * 2023-02-28 2024-08-30 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2025185663A8 (en) 2025-10-02
CN120614564A (en) 2025-09-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP4415282A1 (en) Satellite communication method and satellite communication device
JP7710027B2 (en) Apparatus and method for determining whether a user equipment is located within a registration area - Patents.com
CN115915306A (en) Handover method, communication device, and computer storage medium
CN114303422A (en) Communication control device, communication device, communication control method, and communication method
WO2024219408A1 (en) Relay device, communication device, and communication method
WO2025016213A1 (en) Handover method and communication apparatus
WO2025185663A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024051448A1 (en) Handover method and communication apparatus
JP7648058B2 (en) Network node, base station and communication method
WO2024094313A1 (en) Connected mode mobility management for group of users in a vehicle and served by non-terrestrial network deployments
WO2025065652A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025065625A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025067361A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025156964A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
US20250097796A1 (en) Cell selection for uncrewed aerial vehicle command and control link reliability over cellular networks
US20250294414A1 (en) Random access resource determining method and communication apparatus
EP4618624A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2024219407A1 (en) Relay device, communication device, and communication method
WO2025065540A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025059995A1 (en) Communication method, and apparatus
WO2025076699A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, readable storage medium, and computer program product
WO2025076700A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus, readable storage medium and computer program product
WO2025108263A1 (en) Information sending method and apparatus
WO2024169415A1 (en) Measurement method and communication apparatus
WO2025228091A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 25767401

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1